Loading...
HomeMy WebLinkAboutResolution - 6417 - Contract - Knox Gailey & Meador Inc.- Municipal Square Building Renovations - 06_24_1999Resolution No. 6417 June 24, 1999 Item No. 39 BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: THAT the Mayor of the City of Lubbock BE and is hereby authorized and directed to execute for and on behalf of the City of Lubbock, a contract to install and furnish all materials and services as bid for the Municipal Square Building Renovation — Phase I, between the City of Lubbock and Knox, Gailey & Meador, Inc., and related documents. Said contract is attached hereto and incorporated in this resolution as if fully set forth herein and shall be included in the minutes of the City Council. Passed by the City Council this 24th day of June A / , 1999. MA A Tr, ST: jj h I t-6u ythi arnell City Se etary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: Vzc�m Victor Kilrn , Purchasing Manager APPROVED AS TO FORM: William de Haas Competition and Contracts Manager/Attorney rkb/ccdocs/Knox Gailey & Meadonres June14,1999 r o0l F CITY OF LUBBOCK SPECIFICATIONS FOR MUNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION - PHASE I BID #99105 CITY OF LUBBOCK Lubbock, Texas P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164 ADDENDUM #3 ITB #99105 MUNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION - PHASE I ITB #99105, Addendum #3 Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: May 24,1999 OLD CLOSE DATE: May 27,1999 @ 4:00 P.M. NEW CLOSE DATE: June 1,1999 @ 2:00 P.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any Item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. The closing date has been changed from Thursday, May 27, 1999 at 4:00 P.M. to the new closing date of Tuesday. June 1.1999 @ 2:00 P.M. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Questions may be faxed to: or Email to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806) 775-2164 RShuffield@mall.ci.lubbock.tx.us THAAK YOU ASh�uffield 41 Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID ITB 99105ad3.doc i 0 r ITB #99105, Addendum #2 Office of Purchasing P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock. Texas 79457 (806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164 ADDENDUM #2 ITB #99105 MUNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION - PHASE I MAILED TO VENDOR: May 19,1999 OLD CLOSE DATE: May 20,1999 @ 3:00 P.M. NEW CLOSE DATE: May 27, 1999 @ 4:00 P.M. The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. The closing date has been changed from Thursday, May 20, 1999 at 3:00 P.M. to the new closing date of Thursday, May 27,1999 0 4:00 P.M. 2. Specifications, Section 02072, Page 3, 3.5 Schedules: Delete the requirements stated in items B and C. All requests for additional information or clarification must be submitted in writing and directed to: Questions may be faxed to: or Email to: Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 (806) 775-2164 RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us A OW Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID r I ITB 99105ad2.doc L i P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock. Texas 79457 (806) 775-2167 • Fax (806) 775-2164 ADDENDUM #1 ITB #99105 MUNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION - PHASE I ITS #99105, Addendum #1 Office of Purchasing MAILED TO VENDOR: May 17,1999 CLOSE DATE: May 20, 1999 @ 3:00 P.M. P, The following items take precedence over specifications for the above named Invitation to Bid (ITB). Where any item called for in the ITB documents is supplemented here, the original requirements, not affected by this addendum, shall remain in effect. 1. Please find attached Addendum #1 containing five (5) pages and two (2) drawings from Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. r All requests for additional information or clarifica must be submitted in writing and directed to: i Ron Shuffield, Senior Buyer City of Lubbock P.O. Box 2000 Lubbock, Texas 79457 Questions may be faxed to: (806) 775-2164 or Email to: RShuffield@mail.ci.lubbock.tx.us TH K YOU Ron Shuffield Senior Buyer PLEASE RETURN ONE COPY OF THIS ADDENDUM WITH YOUR BID ITS 99105ad1.doc ADDENDUM NO.1 MA'%1 TO: All Prospective Bidders / Plan Holders PROJECT: Police Square Renovation Phase 1-A DATE: May 17, 1999 PSC Job No: 03879198 Attention of all Prospective Bidders/Plan Holders is directed to the following modifications to the referenced Plans and Specifications. This Addendum forms a part of, and shall be attached to the Contract Documents, and modifies the original Bidding Documents dated 4-20-99 as noted below: This Addendum consists of 5 page(s), plus 2 drawings. I CHANGES TO SPECIFICATIONS A. SECTION 02072 - MINOR DEMOLITION 1. Add specification section attached. H CHANGES TO DRAWINGS A. SHEET A01 1. Revise DEMOLITION NOTE A to read as follows: "EXISTING PARTITION SYSTEM WALL TO BE REMOVED" 2. Revise REFLECTED CEILING NOTE 1 to read as follows: " EXISTING 2 X 2 CEILING TO REMAIN. PATCH TO MATCH EXISTING" 3. At detail 5/A01, change the dimensions as shown on the attached drawing AD1-01. 4. At DEMOLITION PLAN, revise the drawing as shown on the attached drawing AD1-02. B. SHEET E1 1. Provide for the installation of (2)-3" EMT conduit from the existing ground floor computer room to new COMPUTER ROOM 212. Provide boxes, conduit and pull -string. Origination of conduit in existing ground floor computer room shall be as directed by owner/architect. Terminate conduit under new computer flooring in new COMPUTER ROOM 212 in an accessible location. III CLARIFICATIONS PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners 4010 Avenue R • Lubbock, Texas 79412 (806) 747-0161 FAX (806) 747-7146 Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo A. The fusible panelboard with the two new 200A/3P switches shown on the Riser Diagram (sheet E1) shall meet the general requirements as panelboards and switch assemblies indicated in section 16441. END OF ADDENDUM NO. 1 Respectfully submitted, PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. By: bill p. noonan. AIA Receipt of this addendum shall be acknowledged by the Bidder, below and on the bid Proposal. This entire addendum, or a copy thereof, shall be attached to the bid Proposal submitted. ACKNOWLEDGED: By: PARMLL, SMITH & COOPER, INC. Engineers • Architects ■ Planners 4010 Avenue R ■ Lubbock, Texas 79412 (806) 747-0161 FAX (806) 747-7146 Lubbock El Paso Midland Amarillo MUNICIPAL SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Removal of designated building equipment and fixtures. B. Removal of designated construction. C. Disposal of materials and storage of removed materials. D. Identification of utilities. E. Refer to items as indicated. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Work sequence. B. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Re -installation of removed and stored products. C. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary enclosures, dust control barricades, security at Owner occupied areas, and cleanup during construction. i D. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project record documents. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 -Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate demolition and removal sequence and location of salvageable items; location and construction of temporary work. C. Submit proposed location for dumpster or other demolition material containerls). D. Submit proposed route for movement of demolition materials within the existing building. E. Submit proposed location, type and method of attachment of disposal chute from second floor to ground level. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT r ' A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual locations of capped utilities, subsurface obstructions, and other appurtenances which remain. t 03879198 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 1 03/99 r MUNICIPAL SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for demolition work, dust control, products requiring electrical disconnection and re -connection. B. Obtain required permits from authorities. C. Do not close or obstruct egress width to any building or site exit. D. Do not disable or disrupt building fire or life safety systems without 3 days prior written notice to Owner. E. Conform to procedures applicable when hazardous or contaminated materials are discovered. 1.7 SEQUENCING A. Section 01010 - Summary of Work: Work sequence. B. Sequence activities in the following order: 1. Demolition and construction of 21 floor renovations. 2. Salvage existing computer flooring - coordinate with owner. 3. Demolition and construction of ground floor renovations. 1.8 SCHEDULING A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Work schedule. B. Perform noisy or dusty work: 1. Coordinate with Owner and municipal court. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent and occupied building areas. B. Cease operations immediately if structure appears to be in danger and notify Architect/Engineer. Do not resume operations until directed. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. B. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust, odors, and noise to permit continued Owner occupancy. C. Protect existing materials and appurtenances which are not to be demolished. D. Provide protective covers over existing flooring including floor finish in elevator. E. Provide elevator manufacturer's standard protective padding on elevator walls. F. Provide temporary protective corner protection at all outside corners along route for removal of refuse. 03879198 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 2 r^ 03/99 r- MUNICIPAL SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 G. Prevent movement of structure; provide bracing and shoring. H. Notify affected utility companies before starting work and comply with their requirements. 1. Mark location and termination of utilities. J. Provide appropriate temporary signage including signage for exit or building egress. K. Set refuse containers at location approved by Owner. 3.2 DEMOLITION A. Disconnect, remove and cap and identify designated utilities within demolition areas as indicated. B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Protect existing supporting structural members. C. Remove temporary Work. 3.3 DISPOSAL A. Coordinate route for movement of refuse within the existing building with the Owner to create the least amount of interference with Owner's continuing occupancy and operations. B. Remove demolished materials from site except where specifically noted otherwise. Do not burn or bury materials on site. C. Remove materials as Work progresses. 3.4 CLEANUP A. Repair damaged pavement and landscaping under refuse containers and return to original condition. B. Repair existing finishes to remain, which are damaged during demolition, to match adjacent finishes. C. Make repairs to satisfaction of Owner. 3.5 SCHEDULES A. Remove, store and protect the following materials and equipment: 1. Existing wood doors to be used as wood transom panels. 2. Existing computer flooring from Traffic Engineering computer room. B. Remove the following equipment and materials for the Owner's retention. Deliver to location designated by Owner: 1. Movable partitions within demolition area. C. Owner will remove and keep the following material and equipment: 1. Movable partitions. D. Protect the following materials and equipment remaining: 1. Spline ceiling not to be removed. 2. Terrazzo flooring and integral coved base. 3. Plaster finish on walls. END OF SECTION 03879198 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 02072 - 3 03/99 r---=---=--=---=� ,� r;====-_-=----------;r------------__ r a 11 rl A11 it l it ,r ltrj it rr it r rr 11 Ir 8 �1 II 11 rl n 11 A ---------- ------ 1------------- p PER 11 n r rr Ir 11 IL_ F-"= _- UI o lit=—=- "_=� 41L 7 r- BRED ARC moo a NORTH ti►>gT 2�746 �Qy /WOO •• r►4AY 171rRgg r- r-4 F EXISTING PARTITIONS, PLUMBING CHASE, SINK AND ELECTRICAL PANELS TO REMAIN. PATCH TO MATCH EXISTING WHERE OTHER PARTITIONS REMOVED Project Name: Police Square Renovation sheet: Ad1-01 Phase I -A Issue Date: May 17, 1999 Project Address: 906 Texas Avenue Lubbock, Texas Revisions: PSC Project #: 03.8791.98 FIR r a r i 23'-7 5/8" 1-1/2" OD ALUM HANDRAIL BOLT TO FLOOR FOR FUTURE 3" iNI-wvn nviv 2 1. /4" 3'`7 1/2" * 5 EQUAL SPACES 1 4„ RAMP H DRAILS REFER T A/AO1 RAMP END OF PLATFORM TO BE OPEN TOE RAIL 1 /4"sc ELEVATION 51AO1 ROOM 212 C)eP'c o rVZgloo ►"fib 11, 19 K� Project Name: Police Square Renovation sheet Ad1-02 Phase I A issue Dace: May 17, 1999 Project address: 906 Texas Avenue Lubbock, Texas Revisions: PSC Project 0: 03.8791.98 F CITY OF LUBBOCK INVITATION TO BID FOR TITLE: MUNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION - PHASE I ADDRESS: LUBBOCK, TEXAS ro BID NUMBER: 99105 PROJECT NUMBER: 9616.8211.30000 CONTRACT PREPARED BY: PURCHASING DEPARTMENT 7 INDEX 1. NOTICE TO BIDDERS 2. GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 3. BID SUBMITTAL — BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS 4. PAYMENT BOND 5. PERFORMANCE BOND 6. CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE 7. CONTRACT 8. GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 9. CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS 10. SPECIFICATIONS No Text NOTICE TO BIDDERS .� BID #99105 j f Sealed bids addressed to Victor Kilman, Purchasing Manager, City of Lubbock, Texas, will be received in the office of the Purchasing Manager, Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas, 79401, until 3:00 o'clock p.m. on the 20th day of May, 1999, or as changed by the issuance of formal addenda to all planholders, to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work for the construction of the following described project: "MUNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION - PHASE I" After the expiration of the time and date above first written, said sealed bids will be opened in the office of the Purchasing Manager and publicly read aloud. It is the sole responsibility of the bidder to insure that his bid is actually in the office of the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock, prior to the expiration of the date above first written. The City of Lubbock will consider the bids on the 10th day of June,1999, at the Municipal Building, 1625 13th Street, Lubbock, Texas, or as soon thereafter as may be reasonably convenient, subject to the right to reject any or all bids and waive any formalities. The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. Said statutory bonds should be issued by a company carrying a current Best Rating of B or superior. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than 5% of the total amount of the bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract and execute all necessary bonds (if required) within 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. It shall be each bidders sole responsibility to Inspect the site of the work and to inform himself regarding all local conditions under which the work is to be done. It shall be understood and agreed that all such factors have been thoroughly investigated and considered in the preparation of the bid submitted. There will be a pre -bid conference on 13th day of May, at 11:00 o'clock a.m., in the Purchasing Conference Room-1_04, Lubbock, Texas Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in the contract documents on file in the office of the Purchasing Manager of the City of Lubbock, which document is specifically referred to in this notice to bidders. Each bidder's attention is further directed to provision of Article 5159a, Vernon's Ann. Civil St., and the requirements contained therein concerning the above wage scale and payment by the contractor of the prevailing rates of wages as heretofore established by owner in said wage scale. The City of Lubbock hereby notifies all bidders that in regard to any contract entered into pursuant to this advertisement, minority and women business enterprises will be afforded equal opportunities to submit bids in response to this invitation and will not be discriminated against on the grounds of race, color, sex, disability, or national origin in consideration for an award. The City of Lubbock does not discriminate against persons with disabilities. City of Lubbock pre -bid meetings and bid openings are available to all persons regardless of disability. If you would like bid information made available in a more accessible format or if you require assistance, please contact the City of Lubbock Human Relations Office at (806) 775- 2281 at least 48 hours in advance of the meeting. CITY OF LUBBOCK qt µn ti— VICTOR KILMAN PURCHASING MANAGER Bid documents may be obtained upon request from the Purchasing Department at 1625 13th Street, Room L-04, Lubbock, Texas 79401; Telephone (806) 775-21671Fax (806) 775-2164. No Text I 3. 4. 5. A GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS SCOPE OF WORK The contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, machinery, equipment and all materials necessary to complete this project in accordance with contract documents for the POLICE SQUARE RENOVATION - PHASE I. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS All work covered by this contract shall be done in accordance with contract documents described in the General Conditions. All bidders shall be thoroughly familiar with all of the requirements set forth on the contract documents for the construction of this project and shall be responsible for the satisfactory completion of all work contemplated by said contract documents. PLANS FOR USE BY BIDDERS It is the intent of the City of Lubbock that all parties with an interest in submitting a bid on the project covered by the contract documents be given a reasonable opportunity to examine the documents and prepare a bid without charge of forfeiture of deposit. The contract documents, may be examined without charge as noted in the Notice to Bidders. BIDDER INQUIRIES No bidder shall request any information verbally. All written requests for additional information or clarification concerning this bid must be addressed to: RON SHUFFIELD SENIOR BUYER CITY OF LUBBOCK P.O. BOX 2000 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FAX (806) 775-2164 TIME AND ORDER FOR COMPLETION The construction covered by the contract documents shall be fully completed within 90 (NINETY) consecutive calendar days from the date specified in the Notice to Proceed issued by the City of Lubbock to the successful bidder. The Contractor will be permitted to prosecute the work in the order of his own choosing, provided, however, the City reserves the right to require the Contractor to submit a progress schedule of the work contemplated by the contract documents. In the event the City requires a progress schedule to be submitted, and it is determined by the City that the progress of the work is not in accordance with the progress schedule so submitted, the City may direct the Contractor to take such action as the City deems necessary to insure completion of the project within the time specified. PAYMENT All payments due to Contractor shall be made in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions of the contract documents. 7. AFFIDAVITS OF BILLS PAID The City of Lubbock reserves the right, prior to final acceptance of this project to require the Contractor to execute an affidavit that all bills for labor, materials and incidentals incurred in the construction of the improvements contemplated by the contract documents have been paid in full and that there are no claims pending, of which the Contractor has been notified. MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The intent of these contract documents is that only materials and workmanship of the best quality and grade will be furnished. The fact that the specifications may fail to be sufficiently complete in some detail will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility for providing materials of high quality and for protecting them adequately until incorporated into the project. The presence or absence of a representative of the City on the site will not relieve the Contractor of full responsibility of complying with this provision. The specifications for materials and methods set forth in the contract documents provide minimum standards of quality which the Owner believes necessary to procure a satisfactory project. 9. GUARANTEES All equipment and materials incorporated in the project and all construction shall be guaranteed against defective materials and workmanship. Prior to final acceptance, the Contractor shall furnish to the Owner, a written general guarantee which shall provide that the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work, and pay for any and all damages of any nature whatsoever resulting in such defects, when such defects appear within ONE year from date of final acceptance of the work as a result of defective materials or workmanship, at no cost to the Owner (City of Lubbock). Notwithstanding any provisions contained in the contractual agreement, the Contractor represents and warrants fault -free performance and fault -free result in the processing date and date -related data (including, but not limited to calculating, comparing and sequencing) of all hardware, software and firmware products delivered and services provided under this Contract, individually or in combination, as the case may be from the effective date of this — Contract. Also, the Contractor warrants the year 2000 calculations will be recognized and accommodated and will not, in any way, result in hardware, software or firmware failure. The City of Lubbock, at its sole option, may require the Contractor, at any time, to demonstrate the procedures it intends to follow in order to comply with all the obligations contained herein. The obligations contained herein apply to products and services provided by the Contractor, its sub -contractor or any third party involved in the creation or development of the products and services to be delivered to the City of Lubbock under this Contract. Failure to comply with any of the obligations contained herein, may result in the City of Lubbock availing itself of any of its rights under the law and under this Contract including, but not limited to, its right pertaining to termination or default. The warranties contained herein are separate and discrete from any other warranties specified in this Contract, and are not subject to any disclaimer of warranty, implied or expressed, or limitation to the Contractor's liability which may be specified in this Contract, its appendices, its schedules, its annexes or any document incorporated in this Contract by reference. 10. PLANS FOR THE CONTRACTOR The contractor will be furnished one set of plans and specifications, and related contract documents for his use during construction. Plans and specifications for use during construction will only be furnished directly to the Contractor. The Contractor shall then distribute copies of plans and specifications to suppliers, subcontractors or others, as required for proper prosecution of the work contemplated by the Contractor. .._ 11. PROTECTION OF THE WORK The Contractor shall be responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, and protection of all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, apparatus, accessories, facilities, and all means of construction, and any and all parts of the work whether the Contractor has been paid, partially paid, or not paid for such work, until the date the City issues its certificate of completion to Contractor. The City reserves the right, after the bids have been opened and before the contract has been awarded, to require of a bidder the following information: (a) The experience record of the bidder showing completed jobs of a similar nature to the one covered by the intended contract and all work in progress with bond amounts and percentage completed. (b) A sworn statement of the current financial condition of the bidder. M Equipment schedule. 12. TEXAS STATE SALES TAX This contract is issued by an organization which qualifies for exemption provisions pursuant to provisions of Article 20.04 of the Texas Limited Sales, Excise and Use Tax Act. The Contractor must obtain a limited sales, excise and use tax permit which shall enable him to buy the materials to be incorporated into the work without paying the tax at the time of purchase. 13. PROTECTION OF SUBSURFACE LINES AND STRUCTURES It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to prosecute the work contemplated by the contract documents in such a way as to exercise due care to locate and prevent damage to all underground pipelines, utility lines, conduits or other underground structures which might or could be damaged by Contractor during the construction of the project contemplated by these contract documents. The City of Lubbock agrees that it will furnish Contractor the location of all such underground lines and utilities of which it has knowledge. However, such fact shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities aforementioned. All such underground lines or structures cut or damaged by f Contractor during the prosecution of the work contemplated by this contract shall be repaired immediately by Contractor to the satisfaction of the City of Lubbock, Texas, at Contractor's expense. 14. BARRICADES AND SAFETY MEASURES The contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish and erect such barricades, fences, lights and danger signals, and r shall take such other precautionary measures for the protection of persons, property and the work as may be l necessary. The Contractor will be held responsible for all damage to the work due to failure of barricades, signs, and lights to protect it, and when damage is incurred, the damaged portion shall be immediately removed and replaced by Contractor at his own cost and expense. The Contractor's responsibility for maintenance of barricades, signs, and lights shall not cease until the date of issuance to Contractor of City's certificate of acceptance of the project. 7 15. EXPLOSIVES The use of explosives will not be permitted unless written permission to do so is obtained by the Contractor from the City. In all cases where written permission is obtained for the use of explosives, the Contractor shall assume l full responsibility for all damage which may occur as a direct or indirect result of the blasting. In addition, in all cases where explosives are authorized to be used, the Contractor shall use utmost care so as not to endanger life or property and the Contractor shall further use only such methods as are currently utilized by persons, firms, or corporations engaged in similar type of construction activity. ` Explosive materials shall not be stored or kept at the construction site by the Contractor. In all cases where explosives are to be used during the construction of the project contemplated by this contract, it shall be the duty of the Contractor to notify each utility company having structures (above or below the ground) in proximity to the site of the work of Contractor's intention to use explosives, and such notice shall be given 3 sufficiently in advance to enable the companies to take such steps as they may deem necessary to protect their property from injury. Such notice, however, shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility for any damage resulting from his blasting operations. 16. CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATIVE The successful bidder shall be required to have a responsible local representative available at all times while the work is in progress under this contract. The successful bidder shall be required to furnish the name, address and telephone number where such local representative may be reached during the time that the work contemplated by this contract is in progress. 17. INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the ` General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies shall contain an agreement on the part of the insurer waiving the right to subrogation. The Contractor shall procure and carry at his sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverage's shall be submitted prior to contract execution. .�. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional Insured, or in the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. 18. LABOR AND WORKING HOURS Attention of each bidder is particularly called to the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. The wage rate which must be paid on this project shall not be less than specified in the schedule of general prevailing rates of per diem wages as above mentioned. The bidders' attention is further directed to the requirements of Article 5159a, Vernon's Annotated Civil Statutes providing for the payment of the wage schedules above mentioned and the bidder's obligations thereunder. The inclusion of the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages in these contract documents does not release the Contractor from compliance with any wage law that may be applicable. Construction work under this contract requiring an inspector will not be performed on weekends or holidays unless the following conditions exist: (1) The project being constructed is essential to the City of Lubbock's ability to provide the necessary service to its citizens. (2) Delays in construction are due to factors outside the control of the Contractor. The Contractor is approaching the penalty provisions of the contract and Contractor can show he has made a diligent effort to complete the contract within the allotted time. Before construction work requiring an inspector is to be performed on weekends or holidays, the Contractor must notify the Owner's Representative not less than three full working days prior to the weekend or holiday he desires to do work and obtain written permission from the Owner's Representative to do such work. The final decision on whether to allow construction work requiring an inspector on weekends or holidays will be made by the Owner's Representative. In any event, if a condition should occur or arise at the site of this project or from the work being done under this contract which is hazardous or dangerous to property or life, the Contractor shall immediately commence work, regardless of the day of the week or the time of day, to correct or alleviate such condition so that it is no longer dangerous to property or life. pool 19. PAYMENT OF EMPLOYEES AND FILING OF PAYROLLS " The contractor and each of his subcontractors shall pay each of his employees engaged in work on the project under this contract in full (less mandatory legal deductions) in cash, or by check readily cashable without discount, not less often than once each week. The Contractor and each of his subcontractors engaged at the site of the work shall not later than the seventh day following the payment of wages, file with the Owner's Representative, or Engineer, a certified, sworn, legible copy of such payroll. This shall contain the name of each employee, his classification, the number of hours worked on each day, rate of pay, and net pay. The affidavit shall state that the copy is a true and correct copy of such payroll, that no rebates or deductions (except as shown) have been made, or will in the future be made from the wages paid as shown thereon. The Contractor must classify employees according to one of the classifications set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages, which schedule is included in the contract documents. The Contractor shall forfeit as a penalty to the City of Lubbock on whose behalf this contract is made, ten dollars for each laborer, workman, or mechanic employed for each calendar day, or portion thereof, such laborer, workman or mechanic is paid less than the wages assigned to his particular classification as set forth in the schedule of general prevailing rate of per diem wages included in these contract documents. i 20. PROVISIONS CONCERNING ESCALATION CLAUSES Bids submitted containing any conditions which provide for changes in the stated bid price due to increases or decreases in the cost of materials, labor or other items required for the project will be rejected and returned to the bidder without being considered.. r 21. PREPARATION FOR BID i The bidder shall submit his bid on forms furnished by the City. All blank spaces in the form shall be correctly filled in and the bidder shall state the price both in words and numerals, for which he intends to do the work J'~ contemplated or furnish the materials required. Such prices shall be written in ink, distinctly and legibly, or typewritten. In case of discrepancy between the price written in words and the price written in figures, the price written in words shall govern. If the bid is submitted by an individual, his name must be signed by him or his duly authorized agent. If a bid is submitted by a firm, association, or partnership, the name and address of each member must be given and the bid signed by a member of the firm, association or partnership, or person duly authorized. If the bid is submitted by a company or corporation, the company or corporate name and business address must be given, and the bid signed by an official or duly authorized agent. Powers of attorney authorizing agents or others to sign bids must be properly certified and must be in writing and submitted with the bid. The bid shall be executed in ink. Each bid shall be enclosed in a sealed envelope, addressed as specified in the Notice to Bidders, and endorsed on the outside of the envelope in the following manner: (a) Bidder's name (b) Bid for (description of the project). Bid submittals may be withdrawn and resubmitted at any time prior to the time set for opening of the bids, but no bid may be withdrawn or altered thereafter. 22. BOUND COPY OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by bidder shall be bound and include the following: (b) (c) (d) (e) M (g) Notice to Bidders. General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder's Submittal. Statutory Bond (if required). Contract Agreement. General Conditions, Special Conditions (if any). (h) Specifications. (i) Insurance Certificates. 0) All other documents made available to bidder for his inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. If Plans and Specifications are too bulky or cumbersome to be physically bound, they are to be considered incorporated by reference into the aforementioned contract documents. 23. QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The bidder may be required before the award of any contract to show to the complete satisfaction of the City of Lubbock that it has the necessary facilities, ability, and financial resources to provide the service specified therein in a satisfactory manner. The bidder may also be required to give a past history and references in order to satisfy the City of Lubbock in regard to the bidder's qualifications. The City of Lubbock may make reasonable investigations deemed necessary and proper to determine the ability of the bidder to perform the work, and the bidder shall furnish to the City of Lubbock all information for this purpose that may be requested. The City of Lubbock reserves the right to reject any bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigation of, the bidder fails to satisfy the City of Lubbock that the bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the contract and to complete the work described therein. Evaluation of the bidder's qualifications shall include: 1. The ability, capacity, skill, and financial resources to perform the work or provide the service required. 2. The ability of the bidder to perform the work or provide the service promptly or within the time specified, without delay or interference. 3. The character, integrity, reputation, judgment, experience, and efficiency of the bidder. 4. The quality of performance of previous contracts or services. t J R No Text BID SUBMITTAL LUMP SUM BID CONTRACT PLACE: DATE: PROJECT NUMBER: ##99105 - POLICE SQUARE RENOVATION - PHASE I Bid of edm GILE� f mz", & , /V—C • (hereinafter called Bidder) To the Honorable Mayor and City Council City of Lubbock, Texas (hereinafter called Owner) Gentlemen: •-"' The Bidder, in compliance with your invitation for bids for the construction of a m�L JG7l�� MO WN having carefully examined the plans, specifications, instructions to bidders, notice to bidders and all other related contract documents and the site of the intended work, and being familiar with all of the conditions surrounding the construction of . the intended project including the availability of materials and labor, hereby intends to furnish all labor, materials, and supplies; and to construct the project in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, within the time set forth therein and at the price stated below. The price to cover all expenses incurred in performing the work required under the contract documents. MiA SERVICES: U, S :t L TOTAL BID: f�t10 1"d AJ ($ c;L 0 6 ! �— } (Amount shall be shown in both words and numerals. in case of discrepancy, the amount shown in words shall govern.) Bidder hereby agrees to commence the work on the above project on or before a date to be specified in a written "Notice to Proceed" of the Owner and to fully complete the project within 90 (NINETY) consecutive calendar days t thereafter as stipulated in the specifications and other contract documents. Bidder hereby further agrees to pay to Owner as liquidated damages the sum of $500 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) for each consecutive calendar day in excess of the time set forth hereinabove for completion of this project, all as more fully set forth in the general conditions of the contract documents. 4 . Bidder understands and agrees that this bid submittal shail be completed and submitted in accordance with instruction number 21 of the General Instructions to Bidders. Bidder understands that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive any formality in the bidding. L. 1 6 The Bidder agrees that this bid shall be good and may not be withdrawn for a period of thirty (30) calendar days after the scheduled closing time for receiving bids. The undersigned Bidder hereby declares that he has visited the site of the work and has carefully examined the plans, specifications and contract documents pertaining to the work covered by this bid, and he further agrees to commence work on or before the date specified in the written notice to proceed, and to substantially complete the work on which he has bid; as provided in the contract documents. Bidders are required, whether or not a payment or performance bond is required, to submit a cashier's check or certified check issued by a bank satisfactory to the City of Lubbock, or a bid bond from a reliable surety company, payable without recourse to the order of the City of Lubbock in an amount not less than five percent (5%) of the total amount of the f bid submitted as a guarantee that bidder will enter into a contract, obtain all required insurance policies, and execute all t necessary bonds (if required) within (ten) 10 days after notice of award of the contract to him. Enclosed with this bid is a Cashier's Check or Certified Check for Dollars ($ 1 or a Bid Bond in the sum of Ii7 Dollars ($ 1, which it is agreed shall be collected and retained by the Owner as liquidated damages in the event the bid is accepted by the Owner and the undersigned fails to execute the necessary contract documents, rinsurance certificates, and the required bond (if any) with the Owner within ten (10) days after the date of receipt of written notification of acceptance of said bid; otherwise, said check or bond shall be returned to the undersigned upon demand. Bidder understands and agrees that the contract to be executed by der shallpe bound and include all contract documents made available to him for his inspection in accordance with the ooc toy' ers. (Seal if Bidder is a Corporation) ATTEST: Secretary Bidder acknowledges receipt of the following addenda: Addenda No. Date s �% Addenda No. �— Date - Addenda No. 3 Date Addenda No. Date or Typed Name) 1 AiXJ1 � . .;ffo, iix i County Addrpss State zip� Tele /. . %� % • L- ,srxfr 2 1 2. 3. is �^ 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 10. G 17 t 7 171 t� UST OF SUBCONTRACTORS Minority Owned Yes No x4K 6Z ❑ Q'-- C ❑ ❑ 0 0 ❑ 3 CITY OF LUBBOCK INSURANCE REQUIREMENT AFFIDAVIT To Be Completed by Bidder And Attached to Bid Submittal I, the undersigned Bidder, certify that the insurance requirements contained in this bid document have been Freviewed by me with the below identified Insurance Agent/Broker. If I am awarded this contract by the City of Lubbock, I will be able to, within ten (10) days after being notified of such award by the City of Lubbock, ff furnish a valid insurance certificate to the City meeting all of the requirements defined in this bid/proposal. LW &&-. J� Contractor (Si ature) Contr ctor (Print) ICCONTRACTOR'S NAME: (Print or Type) " ' - ` 'CONTRACTOR'S ADDRESS: Name of Agent/Broker: - Address of Agent/Broker. City/State/Zip: Agent/Broker Telephone Number: () 1 +- Date: i, NOTE TO CONTRACTOR I If the time requirement specified above is not met, the City has the right to reject this bid/proposal and award the contract to another contractor. If you have any questions concerning these requirements, please contact the Purchasing Manager for the City of Lubbock at (806) 775-2165. BID #99105 - POLICE SQUARE RENOVATION - PHASE 1 �j 4 J `SAFECO' SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA FIRST NATIONAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 BID BOND Conforms with The American Institute of LArchitects, A.I.A. Document No. A-310 KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS, That we, KNOX GAILEY & MEADOR INC. i, 1 as Principal, hereinafter called the Principal, and the SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA of Seattle, Washington , a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Washington , as Surety, hereinafter called the Surety, are held and firmly bound unto CITY OF LUBBOCK as Obligee, hereinafter called the Obligee, in the sum of 5%of Bid Amount ------------------------------------------------------------------ Dollars ($ 5% of Bid Amount ) , for the payment of which sum well and truly to be trade, the said Principal and the said Surety, bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has submitted a bid for MUNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION - PHASE I BID #99105 NOW, THEREFORE, if the Obligee shall accept the bid of the Principal and the Principal shall enter into a Contract with the Obligee in accordance with the terms of such bid, and give such bond or bonds as may be specified in the bidding or Contract Documents with good and sufficient surety for the faithful performance of such Contract and for the prompt payment of labor and material furnished in the prosecution thereof, or in the event of the failure of the Principal to enter such Contract and give such bond or bonds, if the Principal shall pay to the Obligee the difference not to exceed the penalty hereof between the amount specified in said bid and such larger amount for which the Obligee may in good faith contract with another party to perform the Work covered by said bid, then this obligation shall be null and void, otherwise to remain in full force and effect. Signed and sealed this 20th day of I May 1999 KNOX, GAIL & PEAQPR, INC. (Seal) Principal Witness DON MEADOR, S C/TREASURER Title Witness SAFECO IN CE COMpw4AMERICA By H ARD COWAN Attomey-in-Fact 0 Registered trademark of SAFECO Corporation POWER e OF ATTORNEY WFECCP No. j KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA HOME OFFICE SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE. WASHINGTON 08185 8035 That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, each a Washington corporation, does each hereby appoint eeeeeeHOWARD COWAN; CARLA ROGERS; KEVIN J. DUNN; MIKE HENTHORN; ANGIE GOFF; MARLA HILL; RON STROMAN. Lubbock. TexaSeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeereeeseeeeereeeeeeeeeereeeeeeeeeee■ its true and lawful attorneys) -in -tact, with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertakings and other documents of a similar character issued in the course Of its business. and to bind the respective company thereby. r IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each executed and attested these presents this 4 t h day of January , 19 92 . 7 CERTIFICATE Extract from the By -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: `Article V. Section 13. - FDELMY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President. any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice r' President appointed for that purpose by the officer in Charge of surety operations. shall each have authority to appoint individuals as i attorneys -in -fact or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and suety bonds and L other documents of similar character issued by the company in the course of Its business ... On any instrument making or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking l., of the company. the seal. or a facsimile thereof, may be impressed or affixed or in any other manner reproduced: provided however. 1 that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity Of any such instrument or undertaking.' Extract from a Resolution Of the Board Of Directors Of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28. 1970. I 'On any certificate executed by the Secretary or an assistant secretary Of the Company setting Out. 0) The provisions of Article V. Section 13 Of the By -Laws, and 00 A copy of the power -of -attorney appointment, executed pursuant thereto. and (1d) Certifying that said power -of -attorney appointment is in full force and effect. the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof' L R. A. Pierson. Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and Of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of a Resolution of the Board Of Directors of these corporations. and of a Power of Attorney issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By -Laws. the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seat of said corporation this 20TH day of MAY , t9 99 3-074/EP 1/93 © Registered trademark of SAFECO Corporation. r No Text OWN BOND NO. 5953818 STATUTORY PERFORMANCE BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $100,000) KNOX, GAILEY & MEADOR, KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that INC. (hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA (hereinafter called the Sure�s), s Suret�r(s b rTY EIeHT THQ[7SoAND unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the r- Obligee), in the amount of Dollars ($ 248 , 519.00) lawful money of the United States for the paymen w ereo inri , e sal rincipal an ur ind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the 24TUay of JUNE ,19.,99,to BID #99105 - MUNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION and said principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as if copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall faithfully perform the work in accordance with the plans, specifications and contract documents, then this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect. PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, and all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and sealed this instrument this 24TH ATTORNEY -IN -FACT KNOX. GAILEY & MEADOR;—INC. Princi By. (Title) DON MEADOR SECRETARY/TREASURER By: (Title) By: (Title) ' t l I i r` k The undersigned surety company represents that it is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates HOWARD COWANan agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. SAFECO INSURANCE COMP Surety OF A .By, HOWARD COWAN ATTORNEY -IN -FACT Approved as to Form City of Lubbock By: City Attorney • Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company, there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 2 �r PAYMENT BOND rim., i a r Pik00 k BOND CHECK BEST RATING LICENS D IN TEXAS 1 BOND NO. 5953818 w. r- STATUTORY PAYMENT BOND PURSUANT TO SECTION 2253.021(a) i OF THE TEXAS GOVERNMENT CODE (CONTRACTS MORE THAN $25,000) KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, thatKNOX, GAILEY & MEADOR, INC {hereinafter called the Principal(s), as Principal(s), and SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA 7 (hereinafter called the Sure ) as Sure 40, are held and firm) bound unto the City of Lubbock (hereinafter called the Obligee), in the amount of �r, RTY GH 0-Dollars ($ 248 , 519.00) lawful money of the r., United States for the payment whereo , e sal rrncipa and S6reW bind themselves, and their heirs, administrators, executors, successors and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents. i WHEREAS, the Principal has entered into a certain written contract with the Obligee, dated the24TH day of JUNE ,19 99,to BID #99105 — MUNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION PHASE I r and said Principal under the law is required before commencing the work provided for in said contract to execute a bond in the amount of said contract which contract is hereby referred to and made a part hereof as fully and to the same extent as If copied at length herein. NOW, THEREFORE, THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH, that if the said Principal shall pay all claimants supplying labor and material to him or a subcontractor in the prosecution of the work provided for in said r` contract, then, this obligation shall be void; otherwise to remain in full force and effect; Y PROVIDED, HOWEVER, that this bond is executed pursuant to the provisions of Section 2253.021(a) of the Texas Government Code, end-all liabilities on this bond shall be determined in accordance with the provisions of said Article to the same extent as if it were copied at length herein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Principal (s) and Surety (s) have signed and seated this instrument this 2 TH day of JUNE 19,2L. ` SAFECO INS CE COMPANY 0 RICA Surety .By. (TIM HOW COW ATTORNEY —IN —FACT KNOX, GAILEY & MEADOR. INC. Princi I By: _ Ak (Title) DON MEADOR . SECRETARY/TREASURER By: (Title) By: (Title) 7" .WA 7 The undersigned surety company represents that it Is duly qualified to do business in Texas, and hereby designates HOWARD COWAN an agent resident in Lubbock County to whom any requisite notices may be delivered r- and on whom service of process may be had in matters arising out of such suretyship. I^ r r SAFECO INSURANCE COMP F Surety R A .B itle) HOWARD COWAN ATTORNEY -IN -FACT Approved as to form: City of Lubbock City Attorney " Note: If signed by an officer of the Surety Company there must be on file a certified extract from the by-laws showing that this person has authority to sign such obligation. If signed by an Attorney in Fact, we must have copy of power of attorney for our files. 2 r s r t, i IMPORTANT NOTICE To obtain information or make a complaint: You may contact the Texas Department of Insurance to obtain information on companies, coverages, rights or complaints at: 1-800-252-3439 You may write the Texas Department of Insurance: P.O. Box 149104 Austin, TX 78714-9104 FAX # (512)475-1771 PREMIUM OR CLAIM DISPUTES: Should you have a dispute concerning your premium or about a claim you should contact the agent or the company first. If the dispute is not resolved, you may contact the Texas Department of Insurance. ATTACH THIS NOTICE TO YOUR POLICY: This notice is for information only and does not become a part or condition of the attached document. S A F E C O- POWEROF ATTORNEY KNOW ALL BY THESE PRESENTS: SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA. HOME OFFICE: SAFECO PLAZA SEATTLE, WASHINGTON 98185 No. 8035 •- That SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, each a Washington corporation, does each hereby appoint •"'*••*••••EOWARD COWAN; CARLAROGERS;12EVINJ. DUNN; I= EENTEORN; ANGIE GOFF; MARLAE u4 RON STROM", Lubbock, Te=***ss•."s *"* 1 Its true and lawful attorney(s)4n4act, with full authority to execute on its behalf fidelity and surety bonds or undertaldngs and other documents of a similar character Issued in the course of its business, and to bind the respective company thereby. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA have each exerted and attested these presents r- 0 -. FM r� FM : RA. PIERSON, SECRETARY this 20th day of April , 1999 CERTIFICATE kL .&Ok4"� W. RANDALL STODDARD, PRESIDENT Extract from the By -Laws of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA: "Article V, Section 13. - FIDELITY AND SURETY BONDS ... the President, any Vice President, the Secretary, and any Assistant Vice President appointed for that purpose by the officer to charge of surety operations, shall each have authority to appoint individuals as attomeys4n4act or under other appropriate titles with authority to execute on behalf of the company fidelity and surety bonds and other documents of similar character Issued by the company In the course of Its business.. On" Instrument rrmWQ or evidencing such appointment, the signatures may be affixed by facsimile. On any Instrument conferring such authority or on any bond or undertaking of the company, the seal, or a facsimile thereof, may be Impressed or affixed or In any other manner reproduced; provided, however, that the seal shall not be necessary to the validity.of any such instrument or undertaking." Extract from a Resolution of the Board of Directors of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA adopted July 28, 1970. "On any certificate exerted by the Secretary or an assistant secretary of the Company setting out, m The provisions of Article V. Section 13 of the By -Laws, and (0) A copy of the powerof-attomey appointment, exerted pursuant thereto, and (B) Certifying that said pawer-of-attorney appointment is in full force and effect, the signature of the certifying officer may be by facsimile, and the seal of the Company may be a facsimile thereof." I, RA Pierson, Secretary of SAFECO INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA and of GENERAL INSURANCE COMPANY OF AMERICA, do hereby certify that the foregoing extracts of the By -Laws and of a Resolution of the Board of Directors of these corporations, and of a Power of Attorney Issued pursuant thereto, are true and correct, and that both the By-laws, the Resolution and the Power of Attorney are still In full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the facsimile seal of said corporation this 24TH day of JUNE , 1999 - �cP�°�Try�' $`��CORPORI�E SEAL y SEAL e� 1953 tsZs of 2 �oflfras i RA. PIERSON, SECRETARY S-0974MAEF 7798 G Registered trademark of SAFEOO Corporation 420199 PDF No Text �;..1 � �_DATE (MMIDDIYY) �� ��! CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE 004/99 PRODUCER :HOLDER. S CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION LY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE THE SHROPSHIRE AGENCY, INC. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND, EXTEND OR P.O. BOX 10428 ER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. COMPANIES AFFORDING COVERAGE Lubbock TX 79408 COMPANY is i A Travelers INSURED COMPANY Knox, Galley 6 Meador, Inc. B e P.O. Box 5736 COMPANY Lubbock TX 79408 C COMPANY D � C01�IaAGES " THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED, NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. 00 POLICY EFFECTIVE POLICY EXPIRATION LTTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBERPOLICY (MMDDIYY) DATE (MMIDDIYY) LIMITS ( A GENERAL LIABILITY DT-00-411X2824-TLC- 04/20/99 04/20/00 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY PRODUCTS • COMP/OP AGG $ 2,000.000 CLAIMS MADE FX� OCCUR PERSONAL d ADV INJURY $ 1,000,000 OWNERS d CONTRACTOR'S PROT EACH OCCURRENCE $ 1,000,000 yA FIRE DAMAGE (Any one fire) $ 300,000 MED EXP (Any one person) $ 5,000 A AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY DO -CAP- 727K2841-99 04/20/99 04 / 20 / 00 COMBINED SINGLE LIT. $ 1,000,000 l X ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS BODILY INJURY t SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per person) _ HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY NOWOWNED AUTOS 1 ' PROPERTY DAMAGE $ t GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY - EA ACCIDENT $ ANY AUTO OTHER THAN AUTO ONLY: j EACH ACCIDENT $ AGGREGATE $ A EXCESS LIABILITY CUP-115P340.5 -TCT- 9 04/20/99 04 / 20 / 00 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 X UMBRELLA FORM AGGREGATE $ 2,000,000 OTHER THAN UMBRELLA FORM $ WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY DTK-LIB-345K8693-99 04/20/99 04/20/00 EL EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 A THE PROPRIETORI Iq INCL EL DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT $ 1,000,000 i PARTNERSIEXECUTiVE OFFICERS ARE: EXCL EL DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE = 1,000,000 OTHER A Installation Floater OT-660415X4434-TLC 04/20/99 04/20/00 248,519 HMIaV PP/�L�SOt1AHELD ITNG �AP 1, LUBBOCK TEXAS 'ADDITICNAL INSURED AND WAIVER OF SUBROGATION APPLICABLE .Q�7Vim. SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE CITY OF WBBOCK EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, THE ISSUING COMPANY WILL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL C P.O. BOX 20M 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT, LUBBOCK Tx 79457 BUT FAILURE TO MAIL SUCH NOTICE SHALL IMPOSE NO OBLIGATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE COMPANY, ITS AGENTS R REPRE ATIVES, AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE John V. Shropshire Jr. (806) 763-7311 11,06ON` 1988 11ty Travelets hulemnity Company The Atina CAsuallyand Surely Comp.my ► MembenorTravelenGma T OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS r" PROTECTIVE LIABILITY POLICY DECLARATIONS QTho Ae1nn Cnsunity and Surety Company ❑Familnuton Casualty Company >*' The Standard Fire Insurance Company CJAetna casualty & Surely company of America f ❑ne Automobile Insurance Company of IlarUord, Connecticut Mama Commercial Insurance Company llarllord, Connecticut W68 Metna Casualty Company of Connecticut (]Aetna Casualty S Surety Company of Illinois Hartford, Connecticut 01159 1020 31st Sireel, Downers ©rove, Alinols 60616 ( Tim declarations coverage form and endorsements complete INS klsurance policy. NAMEO INSURED ANO MAILINQ AOORESS POLICY NU • PC ?5 t F F91 -'� CITY OF LUBBOCK P 0 BOX 2000 0 =-'27+`-'99 ROoOM06-24-00 LUBBOCK, TX 79457 FFPOLICY r- 17.01 am a 1AWAR011ME AT 111E TIIC NAMED INSURE? IS Indtvldue{ PerlMreNP rUSINEBS OF NAMED INS iEU ROther: Cor orallon Joint Venture MUNICIPALITY t� n return for the Payment of Itte prom um, and SublarA to all TWIRMs MIMS 0 i , nsu(a{%cn is provkded to YQU by the Stock insurance company specified above, t , ,,�::.gaw�rq.i�s••;:r' �i'r;!3 x 4�t il:IM1T8;.OF:iNSURANCE `.:: ' ' "►57, }�_''°•, :';7f77,�;Y, GWILGATE LIMIT EACI.1 OCCURRENCE LIMIT +a"tu�„t�1iL�GLASS IFICATION k' ..r:: IFS 14'X Y ! „i.s.. .,n: -7. 1 :.;•...•�#;`.r t� �i'�g:}�.,: � .t:>.>K 1� :fi��' �•` LASSIFICATION DESCRIPTION r" CONSTRUCTION OPERATION -OWNER CLASS PREMIUM BASIS RATES r CODE EXPOSURE COST 248,512 ovrsl,000acoaT 6 t v ATION COVERED OPERATIONS MIMMVM PREMIUM s 4 .00 UNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION TOTAL PERM POLICY PREMIUM 214-00 t HASE I rOr-1SIGNAIEO ADVANCE PREMIUM 214.00 t UBBOCK, TEXAS CONTRACTORS) AND CONTRACTOR•$ IMIAILINO A0011fl8S KNOX, GAILEY 6 MEADOR, INC. i i P 0 BOX 5736 TOTALADVANCEPREMIUM 2L4,00 LUBBOCK, TEXAS 7�9417 ((Pnmtum May be eubjeol toAdjustment) Inw. •:•�:k x < :r.. 1 UMIJI!R COVERAGE OF OPERATIONS OF DESIGNATED. CONTRACTOR C(:0009 (II-A5) CONDITIONS REQUIRING NOTICE CG71124 (11-85) t, AMENDMENT OF POLLUTION EXCLUSION C62840 (05-86) TEXAS CHANGES IGG2855 (11-87) i ADDITIONAL INSURED-ENGINtERSt ARCHITECTS CG2207 (11-R5) Ann iT i *LIU. --/%,4/, Countersigned By Counlerslpnature Dale 6-24-99 _ READ YOUR POLICY CAREFULLY .. SPECIAL A FORMS'APPLICA©LE FOR THIS POLICY AMENDATORY ENDORSEMENT - CANCELLATION - OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE - TABLE OF CONTENTS OWNERS AND'CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM - COVERAGE FOR OPERATIONS OF DESIGNATED CONTRACTOR NUCLEAR ENERGY LIABILITY•EXCLUSION ENDORSEMENT (BROAD FORM) AMENDATORY ENDORSEMENT - WHEN WE DO NOT RENEW ADDITIONAL INSURED - ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS OR SURVEYORS IMPORTANT NOTICE 0 GN057 (11-87) DC059 (06-95) CG0009 (11-88) IL0021 (11-94) CG0004 (02-86) CG2007 (0I-87) PN042 (Oft-92) DC095 (1.66) OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE DECLARATIONS PAGES Named Insured and Mailing Address Policy Period Form of Business Limits of Insurance Location of Covered Operations Designated Contractor(s) and Contractor's Mailing Address SECTION 1 - COVERAGES Bodily Injury and Property Damage Liability Insuring Agreement Exclusions Supplementary Payments SECTION Il -WHO IS AN INSURED SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE SECTION IV - CONDITIONS Bankruptcy Cancellation Changes Duties in the Event of Occurrence, Claim or Suit Examination of Your Books and Records Inspection and Surveys Legal Action Against Ud Other Insurance Premiums Premium Audit Separation of Insureds Transfer of Rights of Recovery Against Others To Us When We Do Not Renew SECTION V- DEFINITIONS ENDORSEMENTS ocosq (F;-95) C COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE FORM - COVERAGE FOR OPERATIONS OF DESIGNATED CONTRACTOR l Various provisions of this policy restrict coverage. Read the entire policy carefully to determine rights, duties and what is and Is not covered. Throughout this policy the words "you" and "your" refer to the Named Insured shown In the Declarations. The words "we, "us" and "our" refer to the Company providing this insurance. The word "insured" means any person or organization qualifying as such under WHO IS AN INSURED (Section II). l Other words and phrases that appear in quotation marks have special meaning. Refer to DEFINITIONS (Section V). 1 SECTION ( - COVERAGES ! BODILY INJURY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE LIA131LITY 1 1. Insuring Agreement. r.. a. We will pay those sums that the insured becomes legally obligated to pay as damages because of "bodily Injury" or "properly damage" to which this insurance applies. We will have the right and duty to defend any "suit" seeking those damages. We may at our discretion Investigate any "occurrence" and settle any claim or "suit" that may result. But: (1) The amount we will pay for damages is limited as described In LIMITS OF INSURANCE (Section III); and (2) Our right and duty to defend end when we have used up the applicable limit of insurance in the payment of judgments or settlements. No other obligation or liability to pay sums or perform acts or services Is covered unloss explicitly provided for under SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS. b. This insurance applies to "bodily Injury" and "property damage" only If: (1) The "bodily injury" or "property damage" is caused by an "occurrence" that takes place in the "coverage territory" and arises out of: (1) Operations performed for you by the "contractor" at the location specified in the Declarations; or (ii) Your acts or omissions in connection with the general supervision of such optuations; and (2) The "bodily injury or "property damage" occurs during the policy period. c. Damages because of "bodily Injury" Include damages claimed by any person or organization for care, loss of services or death resulting at any time from the "bodily Injury." 2. Exclusions. This insurance does not apply to: a. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" expected or intended from the standpoint of the iw-mred. This exclusion does not apply to "bodily injury" resulting from the use of reasonable force to prninct persons or property. b. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" for which the insured is obligated to pay damages by reason of the assumption of liability in a contract or agreement. This exclusion does not apply to liability ft►► damages: (1) Assumed in a contract or agreement that Is an "insured contract" provided the "Imdily Injury" or "property damage" occurs subsequent to the execution of the contract or agreement; or (2) That the insured would have in the absence of the contract or agreement. I cG0009 (II.88) Page 1 ora r a l c. "Bodily Injury" or "property damage" which occurs after the earliest of the following times: (1) When all 'work" on the project (other than service, maintenance or repairs) to be performed for you by the "contractor" at the site of the covered operations has been completed; or (2) When that portion of the "contractor's" "work," out of which the Injury or damage arises, has been put to its intended use by any person or organization. This exclusion does not apply to any �- contractor or subcontractor working directly or indirectly for the "contractor" or as part of the same project. d. "Bodily injury" or "property damage" arising out of your, or your employees'. acts or omissions other than — Julleral supervision of "work" performed for you by the "contractor." 0 Any obligation of the insured under a workers compensation, disability benefits or unemployment Wmpensation law or' any similar law. 1. Bodily injury" to: (1) An employee of the insured arising out of and In the course of his employment by the Insured; (2) The spouse, child, parent, brother or sister of that employee as a consequence of (1) above. This exclusion applies: (1) Whether the Insured may be liable as an employer or In any other capacity; and (2) 'To any obligation to share damages with or repay someone else who must pay damages because of the Injury. This exclusion does not apply to liability assumed by the Insured under an "insured contract." g. "Property damage" to: (1) Property you own, rent or occupy; (2) Property loaned to you; (3) Personal property in the care, custody or control of the insured; or — (4) "Work" performed for you by the "contractor." h. "Bodily Injury" or "property damage" due to war, whether or not declared, or any act or condition incident to war. War Includes civil war, insurrection, rebellion or revolution. This exclusion applies only to liability assumed under: (1) An "Insured contract;" or (2) Expenses for first aid. I. "Bodily Injury" or "property damage" arising out of the use of "mobile equipment" In, or wNle in practice or preparation for, a prearranged racing, speed or demolition contest or in any stunting activity. J. (1) "Bodily Injury" or "property damage" arising out of the actual, alleged or threatened dischalue, dispersal, seepage, migration, release or escape of pollutants: — (a) At or from any premises, site or location which is or was at any time owned or occuplud by, or rented or loaned to, any Insured; (b) At or from any premises, site or location which Is or was at any time used by or for any — Insured or others for the handling, storage, disposal, processing or treatment of waste; • (c) Which are or were at any time transported, handled, stored, treated, disposed of, or processed as waste by or for any Insured or any person or organization for whom you may be legally responsible; or (d) At or from any premises, site or locatlori on which any Insured or any contractors or subcontractors working directly or indirectly on any Insured's behalf are Neifutmillei operations: CG0009 (11-88) Page 2 of 8 (1) It the pollutants are brought on or to the premises, site or location in connection with such operations by such insured, contractor or subcontractor; or (it) It the operations are to test for,; monitor,. clean up,. remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any way respond to, or assess the effects of pollutants. Subparagraphs (a) and (d)(i) do not apply to "bodily Injury" or "property damage" arising out of heat, smoke or fumes from a hostile fire. As used in this exclusion, a hostile fire means one which becomes uncontrollable or breaks out from where it was Intended to be. (2) Any loss, cost, or expense arising out of any: (a) Request, demand or order that any Insured or others test for, monitor, clean up, remove, contain, treat, detoxify or neutralize, or in any way' respond to, or assess the effects of pollutants; or, (b) Claim or "suit" by or on behalf of a governmental authority for damages because of testing for, monitoring, cleaning up, removing, containing, treating, detoxifying or neutralizing, or in r any way responding to or assessing the effects of pollutants. t Pollutants means any solid, liquid. gaseous or thermal irritant or contaminant, including smoke, vapor, soot, fumes, acids, alkalis, chemicals and waste. Waste includes materials to be recycled, reconditioned r- or reclaimed. ! k. "Property damage" to "Impaired property". or property that has not been physically Injured, arising out of: (1) A defect, deficiency, inadequacy or dangerous condition In "work" performed for you by the "contractor;" or l 2 A delay or failure b O y y you or anyone acting on your behalf to perform a contract or agreement in accordance with its terms. This exclusion does not apply to the loss of use of other property arising nut of sudden and accidental physical injury to "work" performed for you by the "contractor." SUPPLEMENTARY PAYMENTS t We will pay, with respect to any claim or "suit" we defend: r- 1. AN expenses we incur. 2. Up to $250 for cost of bail bonds required because of accidents or traffic law violations arising out of the use of any vehicle to which this Insurance applies. We do not have to furnish these bonds. '- 3. The cost of bonds to release attachments, but only for bond amounts within the applicable limit of insurance. We do not have to furnish these bonds. 4. All reasonable expenses incurred by the insured at our request to assist us In the investigation or rfrionse of the claim or "suit," including actual loss of earnings up to $100 a day because of time off from work. 5. All costs taxed against the insured In the "cult." 1.., 6. ' Prejudgment Interest awarded against the insured on that part of the judgment we pay. ,If we m,-ik( m offer to pay the applicable limit of insurance, we will not pay any prejudgment Interest based on that period fir lime after the offer. 7. An interest on the full amount of any judgment that accrues after entry of the judgment and before we have paid, offered to pay, or deposited In court the part of the judgment that Is within the applicable limit of Insurance. 8. Expenses Incurred by the Insured for first aid to others at the time of an accident, for "bodily Injury" to which this insurance applies. t These payments will not reduce the limits of insurance. corm. g (I I AR) Page 3 of a - I^ i SECTION 11- WHO IS AN INSURED t . Il you are designated in the Declarations as: a. An Individual, you and your spouse are insureds. b. A partnership or joint venture, you are an Insured. Your members, your partners, and their spouses ate also insureds, but only with respect to their duties as partners or members of a joint venture. c. An organization other than a partnership or joint venture, you are an Insured. Your executive officers and directors are insureds, but only with respect to their duties as your officers or directors. Your stockholders _ are also Insureds, but only with respect to their liability as stockholders. 2. Each of the following Is also an Insured: a. Any person (other than your employee) or any organization while acting 'as your Ireal estate manager. b. Any person or organization having proper temporary custody of your property If you die, but only: (1) With respect to liability arising out of the maintenance or use 'of that property; and (2) Until your legal representative has been appointed. c. Your legal representative "if you die; but only with respect to duties as such. That representative will have all your rights and duties under this Coverage Part. No persoti oi organization Is an insured with respect to the conduct of any current or past partnership or joint venture that is not bhuwn as a, Named Insured in the Declarations. SECTION III - LIMITS OF INSURANCE 1.' ' 1'I1,= Limits of Insurance shown In the Declarations' and the rules below fix the most we will pay regardless of the nu.;mur of: Insureds; Claims made or "suits" brought; or vearsons or organizations making claims or bringing "suits." 2. ++: Aggregate Limit Is the most we will pay for the sum of damages because of all "bodily Injury" and 'property aetit�u.- — 3. Subje+.i to 2. above, the Each Occurrence Limit Is the most we will pay for the sum of damages because of "bodily injury" and "property damage" arising out of any one "occurrence." If you drIsi+pate more than one project In the Declarations, the Aggregate Limit shall apply separately to each project. The limits of this Coverage Part apply separately to each consecutive annual period and to any remaining :period of less c..m 12'months, starting with the beginning of the policy period shown in the Declarations, unless the policy period _ Is exw++ded after Issuance for an additional perloq of less than 12 months. In that case, the additional pufiud will be3 deemod part of the last preceding period for purposes of determining the Limits of Insurance. .SECTION IV - CONDITIONS _ 1. Bankruptcy. Bankruptcy or insolvency of the Insured will not relieve us of our obligation under this Coverage Part. 2.'Cancellation. a. The first Named insured shown In the Declarations may cancel this policy by mailing or delivering to us ` advance written notice of cancellation. b. We may cancel this policy by mailing or dellvering to the first Named Insured and the "contractor" written notice of cancellation at least: - (1) 10 days before the effective date of cancellation if we cancel for non-payment of premium; or (2) 30 days before the effective date of cancellation if we cancel for any other reason. , . G0009 (11-88) Page 4 of 6 (` c. We will mail or deliver our notices to the first Named Insured's and the "contractor's" last mailing address ( known to us. d. Notice of cancellation will state the effective date of cancellation. The policy period will end on that -date. e. If this policy is cancelled, we will send the "contractor" any premium refund due. If we cancel, the relund will be pro rata. If the first Named Insured cancels, the refund may be less than pro rata. The cancellation will be effective even it we have not made or offered a refund. I. U notice is mailed, proof of mailing will be sufficient proof of notice. 3. Changes. This policy contains all the agreements between you, the "contractor" and us concerning the insurance afforded. The first Named Insured shown in the Declarations and the "contractor" are authorized to make changes In the terms of this policy with our consent. This policy's terms can be amended or waived only by endorsement Issued by us and made a part of this policy. 4. Duties In The Event Of Occurrence, Ctatm Or Suit: a. You must see to It that we are notified as soon as practicable of an "occurrence" which may result In a claim. To the extent possible, .notice should include: (1) How, when and where the "occurrence" took place; (2) The names and addresses of any injured persons and witnesses; and (3) The nature and location of any Injury or damage arising out of the "occurrence." b. It a claim is made or 'suit" Is brought against any insured, you must: (1) Immediately record the specifics of the claim or "suit" and the date received; and (2) Notify us as soon as practicable. You must see to it that we receive written notice of the claim or "suit" as soon as practicable. c. You and any other involved Insured must: (1) Immediately send us copies of any . demands, notices. summonses or legal papers received in connection with the claim or "sUt;" (2) Authorize us to obtain records and other information; (3) Cooperate with us in the Investigation, settlement or defense of the claim or "suit;" and (4) Assist us, upon our request, in the enforcement of any right against any person or organization which may be liable to the Insured because of Injury or damage to which this Insurance may also apply. d. No insureds will, except at their own cost, voluntarily make a payment, assume any obligation, or Incur any expense, without our consent. 5. Examination Of Your Books And Records. We may examine and audit your books and records as well as the "contractor's" books and records as they relate to .this policy at any time during the policy period and up to three years afterward. 6. Inspections And Surveys. We have the right but are not obligated to: a. Make inspections and surveys at any time; b. Give you reports on the conditions we find; and a. Recommend changes. Pape b of a Any inspections, surveys, reports or recommendations relate only to insurability and the premiums to be cl —,jud. We do not make safety Inspections. We do not undertake to perform the duty of any person ur oiq.:, iization to provide for the health or safety of workers or the public. And we do not warrant that conditions: a. Are safe or healthful; or, b. Comply with laws, regulations, codes or standards. — This condition applies not only to us, but also to any rating, advisory, rate service or similar organization which makes insurance inspections, surveys, reports or recommendations. 7. legal Action Against Us. No =parson or organization has a right under this Coverage Part: a. To join us as a party or otherwise bring us Into a "suit" asking for damages from an Insured; or b. To sue us on this Coverage Part unless all of its terms have been tufty complied with. A person or organization may sue us to recover on an agreed settlement or on a final judgment against an — insure! obtained after an actual trial; but we will not be liable for damages that are not payable under the terms of this ioverage Part or that are in excess of the applicable limit of insurance. An agreed settlement means a settlemunt and release of liability signed Uy us, the Insured and the claimant or the claimant's legal repre::untalive. _ 8. Other Insurance. The insurance afforded by this Coverage Part is primary insurance and we will not seek contribution from any — other insurance available to you unless the other Insurance Is provided by a "contractor" other than the designated "contractor" for the same operation and job location designated in the Declarations. Then we will share with that other insurance by the method described below. If all of the other Insurance permits contribution by equal shares, we will follow this method also. Under this apprnach, each Insurer contributes equal amounts until it has paid its applicable limit of insurance or none of the luss umains, whichever comes first. — If any of the other Insurance does not permit contribution by equal shares, we will contribute by limits. Under this method. each insurer's share Is based on the ratio of its applicable limit of Insurance to the total applicable limits of Ins,, once of all insurers. 9. Premiums. The "contractor." a. Is responsible for the payment of all premiums; and b. Will be the payee for any return premiums we pay. 10. Premium Audit. a. We will compute all premiums for this Coverage Part in accordance with our rules and rates. b. Premium shown in this Coverage Part as advance premium is a deposit premium only. At the close of each audit period we will compute the earned premium for that period. Audit premiums are dud and payable on notice to the "contractor." If the sum of the advance and audit premiums paid for the policy term is greater than the earned premium, we will return the excess to the "contractor." c. The "contractor" must keep records of the Information we need for premium computation, and send us '— copies at such times as we may request. 11. Separation Of Insureds. Except with respect to the Limits of Insurance, and any rights or duties specifically assigned in'ttus Coverage Part to the first Named Insured, this Insurance applies: , a. As if each Named Insured were the only Named insured; and — b. Separately to each Insured against whom claim is made or "suit" is brought. CGO009 (11-88) Page 6 of 8 r 12. Transfer Of Rights Of Recovery Against Others To Us. It the insured has rights to recover all or part of any payment we have made under this Coverage Part those rights are transferred to us. The insured must do nothing after loss to impair them. Al our request. the insured will bring "suit or transfer those rights to us and help us ehto"rce them. f 13. When We Do Not Renew. r- if we decide not to renew this Coverage Part, we will mall or deliver to the first Named Insured shown In the iDeclarations written notice of the nonrenewal not less than 30 days before the expiration date. It notice •is mailed, proof of mailing will be sufficient proof of notice. r SECTION V - is t 1- "Auto" means a land motor vehicle, trailer or semitrailer designed for travel on public roads, including any attached machinery or equipment. But "auto" does not Include "mobile equipment." 2. "Bodily Injury" means bodily Injury, sickness or disease sustained by a person, including death resulting from r ' any of these at any time. 3. "Contractor" means the contractor designated in the Declarations. 4. "Impaired property" means tangible property, other than work performed for you, that cannot be used or Is less useful because: r a. It incorporates work performed for you that Is known or thought to be detective, deficient, Inadequate or i dangerous; or b. You have failed to fulfill the terms of a contractor agreement; T If such property can be restored to use by: 1 a. The repair, replacement, adjustment or removal of the work prepared for you; or b. Your fulfilling the terms of the contract or agreement. 5. "insured contract" means: a. A lease of premises; b. A sidetrack agreement; „ c. Any easement or license agreement, except In connection with construction or demolition operations on or within 50 feet of a railroad; d. An obligation, as required by ordinance, to indemnify a municipality, except in connection with work for a municipality; or e. An elevator maintenance agreement. 6. "Mobile equipment" means any of the following types of land vehicles, including any attached machinery or equipment: a. Bulldozers, farm machinery, forklifts and other vehicles designed for use principally off public roads; b. Vehicles maintained for use solely on or next to premises you own or rent; c. Vehicles that travel on crawler treads; d. Vehicles, whether sell -propelled or not, maintained primarily to provide mobility to permanently mounted: (1) Power cranes, shovels, loaders, diggers or drills; or (2) Road construction or resurfacing equipment such as graders, scrapers or rollers; e. Vehicles not described in a., b., c. or d. above that are not self-propelled and are maintained primarily to provide mobility to permanently attached equipment of the following types: (1) Air compressors, pumps and generators, Including spraying, welding, building clearing, geophysical exploration, lighting and well servicing equipment; or (2) Cherry pickers and similar devices used to raise or lower workers; CG0009 (11-88) Page 7 of a r 1. Vehicles . not described in a., b., c. or d. above maintained primarily for purposes other than the transportation of persons or cargo. However, self-propelled vehicles with the following types of permanently attached equipment are not "Mobilu equipment" but will be considered "autos:" (1) Equipment designed primarily for: (a) Snow removal; (b) Road maintenance, but not construction or resurfacing; (c) Street cleaning; (2) Cherry pickers and similar devices mounted on .automobile or truck chassis and used to raise or tower workers; and (3) Air compressors, pumps and generators, including spraying, welding, building cleaning, geophysical exploration, lighting and well servicing equipment. • 7. "Occurrence" means an accident, Including continuous or repeated exposure to substantially the same. general harmful conditions. B. "Property damage" means: a. Physical Injury to tangible property, including all resulting loss of use of that property. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the physical injury that caused it; or b. Loss of use of tangible property that is not physically Injured. All such loss of use shall be deemed to occur at the time of the "occurrence" that caused it. 9. "Suit' means a civil proceeding, brought in the United States of America (including Its territories and _ possessions), Puerto Rico and Canada, in which damages because of "bodily, injury" or "property damage" to which this insurance applies are alleged. "Suit" includes: a. An arbitration in which such damages are claimed and to which you must submit or do submit with our consent; or b. Any other alternative dispute resolution process in which such damages are claimed and to which you. submit with our consent. 10. "Work" includes materials, parts or equipment furnished In connection with the operations. ,00009 (11-08) Page a of a COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILIT THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. i I ' ADDITIONAL INSURED - �.. ENGINEERS, ARCHITECTS OR SURVEYORS This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART r 1. WHO IS AN INSURED (Section 11) is amended to include as an Insured any architect, engineer, or surveye engaged by you but only with respect to liability arising out of your premises or "your work". 2. The Insurance with respect to such architects, engineers, or surveyors does not apply to "bodily injury" "property damage", "personal injury" or "advertising injury" arising out of the rendering of or the failure (- render any professional services by or for you, Including: a. The preparing, approving, or failing to prepare or approve maps, drawings, opinions, reports, survey, change orders, designs or specifications; and b. Supervisory, Inspection, or engineering services. CG2007 (ED. 01.87) PRINTED IN 0 7 THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. NUCLEAR ENERGY LIABILITY EXCLUSION ENDORSEMENT F . (BROAD FORM) L This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following: BUSINESSOWNERS POLICY COMMERCIAL AUTO COVERAGE PART COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART FARM COVERAGE PART PRODUCTSICOMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART LIQUOR LIABILITY COVERAGE PART POLLUTION LIABILITY COVERAGE PART OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART RAILROAD PROTECTIVE LIABILITY COVERAGE PART SPECIAL PROTECTIVE AND HIGHWAY LIABILITY POLICY NEW YORK DEPARTMENT OF TRANS- PORTATION UNDERGROUND STORAGE TANK POLICY 1. The insurance does not apply, A. Under any Uability Coverage, to "bodily injury" or "property damage r" (1) With respect to which an "insured" under the policy is also an Insured under a nuclear energy lability policy Issued by Nuclear Energy Uability Insurance Association, Mutual Atomic Energy Uabllity Underwriters, Nuclear insurance Association of Canada or any of their successors, or would be an Insured under any such policy but for Its termination upon exhaustion of Its limit of liability; or (2) Resulting from the "hazardous properties" of "nuclear material" and with respect to which r (a) any person or organization Is required to maintain financial protection pursuant to the Atomic Energy Act of 1954, or any law amendatory thereof, or (b) the "Insured" is, or had this policy not been Issued would be, entitled to indemnity from the United States of America, or any agency thereof, under any agreement entered Into by the United States of I America, or any agency thereof, with any person or organization. B. Under any Medical Payments coverage, to expenses incurred with respect to "bodily injury" resulting from the "hazardous properties" of "nuclear material" and arising out of the operation of a "nuclear facility" by any person or organization. C. Under any Uability Coverage, to "bodily Injury" or "property damage" resulting from the "hazardous properties" of "nuclear material", 1r: (1) The "nuclear material" (a) is at any "nuclear facility" owned by, you or operated by or on behalf of, an "insured" or (b) has been discharged or dispersed therefrom; (2) The "nuclear material" Is contained. In "spent fuel" or "waste" at any time possessed, handled, used, processed, stored, transported or disposed of by or on behalf of an "insured"; or (3) The "bodily injury" or "property damage" arises out of the fumishing by an "insured" of services, materials, parts or equipment In connection with the planning, construction, maintenance, operation or use of any "nuclear facility", but if such facility Is located within the United States of America, its territories or possessions or Canada, this exclusion (3) applies only to "property damage" to such nuclear facility" and any property thereat. 2. As used in this endorsement: "Hazardous properties" Include radioactive, toxic or explosive properties; "Nuclear material" means "source material", "special nuclear material" or "by-product material"; "Source material", "special nuclear material", and "by-product material" have the meanings given them in the Atomic Energy Act of 1954 or in any law amendatory thereof; "Spent fuel" means any fuel element or fuel component, solid or liquid, which has been used or exposed to radiation in a "nuclear reactor"; IL0021 (11-94) Page i of 2 r- i e "Waste" means any waste material (a) containing "by-product material" other than the tailings or wastes produced by the extraction or concentration of uranium or thorium from any ore processed primarily for its source material" content, and (b) resulting from the operation by any person or organization of airy "nuclear facility" Included under the first two paragraphs of the definition of "nuclear facility". "Nuclear facility" means: (a) Any."nuclear reactor"; (b) Any equipment or device designed or used for (1) separating the isotopes of uranium or plutonium, (2) processing or utilizing "spent fuel", or (3) handling, processing or packaging "waste"; (c) Any equipment or device used fore the processing, fabricating or alloying of "special nuclear material" If at any time the total amount of such material in the custody of the "Insured" at the premises where such equipment or device is located consists of or contains more than 25 grams of plutonium or uranium 233 or any combination thereof, or more than 250 grams of uranium 235; (d) Any structure, basin, excavation, premises or place prepared or used for the storage or disposal of "waste"; ' and includes the site on which any of the foregoing is located, all operations conducted on such site and all premises used for such operations; "Nuclear reactor' means any apparatus designed or used to sustain nuclear fission in a self-supporting chain reaction or to contain a critical mass of fissionable material; "Property damage" Includes all forms of radioactive contamination of property. IL0021 (11-94) 2 of 2 r COMM MAL GENERAL UA:31UTY THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. AMENDATORY ENDORSEMF-NT -- CANCELLATION FIds endorsement modliles insurance providod under Iho following: OWNERS AND CONTRACTORS PROTECTIVE UABIUTY COVERAGE PART SecUon IV -- CondlUons, Part 2.a. 19 replaced by the following: CANCELLATION The first named Insured shown In the declaratlons may cancel No coverage part by rValling or delivering to us written 7 noUce of cancellation at least rdays before tho effective date of cancegillbn. C r f r FCOMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILII ►LICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY. r IL 3RSEMENT- NOT RENEW II, • I (OCCURRENCE VERSION) JCE VERSION) 114TY COVERAGE FORM IVERAGE FORM (OCCURRENCE VERSION) l� ,ar `or deliver to the first Named Insured shown in 11 o � ys before the expiration date. notice. r F r 4 , CAf 711-11tlNNi 1'IIRIII It u•1 11 !' i } A CONTRACTOR SHALL: CONTRACTOR CHECKLIST (1) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on 7 proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (2) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (3) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (4) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (A) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (B) no later than seven days after receipt by the contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (5) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (6) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within ten (10) days after the contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (7) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: ir l REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services related to this construction project must (see reverse) be covered by workers' compensation insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment and materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee." "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at (512)440- 3789 to receive information on the legal requirement for coverage, to verify whether your employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage." and (8) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, to: (A) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (B) provide a certificate of coverage to the contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (C) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the language in subsection (e) (3) of this rule; (D) provide the contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (E) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the contractor: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (ii) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (F) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (G) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within (ten) 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (H) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by I, paragraphs (A) - (H), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. r f; No Text CONTRACT t•• STATE OF TEXAS COUNTY OF LUBBOCK F- THIS AGREEMENT, made and entered into this 241' day of June 1999 by and between the City of Lubbock, r" County of Lubbock, State of Texas, acting by and through the Mayor, City of Lubbock, thereunto authorized to do so, hereinafter referred to as OWNER, and Knox. Galley & Meador. Inc. of the City of Lubbock, County of Lubbock and the State of Texas hereinafter termed CONTRACTOR. C" r i WITNESSETH: That for and in consideration of the payments and agreements hereinafter mentioned, to be made and performed by the OWNER and under the conditions expressed in the bond bearing even date herewith (if any) the CONTRACTOR hereby agrees with OWNER to commence and complete the construction of certain improvements described as follows: BID #99105 - MUNICIPAL SQUARE BUILDING RENOVATION - PHASE 1- $248,519.00 and all extra work in connection therewith, under the terms as stated in the contract documents and at his (or their) own proper cost and expense to furnish all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance and other accessories and services necessary to complete the said construction in accordance with the contract documents as defined in the General Condition of Agreement. The CONTRACTOR hereby agrees to commence work within ten days after the date written notice to do so shall have been given to him and to substantially complete same within the time specified in the contract documents. The OWNER agrees to pay the CONTRACTOR in current funds for the performance of the contract in accordance with the bid submitted therefore, subject to additions and deductions, as provided in the contract documents and to make payment on account thereof as provided therein. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to these presents have executed this agreement in Lubbock, Lubbock County, Texas in the year and day first above written. APPROVED AS TO FORM: #� ity Attorney ATTEST: Corporate Secretary CONTRACTOR: KNOX, G Y & EADOR, INC. By: PRINTED NAME: TITLE: COMPLETE ADDRESS: Knox, Gailey & Meador, Inc. P.O. Box 5736 Lubbock, Texas 79408 No Text GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT 1. OWNER Whenever the word Owner, or First Party, are used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to the City of Lubbock, Texas. CONTRACTOR . Whenever the word Contractor, or Second Party, is used, it shall be understood to mean the person, persons, co- partnership or corporation, to wit KNOX, GAILEY & MEADOR, INC. who has agreed to perform the work (` embraced in this contract, or their legal representative. $. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE Whenever the word Owner's Representative or representative is used in this contract, it shall be understood as referring to, City of Lubbock, or its representative GARY SMITH, FACILITIES MANAGER, so designated who will inspect constructions; or to such other representatives, supervisors, architects, engineers, or inspectors as may be authorized by said Owner to act in any particular under this agreement. Engineers, supervisors or inspectors will act for the Owner under the direction of Owner's Representative, but shall not directly supervise the Contractor �^ or persons acting on behalf of the Contractor. I 4. CONTRACT DOCUMENTS t. The contract's documents shall consist of the Notice to Bidders, General Instructions to Bidders, Bid, Signed Agreement, Statutory Bonds (if required), General Conditions of the Agreement, Special Conditions of the Agreement (if any), Specifications, Plans, Insurance Certificate, and all other documents made available to Bidder for inspection in accordance with the Notice to Bidders. The above described materials are sometimes referred to herein as the "contract" or "contract documents". 5. INTERPRETATION OF PHRASES " Whenever the words "Directed," "Permitted," "Designated," "Required," "Considered Necessary," "Prescribed," or words of like import are used, it shall be understood that the direction, requirement, permission, order, designation or prescription of the Owner's Representative is intended; and similarly, the words "Approved," "Acceptable," �.. "Satisfactory," or words of like import shall mean approved by or acceptable or satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. r' l: 6. SUBCONTRACTOR The term Subcontractor, as employed herein, includes only those having a direct contract with the Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents. Owner shall have no responsibility to any Subcontractor employed by Contractor for performance of work on the project contemplated by these contract documents, but said Subcontractors will look exclusively to Contractor for any payments due Subcontractor. 7. WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered at or sent certified mail to the last business address known to the party who gives the notice. 1 8. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES Unless otherwise stipulated, the Contractor shall provide and pay for all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, tools, superintendence, labor, insurance, and all water, light, power, fuel, transportation and all other facilities necessary for the execution and completion of the work covered by the contract documents. Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and both workmanship and materials shall be of a good quality. The Contractor shall, if required, furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials. Materials or _ work described in words which so applied have well known, technical or trade meaning shall be held to refer such recognized standards. All work shall be done and all materials furnished in strict conformity with the contract documents. 9. SUBSTANTIALLY COMPLETED The term "Substantially Completed" is meant that the structure or project contemplated by the contract documents has been made suitable for use or occupancy or the facility is in a condition to serve its intended purpose, but still may require minor miscellaneous work and adjustment. — 10. LAYOUT Except as specifically provided herein, the Contractor shall be responsible for laying out all work and shall accomplish this work in a manner acceptable to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative will check the Contractor's layout of all major structures and any other layout work done by the Contractor at Contractor's request, but this check does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of correctly locating all work in accordance with the Plans and Specifications. 11. KEEPING OF PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS ACCESSIBLE The Contractor shall be furnished copies of all Plans and Specifications without expense to Contractor and Contractor shall keep one copy of same consistently accessible on the job site. 12. RIGHT OF ENTRY The Owner's Representative may make periodic visits to the site to observe the progress or quality of the _ executed work and to determine, in general, if the work is proceeding in accordance with the contract documents. Owner's Representative will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous onsite inspections to check the quality or quantity of the work, nor will Owner's Representative be responsible for the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or the safety precautions incident thereto. Notwithstanding the — Owner's Representative's rights of entry hereunder, the Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the Contractor's failure to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 13. LINES AND GRADES All lines and grades shall be furnished by the Owner's Representative whenever Owner's Representative deems said lines and grades are necessary for the commencement of the work contemplated by these contract — documents or the completion of the work contemplated by these contract documents. Whenever necessary, Contractor shall suspend its work in order to permit Owner's Representative to comply with this requirement, but such suspension will be as brief as practical and Contractor shall be allowed no extra compensation therefore. The Contractor shall give the Owner's Representative ample notice of the time and place where lines and grades will be needed. All stakes, marks, etc., shall be carefully preserved by the Contractor, and in case of careless destruction or removal by Contractor, its Subcontractors, or its employees, such stakes, marks, etc., shall be replaced by the Owner's Representative at Contractor's expense. 2 7- I 14. OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE'S AUTHORITY AND DUTY Unless otherwise specified, it is mutually agreed between the parties to this Agreement that the Owner's Representative has the authority to review all work included herein. The Owner's Representative has the authority to stop the work whenever such stoppage may be necessary to insure the proper execution of the contract. The Owner's Representative shall, in all cases, determine the amounts and quantities of the several kinds of work €, which are to be paid for under the contract documents, and shall determine all questions in relation to said work and the construction thereof, and shall, in all cases, decide every question which may arise relative to the r. execution of this contract on the part of said Contractor. The decision of the Owner's Representative shall be conclusive in the absence of written objection to same delivered to Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of any decision or direction by Owner's Representative. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 15. SUPERINTENDENCE AND INSPECTION It is agreed by the Contractor that the Owner's Representative shall be and is hereby authorized to appoint from time to time such subordinate engineers, supervisors, or inspectors as the said Owner's Representative may deem proper to inspect the materials furnished and the work done under this Agreement, and to see that said material is furnished and said work is done in accordance with the specifications therefore. The Contractor shall furnish all reasonable aid and assistance required by the subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors for the proper inspection and examination of the work. The Contractor shall regard and obey the directions and instructions of any subordinate engineers, supervisors or inspectors so appointed, when such directions and instructions are consistent with the obligations of this Agreement and accompanying plans and specifications provided, however, should the Contractor object to any orders by any subordinate engineer, supervisor or inspector, the Contractor may within fifteen (15) calendar days make written appeal to the Owner's Representative for its decision. In the absence of timely written objection by Contractor, as provided herein, any and all objection or objections shall be deemed waived. 16. CONTRACTOR'S DUTY AND SUPERINTENDENCE The Contractor shall give personal attention to the faithful prosecution and completion of this contract and shall keep on the work, during its progress, a competent superintendent and any necessary assistants, all satisfactory to Owner's Representative. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in its absence and all directions given to superintendent shall be binding as if given to the Contractor. It is expressly agreed that adequate supervision by competent and reasonable representatives of the Contractor is essential to the proper performance of the work and lack of such supervision shall be grounds for suspending operations of the Contractor. r.., The work, from its commencement to completion, shall be under the exclusive charge and control of the Contractor and all risk in connection therewith shall be borne by the Contractor. The Owner or Owner's Representatives shall not be responsible for the acts or omissions of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, or any of Contractor's agents or employees, or any other persons performing any of the work. 17. CONTRACTOR'S UNDERSTANDING It is understood and agreed that the Contractor has, by careful examination, satisfied itself as to the nature and location of the work, the confirmation of the ground, the character, quality and quantity of materials to be encountered, the character of equipment and facilities needed preliminary to and during the prosecution of the work, and the general and local conditions, and all other matters which in any way affect the work under the contract documents. No oral agreement or conversation with any officer, agent, or employee of the Owner, or Owner's Representative either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Subject to the rights of Owner as set forth in Paragraph 23 hereof, all modifications and/or amendments to the contract documents, shall be in writing, and executed by Owner's Representative and Contractor. Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance and the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at its own cost and expense. 18. CHARACTER OF WORKERS The Contractor agrees to employ only orderly and competent workers, skillful in the performance in the type of work required under this contract, to do the work; and agrees that whenever the Owner's Representative shall inform Contractor in writing that any man or men on the work, are, in Owner's Representative's sole opinion, incompetent, -unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unacceptable to Owner or Owner's Representative, such man or men shall be discharged from the work and shall not again be employed on the work without the Owner's Representative's written consent. 19. CONSTRUCTION PLANT The Contractor shall provide all labor, tools, equipment, machinery and materials necessary in the prosecution and completion of this contract where it is not otherwise specifically provided that Owner shall furnish same, and it is also understood that Owner shall not be held responsible for the care, preservation, conservation, or protection of any materials, tools, equipment or machinery or any part of the work until it is finally completed and accepted. The building of structures for the housing of men or equipment will be permitted only at such places as the Owner's Representative shall consent or direct, and the sanitary conditions of the grounds in or about such structure shall at all times be maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Owner's Representative. 20. SANITATION Necessary sanitary conveniences for the use of laborers on the work site, properly secluded from public observation, shall be constructed and maintained by the Contractor in such manner and at such points as shall be _ approved by the Owner's Representative and their use shall be strictly enforced. 21. OBSERVATION AND TESTING The Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right at all times to observe and test the work. Contractor shall make necessary arrangements and provide proper facilities and access for such observation and testing at any location wherever such work is in preparation or progress. Contractor shall ascertain the scope of any observation which may be contemplated by Owner or Owner's Representative and shall give ample notice as to the time each part of the work will be ready for such observation. Owner or Owner's Representative may reject any such work found to be defective or not in accordance with the contract documents, regardless of the stage of its completion or the time or place of discovery of such errors and regardless of whether Owner's Representative has previously accepted the work through oversight or otherwise. If any such work should be covered without approval or consent of the Owner, it must, if requested by Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for examination at Contractor's expense. In the event that any part of the work is being fabricated or manufactured at a location where it is not convenient for Owner or Owner's Representative to make observations of such work or require testing of said work, then in such event Owner or Owner's Representative may require Contractor to furnish Owner or Owner's Representative certificates of inspection, testing or approval made by persons ... competent to perform such tasks at the location where that part of the work is being manufactured or fabricated. All such tests will be in accordance with the methods prescribed by the American Society for Testing and Materials or such other applicable organization as may be required by law or the contract documents. If any such work which is required to be inspected, tested, or approved is covered up without written approval or consent of the Owner or Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by the Owner or Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation and testing at the Contractor's expense. The cost of all such inspections, tests and approvals shall be borne by the Contractor unless otherwise provided herein. Any work which fails to meet the requirements of any such tests, inspections or approvals, and any work which meets the requirements of any such tests or approvals but does not meet the requirements of the contract documents shall be considered defective, and shall be corrected at the Contractor's expense. Neither observations by the Owner or Owner's Representative, nor inspections, tests, or approvals made by Owner, Owner's Representative, or other persons authorized under the contract documents to make such r inspections, tests, or approvals shall relieve the Contractor from its obligation to perform the work in accordance with the requirements of the contract documents. 22. DEFECTS AND THEIR REMEDIES i It is expressly agreed that if the work or any part thereof, or any material brought on the site of the work for use in the work or selected for the same, shall be deemed by the Owner or Owner's Representative as unsuitable or not in conformity with plans, specifications and/or contract documents, the Contractor shall, after receipt of written notice thereof from the Owner's Representative, forthwith remove such material and rebuild or otherwise remedy such work so that it shall be in full accordance with the contract documents. It is further agreed that any remedial action contemplated as hereinabove set forth shall be at Contractor's expense. 23. CHANGES AND ALTERATIONS The Contractor further agrees that the Owner may make such changes and alterations as the Owner may see fit, in the line, grade, form dimensions, plans or materials for the work herein contemplated, or any part thereof, either before or after the beginning of the construction, without affecting the validity of this contract and the accompanying bond. If such changes or alterations diminish the quantity of the work to be done, they shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages, or anticipated profits on the work that may be dispensed with. If they increase the amount of work, and the increased work can fairly be classified under the specifications, such increase shall be paid according to the quantity actually done and at the unit price established for such work under this contract; otherwise such additional work shall be paid for as provided under Extra Work. In case the Owner shall make such changes or alterations as shall make useless any work already done or material already furnished or used in r said work, then the Owner shall recompense the Contractor for any material or labor so used, and for actual expenses incurred in preparation for the work as originally planned. 24. EXTRA WORK The term "extra work" as used in this contract shall be understood to mean and include all work that may be required by the Owner or Owner's Representative to be done by the Contractor to accomplish any change, alteration or addition to the work as shown on the plans and specifications or contract documents and not covered by Contractor's bid, except as provided under Changes and Alterations herein. It is agreed that the Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Owner's Representative when presented with a written work order signed by the Owner's Representative; subject, however, to the right of the Contractor to require written confirmation of such extra work order by the Owner. It is also agreed that the compensation to be paid to the Contractor for performing said extra work shall be determined by the following methods: Method (A) - By agreed unit prices; or Method (B) - By agreed lump sum; or Method (C) - If neither Method (A) or Method (B) be agreed upon before the extra work is commenced, then the Contractor shall be paid the lesser of the following: (1) actual field cost of the extra work, plus fifteen (15%) percent; or (2) the amount that would have been charged by a reasonable and prudent Contractor as a reasonable and necessary cost for performance of the extra work. In the event said extra work be performed and paid for under Method (C)(1), then the provisions of this paragraph shall apply and the "actual field cost" is hereby defined to include the cost of all workmen, such as foremen, timekeepers, mechanics and laborers, materials, supplies, teams, trucks, rentals on machinery and equipment, for the time actually employed or used on such extra work, plus actual transportation charges necessarily incurred, together with all expenses incurred directly on account of such extra work, including Social Security, Old Age f Benefits, Maintenance Bonds, Public Liability and Property Damage and Workers' Compensation and all other insurances as may be required by law or ordinances or directed by the Owner or Owner's Representative, or by 5 i them agreed to. Owner's Representative may direct the form in which accounts of the actual field cost shall be kept and records of these accounts shall be made available to the Owner's Representative. The Owner's Representative may also specify in writing, before the work commences, the method of doing the work and the type and kind of machinery and equipment to be used; otherwise, these matters shall be determined by the Contractor. Unless otherwise agreed upon, the prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be determined by using 100%, unless otherwise specified, of the latest Schedule of Equipment and Ownership Expenses adopted by the Associated General Contractors of America. Where practical, the terms and prices for the use of machinery and equipment shall be incorporated in the written extra work order. The fifteen percent (15%) of the actual field cost to be paid to Contractor shall cover and compensate Contractor for its profit, overhead, general superintendence and field office expense, and all other elements of cost and expense not embraced within the actual field cost as herein defined, save that where the Contractor's Camp or Field Office must be maintained primarily on account of such Extra Work, then the cost to maintain and operate the same shall be included in the "actual field cost." No claim for extra work of any kind will be allowed unless ordered in writing by Owner's Representative. In case any orders or instructions appear to the Contractor to involve extra work for which Contractor should receive compensation or an adjustment in the construction time, Contractor shall prior to commencement of such extra work, make written request to the Owner's Representative for a written order authorizing such extra work. Should a difference of opinion arise as to what does or does not constitute extra work or as to the payment therefore, and the Owner's Representative insists upon its performance, the Contractor shall proceed with the work after making written request for written order and shall keep adequate and accurate account of the actual field cost thereof, as provided under Method (C)(1). If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to the commencement any extra work, any claim for payment due to alleged extra work shall be deemed waived. 25. DISCREPANCIES AND OMISSIONS It is further agreed that it is the intent of the contract documents that all work described in the bid, the specifications, plans and other contract documents, is to be done for the prices quoted by the Contractor and that such price shall include all appurtenances necessary to complete the work in accordance with the intent of these contract documents as interpreted by Owner's Representative. Notices of any discrepancies or omissions in these plans, specifications, or contract documents, shall be given to the Owners' Representative and a _ clarification obtained before the bids are received, and if no such notice is received by the Owner's Representative prior to the opening of bids, then it shall be deemed that the Contractor fully understands the work to be included and has provided sufficient sums in its bid to complete the work in accordance with these plans and specifications. If Contractor does not notify Owner's Representative prior to bidding of any discrepancies or omissions, then it shall be deemed for all purposes that the plans and specifications are sufficient and adequate for completion of the project. It is further agreed that any request for clarification must be submitted no later than five (5) calendar days prior to the opening of bids. 26. RIGHT OF OWNER TO MODIFY METHODS AND EQUIPMENT If at any time the methods or equipment used by the Contractor are found to be inadequate to secure the quality of work with the rate of progress required under this contract, the Owner or Owner's Representative may order the Contractor in writing to increase their safety or improve their character and efficiency and the Contractor shall comply with such order. If, at any time, the working force of the Contractor is inadequate for securing the progress herein specified, the Contractor shall, if so ordered in writing, increase its force or equipment, or both, to such an extent as to give reasonable assurance of compliance with the schedule of progress. 11 28 F PROTECTION AGAINST ACCIDENT TO EMPLOYEES AND THE PUBLIC AND GENERAL INDEMNITY The Contractor shall take out and procure a policy or policies of Workers' Compensation Insurance with an insurance company licensed to transact business in the State of Texas, which policy shall comply with the Workers' Compensation laws of the State of Texas. The Contractor shall at all times exercise reasonable precaution for the safety of employees and others on or near the work and shall comply with all applicable provisions of federal, state and municipal laws and building and construction codes. All machinery and equipment and other physical hazards shall be guarded in accordance with the "Manual of Accident Prevention in Construction" of Associated General Contractors of America, except where incompatible with federal, state or municipal laws or regulations. The Contractor, its sureties and insurance carriers shall defend, indemnify and hold harmless the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees against any all losses, costs, damages, expenses, liabilities, claims and/or causes of action, whether known or unknown, fixed, actual, accrued or contingent, liquidated or unliquidated, including, but not limited to, attorneys' fees and expenses, in connection with, incident to, related to, or arising out of, the Contractor's or any subcontractor's, agent's or employee's, in any manner whatsoever, omission, execution and/or supervision of this contract, and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. The safety precautions taken shall be the sole responsibility of the Contractor, in its sole discretion as an Independent Contractor; inclusion of this paragraph in the Agreement, as well as any notice which may be given by the Owners or the Owner's Representative concerning omissions under this paragraph as the work progresses, are intended as reminders to the Contractor of its duty and shall not be construed as any assumption of duty to supervise safety precautions by either the Contractor or any of its subcontractors. CONTRACTOR'S INSURANCE The Contractor shall not commence work under this contract until he has obtained all insurance as required in the General Conditions of the contract documents, from an underwriter authorized to do business in the State of Texas and satisfactory to the City. Proof of coverage shall be furnished to the City and written notice of cancellation or any material change will be provided ten (10) calendar days in advance of cancellation or change. All policies of insurance, required herein, including policies of insurance required to be provided by Contractor and its subcontractors, shall contain a waiver of any and all of the insurer's or payor's, in the event of self-insurance, rights to subrogation that any such insurer or payor, in the event of self-insurance, may acquire by virtue of payment of any loss under such insurance or self-insurance. All certificates of insurance submitted to the City in conformity with the provisions hereof shall establish such waiver.. The Contractor shall procure and carry at its sole cost and expense through the life of this contract, insurance protection as hereinafter specified. Coverage in excess of that specified herein also shall be acceptable. Such insurance shall be carried with an insurance company authorized to transact business in the State of Texas and shall cover all operations in connection with this contract, whether performed by the Contractor or a subcontractor, or separate policies shall be provided covering the operation of each subcontractor. A certificate of insurance specifying each and all coverages shall be submitted prior to contract execution. The insurance certificates furnished shall name the City as an additional Insured, or In the alternative, shall be accompanied by a statement from the Contractor to the effect that no work on this particular project shall be subcontracted. It shall be the contractors responsibility to provide to the owner all proof of coverage insurance documents including workers compensation coverage for each subcontractor. A. General Liability Insurance The contractor shall have Comprehensive General Liability Insurance with limits of $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit in the aggregate and per occurrence to include: Premises and Operations Explosion & Collapse Hazard Underground Damage Hazard 7 Products & Completed Operations Hazard Contractual Liability Independent Contractors Coverage Personal Injury Advertising Injury B. Owner's Protective or Contingent Public Liability Insurance and Property Damage Liability Insurance. For bodily injuries, including accidental death and or property damage, $1,000,000.00 Combined Single Limit. This policy shall be submitted prior to contract execution. C. Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Comprehensive Automobile Liability Insurance with limits of not less than; Bodily Injury/Property Damage, $500,000.00 Combined Single Limit, to include all owned and nonowned cars including: Employers Nonownership Liability Hired and Nonowned Vehicles. The City is to be named as an additional insured on this policy for this specific job and copy of the endorsement doing so is to be attached to the Certificate of Insurance. D. Builder's Risk Insurance/Installation Floater Insurance The Contractor shall obtain a Builder's Risk policy in the amount of 100% of the total contract price (100% of potential loss) naming the City of Lubbock as insured. E. Umbrella Liability Insurance The Contractor shall have Umbrella Liability Insurance in the amount of $0.00 on all contracts with coverage to correspond with Comprehensive General Liability and Comprehensive Automobile Liability coverages. F. Worker's Compensation and Employers Liability Insurance Worker's Compensation Insurance covering all employees whether employed by the Contractor or any Subcontractor on the job with Employers Liability of at least $500,000.00. Definitions: Certificate of coverage ("certificate") - A copy of a certificate of insurance, a certificate of authority to self -insure issued by the commission, or a coverage agreement aWCC-81, TWCC-82, TWCC- — 83, or TWCC-84), showing statutory workers' compensation insurance coverage for the person's or entity's employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project. Duration of the project - includes the time from the beginning of the work on the project until the Contractor's/person's work on the project has been completed and accepted by the governmental entity. Persons providing services on the project ("subcontractor" in Section 406.096, Texas Labor Code) - includes all persons or entities performing all or part of the services the Contractor has undertaken to perform on the project, regardless of whether that person contracted directly with the Contractor and regardless of whether that person has employees. This includes, without limitation, independent contractors, subcontractors, leasing companies, motor carriers, owner - operators, employees of any such entity, or employees of any entity which furnishes persons to 8 provide services on the project. "Services" include, without limitation, providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor, transportation, or other service related to a project. "Services" does not include activities unrelated to the project, such as food/beverage vendors, office supply deliveries, and delivery of portable toilets. 2. The Contractor shall provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all employees of the contractor providing services on the project, for the duration of the project. 3. The Contractor must provide a certificate of coverage to the governmental entity prior to being awarded the contract. 4. If the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project, the Contractor must, prior to the end of the coverage period, file a new certificate of coverage with the governmental entity showing that coverage has been extended. 5. The Contractor shall obtain from each person providing services on the project, and provide to the governmental entity: I (a) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the i governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (b) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project. 6 The Contractor shall retain all required certificates of coverage for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter. 7. The Contractor shall notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project. 8. The Contractor shall post on each project site a notice, in the text, form and manner prescribed by the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission, informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify coverage and report lack of coverage. 9. The Contractor shall contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on the project, to: (a) provide coverage, based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements, which meets the statutory requirements of Texas Labor Code, Section 401.011(44) for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (b) provide to the Contractor, prior to that person beginning work on the project, a certificate of coverage showing that coverage is being provided for all employees of the person providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (c) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: f r_ (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the project; and (2) a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, prior to the end of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (g) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to perform as required by paragraphs (a) - (g), with the certificates of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. 10. By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the Contractor is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the Contractor who will provide services on the project will be covered by worker's compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance r- Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions. 11. The Contractor's failure to comply with any of these provisions is a breach of contract by the Contractor which entitles the governmental entity to declare the contract void if the Contractor does not remedy the breach within ten days after receipt of notice of breach from the governmental entity. _ G. Proof of Coverage Before work on this contract is commenced, each Contractor and subcontractor shall submit to the Owner — for approval five Certificates of Insurance covering each insurance policy carried and offered as evidence of compliance with the above insurance requirements, signed by an authorized representative of the insurance company setting forth: (1) The name and address of the insured. (2) The location of the operations to which the insurance applies. (3) The name of the policy and type or types of insurance in force thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (4) The expiration date of the policy and the limit or limits of liability thereunder on the date borne by such certificate. (5) A provision that the policy may be canceled only by mailing written notice to the named insured at the address shown in the bid specifications. (6) A provision that written notice shall be given to the City ten days prior to any change in or cancellation of the policies shown on the certificate. (7) The certificate or certificates shall be on the form (or identical copies thereof) contained in the job specifications. No substitute of nor amendment thereto will be acceptable. 10 r C" (8) If policy limits are paid, new policy must be secured for new coverage to complete project. (9) A Contractor shall: (a) provide coverage for its employees providing services on a project, for the duration of the project based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filling of any coverage agreements; (b) provide a certificate of coverage showing workers' compensation coverage to the governmental entity prior to beginning work on the project; (c) provide the governmental entity, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the Contractor's current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (d) obtain from each person providing services on a project, and provide to the governmental entity: (i) a certificate of coverage, prior to that person beginning work on the project, so the governmental entity will have on file certificates of coverage showing coverage for all persons providing services on the project; and (ii) no later than seven days after receipt by the Contractor, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (e) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; (f) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the Contractor knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; (g) post a notice on each project site informing all persons providing services on the project that they are required to be covered, and stating how a person may verify current coverage and report failure to provide coverage. This notice does not satisfy other posting requirements imposed by the Texas Worker's Compensation Act or other commission rules. This notice must be printed with a title in at least 30 point bold type and text in at least 19 point normal type, and shall be in both English and Spanish and any other language common to the worker population. The text for the notices shall be the following text provided by the commission on the sample notice, without any additional words or changes: c� REQUIRED WORKERS' COMPENSATION COVERAGE "The law requires that each person working on this site or providing services -- related to this construction project must be covered by workers' compensation Insurance. This includes persons providing, hauling, or delivering equipment or materials, or providing labor or transportation or other service related to the project, regardless of the identity of their employer or status as an employee.' "Call the Texas Workers' Compensation Commission at 5121440-3789 to receive information of the legal requirements for coverage, to verify whether your — employer has provided the required coverage, or to report an employer's failure to provide coverage;' and - (h) contractually require each person with whom it contracts to provide services on a project, c� to: (i) provide coverage based on proper reporting of classification codes and payroll amounts and filing of any coverage agreements for all of its employees providing services on the project, for the duration of the project; (ii) provide a certificate of coverage to the Contractor prior to that person beginning work on the project; (iii) include in all contracts to provide services on the project the following language: — "By signing this contract or providing or causing to be provided a certificate of coverage, the person signing this _ contract is representing to the governmental entity that all employees of the person signing this contract who will provide services on the project will be covered by workers' compensation coverage for the duration of the project, that the coverage will be based on proper reprinting of classification codes and payroll amounts, and that all coverage agreements will be filed with the appropriate insurance carrier or, in the case of a self -insured, with the commission's Division of Self -Insurance Regulation. Providing false or misleading information may subject the Contractor to administrative penalties, criminal penalties, civil penalties, or other civil actions."; (iv) provide the Contractor, prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of coverage, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (v) obtain from each other person with whom it contracts, and provide to the Contractor: (1) a certificate of coverage, prior to the other person beginning work on the r project; and (2) prior to the end of the coverage period, a new certificate of coverage showing extension of the coverage period, if the coverage period shown on the current certificate of coverage ends during the duration of the project; (vi) retain all required certificates of coverage on file for the duration of the project and for one year thereafter; 12 (vii) notify the governmental entity in writing by certified mail or personal delivery, within 10 days after the person knew or should have known, of any change that materially affects the provision of coverage of any person providing services on the project; and (viii) contractually require each other person with whom it contracts, to perform as required by paragraphs (i)-(viii), with the certificate of coverage to be provided to the person for whom they are providing services. r- 29. DISABLED EMPLOYEES Contractors having more than fifteen (15) employees agree to comply with the Americans with Disabilities Act of ,. 1990, and agree not to discriminate against a qualified individual with a disability because of the disability of such individual in regard to job application procedures, the hiring, advancement, or discharge of employees, employee compensation, job training, and other terms, conditions, and privileges of employment. f— 30. PROTECTION AGAINST CLAIMS OF SUBCONTRACTORS LABORERS MATERIALMEN AND FURNISHERS OF MACHINERY, EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees that it will indemnify and save the Owner and all of its officers, agents and employees, harmless against any and all claims, liabilities, losses, damages, expenses and causes of action arising out of, in any way, manner or form, the demands of subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen and furnishers of (^ machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and supplies, incurred in the performance of this contract and the project which is the subject matter of this contract. When Owner so desires, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged or waived. T� l If during the progress of the work, Contractor shall allow any indebtedness to accrue for work furnished by any of those designated in the preceding paragraph and shall fail to pay and discharge any such indebtedness within five r (5) days after demand is made, then Owner may, during the period for which such indebtedness shall remain unpaid, in addition to any statutory retainage rights it may have, withhold from the unpaid portion of this contract, a ' sum equal to the amount of such unpaid indebtedness or may apply the sum so withheld to discharge any such indebtedness. 31. PROTECTION AGAINST ROYALTIES OR PATENT INVENTION r" The Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees, and shall provide for the use of any design, device, material or process covered by letters patent or copyright by suitable legal agreement with the Patentee or owner thereof. Without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor shall defend all suits or claims for infringement of any patent or copyrights and shall indemnify and r save the Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof, except that Owner shall defend all such suits and claims and shall be responsible for all such loss when a particular design, device, material or process or the product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is specified or required in these contract documents by Owner; provided, however, if choice of alternate design, device, material r or process is allowed to the Contractor, then Contractor shall indemnify and save Owner, and all of its officers, agents and employees harmless from any loss on account thereof. Notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, if the material or process specified or required by Owner and/or this contract is an infringement, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless it gives written notice of such infringement to the Owner's Representative prior to bidding. "� 13 32. LAWS AND ORDINANCES The Contractor shall at all times observe and comply with all federal, state and local laws, ordinances and regulations, which in any manner affect the contract or the work, and without limiting, in any way, manner or form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner, and all of its officers, agents, and employees against any claims arising from the violation of any such laws, ordinances, and regulations, whether by the Contractor, its employees, or subcontractors. If the Contractor observes that the plans and specifications are at variance therewith, he shall notify the Owner's Representative in writing prior to bidding and any necessary changes shall be adjusted as provided in the contract for changes in the work. In the absence of timely written notification to Owner's Representative of such variance or variances within said time, any objection and/or assertion that the plans and specifications are at variance with any federal, state or local laws, ordinances or regulations shall be deemed waived. If the Contractor, its employees or subcontractors perform any work contrary to such laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, and without such notice to the Owner's Representative, Contractor shall bear all costs arising therefrom. The Owner is a municipal corporation of the State of Texas and the law from which it derives its powers, insofar as the same regulates the objects for which, or the manner in which, or the conditions under which the Owner may enter into contracts, shall be controlling, and shall be considered as part of this contract to the same effect as though embodied herein. 33. SUBCONTRACTING The Contractor agrees that it will retain personal control and will give its personal attention to the fulfillment of this contract. The Contractor further agrees that subletting of any portion or feature of the work, or materials required in the performance of this contract, shall not relieve the Contractor from its full obligations to the Owner, as _ provided by the contract documents. 34. TIME FOR SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES It is hereby understood and mutually agreed by and between the Contractor and the Owner, that the date of beginning and time for completion as specified in the contract documents, of work to be done hereunder are essential conditions of this contract; and it is further mutually understood and agreed that the work embraced in this contract shall be commenced as provided in the contract documents. If the Contractor should neglect, fail, or refuse to substantially complete the work within the time herein specified, then the Contractor does hereby agree as part of the consideration for the awarding of this contract, the Owner may withhold permanently from Contractor's total compensation, the sum of $300 (FIVE HUNDRED DOLLARS) PER DAY, not as a penalty, but as liquidated damages for the breach of the contract as herein set forth for each and every working day that the Contractor shall be in default after the time stipulated for substantially completing the work. It is expressly understood and agreed, by and between Contractor and the Owner, that the time for the substantial completion of the work described herein is reasonable time for the completion of the same, taking into consideration the average climatic range and conditions and usual industrial conditions prevailing in this locality. The amount is fixed and agreed upon by and between the Contractor and the Owner because the actual damages the Owner would sustain in such event would be difficult and/or impossible to estimate, however, the amount agreed upon herein is a reasonable forecast of the amount necessary to render just compensation to Owner, and is expressly agreed to be not disproportionate to actual damages as measured at time of breach. IT IS FURTHER AGREED AND UNDERSTOOD BETWEEN THE CONTRACTOR AND OWNER THAT TIME IS OF THE ESSENCE OF THIS CONTRACT. L 14 35. TIME AND ORDER OF COMPLETION It is the meaning and intent of this contract, unless otherwise herein specifically provided, that the Contractor shall be allowed to prosecute its work at such time and sessions, in such order of precedence, and in such manner as shall be most conductive to economy of construction; provided, however, that the order and time of prosecution shall be such that the work shall be substantially completed as a whole and in part, in accordance with this contract, the plans and specifications, and within the time of completion designated in the bid; provided, also, that when the Owner is having other work done, either by contract or by its own force, the Owner's Representative may direct the time and manner of constructing work done under this contract so that conflicts will be avoided and the construction of the various works being done for the Owner shall be harmonized. The Contractor shall submit, at such times as may reasonably be requested by the Owner's Representative, �» schedules which shall show the order in which the Contractor intends to carry on the work, with dates at which the E Contractor will start the several parts of the work and estimated dates of completion of the several parts. 36. TIME OF PERFORMANCE The Contractor agrees that it has submitted its bid in full recognition of the time required for the completion of this 9 9 q P r project, taking into consideration the average climatic range and industrial conditions prevailing in this locality, and has considered the liquidated damage provisions of paragraph 34 hereinabove set forth and expressly agrees that it shall not be entitled to, nor will it request, an extension of time on this contract, except when its work has been delayed by an act or neglect of the Owner, Owner's Representative, employees of the Owner or other contractors r employed by the Owner, or by changes ordered in the work, or by strike, walkouts, acts of God or the public enemy, fire or flood. Any request for extension shall be in writing with the written request for same setting forth all justifications, in detail, for the request, and submitted to Owner's Representative within twenty (20) calendar days of the occurrence of the event causing said delay. A failure by Owner's Representative to affirmatively grant the extension no later than twenty (20) calendar days of written submission by Contractor shall be deemed a denial, and final. Further, in the absence of timely written notification of such delay and request for extension, as provided herein, any request for extension by Contractor shall be deemed waived. f 37. HINDRANCE AND DELAYS In executing the contract, the Contractor agrees that in undertaking to complete the work within the time herein fixed, Contractor has taken into consideration and made allowances for all hindrances and delays incident to such i f work, whether growing out of delays due to unusual and unanticipated circumstances, difficulties or delays in securing material or workmen, or any other cause or occurrence. No charge shall be made by the Contractor for /, hindrance or delays from any cause during the progress of any part of the work embraced in this contract except where the work is stopped by order of the Owner or Owner's Representative for the Owner's convenience, in which event, such expense as in the sole judgment of the Owner's Representative that is caused by such stoppage shall be paid by Owner to Contractor. 38. QUANTITIES AND MEASUREMENTS r No extra or customary measurements of any kind will be allowed, but the actual measured or computed length, area, solid contents, number and weight only shall be considered, unless otherwise specifically provided. In the event this contract is let on a unit price basis, then Owner and Contractor agree that this contract, including the specifications, plans and other contract documents are intended to show clearly all work to be done and material i, to be furnished hereunder. Where the estimated quantities are shown, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimates, for the various classes of work to be done and material to be furnished under this contract, they are approximate and are to be used only as a basis for estimating the probable cost of the work and for comparing their bids offered for the work. In the event the amount of work to be done and materials to be furnished are expressly stated to be estimated, and only when same are expressly stated to be estimated, it is understood and t agreed that the actual amount of work to be done and the materials to be furnished under this contract may differ somewhat from these estimates, and that where the basis for payment under this contract is the unit price method, payment shall be for the actual amount of work done and materials furnished on the project. 15 s 39. PROTECTION OF ADJOINING PROPERTY The Contractor shall take proper means to protect the adjacent or adjoining property or properties in any way -- encountered, which may be injured or seriously affected by any process of construction to be undertaken under this agreement, from any damage or injury by reason of said process of construction; and Contractor shall be liable for any and all claims for such damage on account of his failure to fully protect all adjacent property. Without limiting, in any way, manner and form, the indemnity provided by Contractor in paragraph 27 hereof, the Contractor agrees to indemnify, save and hold harmless the Owner, and any of its officers, agents and employees, against any and all claims or damages due to any injury to any adjacent or adjoining property, related to, arising from or growing out of the performance of this contract. 40. PRICE FOR WORK In consideration of the furnishing of all necessary labor, equipment and material and the completion of all work by the Contractor, and on the delivery of all materials embraced in this contract in full conformity with the specifications and stipulations herein contained, the Owner agrees to pay the Contractor the price set forth in the bid proposal attached hereto, which has been made a part of this contract, and the Contractor hereby agrees to receive such price in full for furnishing all materials and all labor required for the aforesaid work, also, for all expenses incurred by Contractor and for well and truly performing the same and the whole thereof in the manner and according to this agreement, the attached specifications, plans, contract documents and requirements of Owner's Representative. " 41. PAYMENTS No payments made or certificates given shall be considered as conclusive evidence of the performance of the contract, either wholly or in part, nor shall any certificate or payment be considered as acceptance of defective work. Contractor shall at any time requested during the progress of the work furnish the Owner or Owner's Representative with a verifying certificate showing the Contractor's total outstanding indebtedness in connection with the work. Before final payment is made, Contractor shall satisfy Owner, by affidavit or otherwise, that there are no outstanding liens against Owner's premises by reason of any work under the contract. Acceptance by Contractor of final payment of the contract price shall constitute a waiver of all claims against Owner, Owner's -� agents and employees, which have not theretofore been timely filed as provided in this contract. 42. PARTIAL PAYMENTS On or before the tenth day of each month, the Contractor shall submit to Owner's Representative an application for partial payment or, if the Contractor does not submit such application, the Owner's Representative shall determine the amount to be partially paid. Owner's Representative shall review said application for partial payment if submitted, and the progress of the work made by the Contractor and if found to be in order, shall prepare a certificate for partial payment showing as completely as practical the total value of the work done by the Contractor up to and including the last day of the preceding month. The determination of the partial payment by the Owner's Representative shall be in accordance with Paragraph 14 hereof. The Owner shall then pay the Contractor on or before the fifteenth day of the current month the total amount of the Owner's Representative's Certificate of Partial Payment, less 5% of the amount thereof, which 5% shall be retained until final payment, and further, less all previous payments and all further sums that may be retained by Owner under the terms of the contract documents. Any partial payment made hereunder shall not constitute a waiver by the Owner of any and all other rights to enforce the express terms of the contract documents, and all remedies provided therein, as to any and all work performed, to be performed and/or materials delivered hereunder, including, but limited to, work to which said partial payment is attributable. 16 r L 43. SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative written notice of substantial completion. Within thirty-one (31) working days after the Contractor has given the Owner's Representative written notice that the work has been substantially completed, the Owner's Representative and/or the Owner shall inspect the work and within said time, if the work be found to be substantially completed in accordance with the contract documents, the Owner's Representative shall issue to the Owner and Contractor a certificate of substantial completion. Notwithstanding the issuance of a certificate of substantial completion, Contractor shall proceed with diligence to finally complete the work within the time provided in this contract. 44. FINAL COMPLETION AND PAYMENT The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner's Representative of final completion. Upon written notice of final completion, the Owner's Representative shall proceed to make final measurement to determine whether final completion has occurred. If the Owner's Representative determines final completion has occurred, Owner's r` Representative shall so certify to the Owner. Upon certification by Owner's Representative of final completion, j Owner shall pay to the Contractor on or before the 31 st working day after the date of certification of final completion, the balance due Contractor under -the terms of this agreement. Neither the certification of final completion nor the final payment, nor any provisions in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of the obligation for fulfillment of any warranty which may be required in the contract documents and/or any warranty or warranties implied by law or otherwise. 45. CORRECTION OF WORK Contractor shall promptly remove from Owner's premises all materials condemned by the Owner's Representative r on account of failure to conform to the contract documents, whether actually incorporated in the work or not, and Contractor shall at its own expense promptly replace such condemned materials with other materials conforming to the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall also bear the expense of restoring all work of other contractors damaged by any such removal or replacement. If Contractor does not remove and replace any such condemned work within a reasonable time after a written notice by the Owner or the Owner's Representative, Owner may remove and replace it at Contractor's expense. Neither the final payment, nor certification of final completion or substantial completion, nor any provision in the contract documents shall relieve the Contractor of responsibility for faulty materials or workmanship, and Contractor shall remedy any defects due thereto and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom, which shall appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of certification of final completion by Owner's roll, Representative. k 9 46. PAYMENT WITHHELD The Owner or Owner's Representative may, on account of subsequently discovered evidence, withhold or nullify the whole or part of any certification to such extent as may be necessary to protect itself from loss on account of: (a) Defective work not remedied and/or work not performed. (b) Claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating possible filing of claims. (c) Failure of the Contractor to make payments promptly to subcontractors or for materials or labor. (d) Damage to another contractor. When the above grounds are removed, or the Contractor provides a surety bond satisfactory to the Owner, in the amount withheld, payment shall be made for amounts withheld because of them. 17 47. CLAIM OR DISPUTE It is further agreed by both parties hereto that all questions of dispute or adjustment presented by the Contractor shall be in writing and filed with the Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days after the Owner's Representative has given any direction, order or instruction to which the Contractor desires to take exception. Timely written notice of dispute as provided in this contract of any decision by Owner's Representative or Owner shall be a condition precedent to the bringing and/or assertion of any action or claim by Contractor of any right under this Contract. If the matters set forth in the notice of dispute are not granted or otherwise responded to by Owner's Representative within fifteen (15) calendar days of receipt of notice of dispute by Owner's Representative, said objections shall be deemed denied. Any decision by the Owner's Representative, or deemed denial by the Owner's Representative, shall be final and conclusive in the absence of fraud. It is further agreed that the acceptance by the Contractor of the final payment shall be a bar to any and all claims of the Contractor, and constitute a waiver of the right to assert any claim against Owner, Owner's agents and employees and Owner's Representative, by Contractor. 48. NON-COMPLIANCE AND/OR ABANDONMENT BY CONTRACTOR In case the Contractor should (1) abandon and fail or refuse to resume work within fifteen (15) calendar days after written notification from the Owner or the Owner's Representative, or (2) if the Contractor fails to comply with the written orders of the Owner's Representative, when such orders are consistent with this contract, then the Surety on the bond shall be notified in writing and directed to complete the work and a copy of said notice shall be delivered to the Contractor. In the event a bond is not required by law, or otherwise obtained by the Contractor, no - further notice of such non-compliance to Contractor shall be required. After receiving said notice of abandonment or non-compliance , the Contractor shall not remove from the work any _ machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies then on the job, but the same, together with any materials and equipment under the contract for work, may be held for use on the work by the Owner or the Surety of the Contractor, or another contractor, in completion of the work; and the Contractor shall not receive any rental or credit therefore (except when used in connection with Extra Work, where credit shall be allowed as provided for under paragraph 24 of this contract); it being understood that the use of such equipment and materials will ultimately reduce the cost to complete the work and be reflected in the final settlement. In the event the Contractor, or Surety, whichever is applicable, should fail to commence compliance with the notice hereinbefore provided within ten (10) calendar days after service of such notice, and/or shall fail to proceed with diligence to complete the project as contemplated and in compliance with all terms and provisions of the contract documents, then the Owner may exercise any and all remedies available to it pursuant to law, contract, equity or otherwise, including, but not limited to, providing for completion of the work in either of the following elective ,-.. manners: (a) The Owner may employ such force of men and use of machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies as said Owner may deem necessary to complete the work and charge the expense of such labor, machinery, equipment, tools, materials and supplies to said Contractor, and the expense so charged shall be deducted and paid by the Owner out of such moneys as may be due, or that may thereafter at any time become due to the Contractor under and by virtue of this Agreement. In case such expense is less than _ the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by the Contractor, then said Contractor shall receive the difference. In case such expense is greater than the sum which would have been payable under this contract, if the same had been completed by said Contractor, then the Contractor and/or its Surety shall pay the amount of such excess to the Owner; or (b) The Owner, under sealed bids, after notice published as required by law, at least twice in a newspaper - having a general circulation in the County of location of the work, may let the contract for the completion of the work under substantially the same terms and conditions which are provided in this contract. In case of any increase in cost to the Owner under the new contract as compared to what would have been the cost under this contract, such increase shall be charged to the Contractor and the Surety shall be and remain bound therefore. Should the cost to complete any such new contract prove to be less than that which would have been the cost to complete the work under this contract, the Contractor or his Surety shall be credited therewith. 18 '— In the event the Owner's Representative elects to complete the work, as described above, when the work shall have been finally completed, the Contractor and his Surety shall be so notified and certification of completion as r provided in paragraph 44 hereinabove set forth, shall be issued. A complete itemized statement of the contract accounts, certified to by Owner's Representative as being correct shall then be prepared and delivered to Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, whereon the Contractor or his Surety, or the Owner as the case may be, shall pay the balance due as reflected by said statement within 30 days after the date of certification of completion. In the event the statement of accounts shows that the cost to complete the work is less than that which would have been the cost to the Owner had the work been completed by the Contractor under the terms of this contract, �•- or when the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, shall pay the balance shown to be due by them to the Owner, then all machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies left on the site of the work shall be turned over to the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable. Should the cost to complete the work exceed the contract price, and the Contractor and/or his Surety, if applicable, fail to pay the amount due the Owner within the time designated hereinabove, and there remains any machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies on the site of i the work, notice thereof, together with an itemized list of such equipment and materials shall be mailed to the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, at the respective addresses designated in this contract; provided, however, that actual written notice given in any manner will satisfy this condition. After mailing, or other giving of such notice, such property shall be held at the risk of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable, subject only to the duty of the Owner to exercise ordinary care to protect such property. After fifteen (15) calendar days from the date of said notice the Owner may sell such machinery, equipment, tools, materials or supplies and apply the net r sum derived from such sale to the credit of the Contractor and his Surety, if applicable. Such sale may be made at either public or private sale, with or without notice, as the Owner may elect. The Owner shall release any machinery, equipment, tools, materials, or supplies which remain on the jobsite and belong to persons other than ,..� the Contractor or his Surety, if applicable, to their proper owners. r The remedies provided to Owner by law, equity, contract, or otherwise, shall be cumulative, to the extent permitted by law. It is expressly agreed and understood that the exercise by Owner of the remedies provided in this paragraph shall not constitute an election of remedies on the part of Owner, and Owner, irrespective of its exercise of remedies hereunder, shall be entitled to exercise concurrently or otherwise, any and all other remedies available to it, by law, equity, contract or otherwise, including but not limited to, liquidated damages, as provided in paragraph 34, hereinabove set forth. 49. LIMITATION ON CONTRACTOR'S REMEDY The remedies of Contractor hereunder shall be limited to, and Owner shall be liable only for, work actually performed by Contractor and/or its subcontractors as set forth in the contract documents, and Owner shall not be liable for any consequential, punitive or indirect loss or damage that Contractor may suffer in connection with the project which is the subject matter of this contract. 50. BONDS The successful bidder will be required to furnish a performance bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $100,000 and the successful bidder will be required to furnish a payment bond in accordance with Chapter 2253, Government Code, in the amount of 100% of the total contract price in the event that said contract price exceeds $25,000. All bonds, if required, shall be submitted on forms supplied by the Owner, and executed by an approved Surety Company authorized to do business in the State of Texas. It is further agreed that this contract shall not be in effect until such bonds are so furnished. 7 19 51. SPECIAL CONDITIONS In the event special conditions are contained herein as part of the contract documents and said special conditions conflict with any of the general conditions contained in this contract, then in such event the special conditions shall control. 52. LOSS OR EXPENSE DUE TO UNUSUAL OR UNANTICIPATED CIRCUMSTANCES Unless otherwise specified herein, all loss, expense or damage to the Contractor arising out of the nature of the work to be done, or from the action of the elements, or from any unforeseen circumstance or from unusual obstructions or difficulties, naturally occurring, man made or otherwise, which may be encountered in the prosecution of the work, shall be sustained and borne by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. 53. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR Contractor is, and shall remain, an independent contractor with full, complete and exclusive power and authority to direct, supervise, and control its own employees and to determine the method of the performance of the work covered hereby. The fact that the Owner or Owner's Representative shall have the right to observe Contractor's work during Contractor's performance and to carry out the other prerogatives which are expressly reserved to and vested in the Owner or Owner's Representative hereunder, is not intended to and shall not at any time change or effect the status of the Contractor as an independent contractor with respect to either the Owner or Owner's Representative or to the Contractor's own employees or to any other person, firm, or corporation. 54. CLEANING UP The Contractor shall at all times keep the premises free from accumulation of debris caused by the work, and at the completion of the work Contractor shall remove all such debris and also its tools, scaffolding, and surplus materials and shall leave the work room clean or its equivalent. The work shall be left in good order and condition. In case of dispute Owner may remove the debris and charge the cost to the Contractor. 55. HAZARDOUS SUBSTANCES AND ASBESTOS Hazardous Substances (herein so called), as defined in the Comprehensive Environmental Response, Compensation, and Liability Act (42 U.S.C.S. §9601(14)) and the regulations promulgated thereunder, as same may be amended from time to time, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, in any form, shall not (i) be utilized, in any way, manner or form, in the construction of, or incorporation into, the - Project; or (ii) be brought upon, placed, or located, by any party, on the Project site, or any other property of the City, without the written consent of the Owner's Representative. If Contractor believes that the utilization of a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos is necessary in the construction of the Project, or that it is necessary to place and/or otherwise locate upon the site of the Project or other property of the City, a Hazardous Substance, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos, Contractor shall notify the Owner's Representative, and request consent therefrom, at least twenty (20) days prior to such action. Owner's Representative may grant or deny the request of Contractor and provide whatever requirements such consent, if granted, is conditioned upon, in its sole and absolute discretion. If -. the request of Contractor is not granted, or otherwise not responded to, by Owner's Representative within five (5) days of the receipt of said request, said request shall be deemed to be denied. In the event Owner's Representative shall consent to the request of Contractor, Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that all personnel involved in the Project are (i) trained for the level of expertise required for proper performance of the actions contemplated by this Contract and, in particular, in all aspects of handling, storage, disposal and exposure of Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or j asbestos; and (ii) are provided and utilize all protective equipment, including without limitation, personal protective gear, necessary to provide protection from exposure to Hazardous Substances, hydrocarbons or other petroleum products or byproducts and/or asbestos. 20 No Text hCJU J.UL.L0L1 ,N,J . UL UL �.. Item No. 39 jj RESOLUTION April 8, 1999 P" I WHEREAS, the City Council has heretofore established the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for each craft or type of workmen or mechanics needed to execute public works contracts for the City of Lubbock in accordance with the provisions of Vernon's Ann. Civ. Art. 5159a; and WHEREAS, such wage rates were established by Resolution No. 719 enacted February 12, 1981, updated by Resolution No. 1590 enacted February 23, 1984. further updated by Resolution No. 2502 enacted January 8, 1987, further updated by Resolution No. 5721 enacted March 14, 1996, and amended by Resolution No. 6138 enacted December 16, 1998; and i WHEREAS, such rates need to be updated at the present time in order to reflect the current prevailing rate of per diem wages; NOW THEREFORE: BE IT RESOLVED BY THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF LUBBOCK: f THAT the general prevailing rate of per diem wages for public works contracts shall be as set forth in the following named exhibits, which exhibits shall be attached hereto and made a part hereof for all intents and purposes: �I Exhibit A: Building Construction Trades Exhibit B: Paving and Highway Construction Exhibit C: Overtime Rate Exhibit D: Legal Holiday Rate Such wage rates are hereby found and declared to be the general prevailing rate of per diem wages in all localities where public works are undertaken on behalf of the City of Lubbock and such wage rates shall be included in all public works contracts as provided b-• law. Passed by the City Council this 8th day of April- 9 99. L N WINDY-SUT014, MAYOR A EST: , (446 I_IW r , Kayt, ijl)arnell, City Secretary APPROVED AS TO CONTENT: \4an An ews, Managing Director of Human Resources APPROVED AS TO FORM: Ir Amy L s, A istant City Attorney w p ccdocsKubworks.rcs j March 25, 1999 City of Lubbock Building Construction Trades Prevailing Rates Craft Acoustical Ceiling Installer Air Conditioner Installer Air Conditioner Installer -Helper Asbestos Worker Asbestos Supervisor Bricklayer Bricklayer -Helper Carpenter Carpenter -Helper Cement Finisher Drywall Hanger Electrician Electrician -Helper Equipment Operator -Heavy Equipment Operator -Light Floor Installer Glazier Insulator-Piping/Boder Insulator -Helper Iron Worker Laborer -General Mortar Mixer Painter Plumber Plumber -Helper Roofer Roofer -Helper Sheet Metal Worker Sheet Metal Worker -Helper Welder -Certified Hourly Rate 11.50 12.50 6.25 9.00 12.50 12.50 7.00 11.00 7.00 8.00 11.00 13.75 7.00 9.50 9.50 9.50 10.50 11.50 7.00 11.00 6.00 6.00 9.50 12.50 7.00 9.00 7.00 10.00 7.00 11.00 EXHIBIT C Prevailing Wage Rates Overtime Rate The rate for overtime (in excess of forty hours per week) shall be as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. EXHIBIT D C^ Prevailing Wage Rates Y Legal Holiday Rate The rate for legal holidays shall be.as required by the Fair Labor Standards Act. r I I. r b t I^' f. 4� f P EXHMIT B Paving and Highway Construction Prevailing Wage Rates Craft Asphalt Heaterman Asphalt Shoveler Concrete Finisher Concrete Finisher -Helper Electrician Flagger Form Setter Form Setter -Helper Laborer -General Laborer -Utility Mechanic Mechanic -Helper Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Paving Machine Bulldozer Concrete Paving Machine Front End Loader Heavy Equipment Operator Light Equipment Operator Motor Grader Operator Roller Scraper Tractor Truck Driver -Light Truck Driver -Heavy Hourly Rate 9.00 6.00 8.00 7.00 12.00 6.00 7.00 6.25 6.00 6.75 8.00 7.00 7.75 F.00 7.75 7.?5 8.00 7.25 9.50 6.75 7.25 7.25 6.50 7.00 No Text CITY OF LUBBOCK POLICE SQUARE RENOVATION PHASE I - A CAPITAL PROJECT # 9616 APRIL 1999 Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners DIVISIONS 1 THROUGH 14 AND 16 FANNING. FANNING & ASSOCIATES CONSULTING ENGINEMS 2555 741h STREET LUBBOCK. TEXAS 79423 (806) 745-2533 DIVISION 15 CITY OF LUBBOCK r POLICE SQUARE RENOVATION PHASE I — A CAPITAL PROJECT # 9616 r^ ' APRIL 1999 C ++•( D AI ff� eel TROYr i ti V � {�..{f..{f•{ff 4 f{R.{.! f e34r•� vlsuo•• ` ................faeeauw Parkhill, Smith & Cooper, Inc. ' a" f '�¢ `•.�JSTF�:p•' ®` Engineers ■ Architects ■ Planners t:. U c ' L DIVISIONS 1 THROUGH 14 AND 16 �'� `�'� ► ���%9 s 3 v �X�• FANNING, FANNING 6 ASSOCIATES ,. y. r }} �a {fr•�•t'� CONSULTING ENGINEERS Fy"T j,.• 2555 74th STREET LUBSOCK, TEXAS 79423 (806) 745-2533j.,a DIVISION 15/�i/!{�1 I I r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION PARKHILL, SMITH & COOPER ENGINEERS ■ ARCHITECTS ■ PLANNERS LUBBOCK, TEXAS TABLE OF CONTENTS BIDDING REQUIREMENTS, CONTRACT FORMS AND CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENT NOTICE TO BIDDERS GENERAL INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS BID SUBMITTAL - BID FOR LUMP SUM CONTRACTS PAYMENT BOND PERFORMANCE BOND CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE CONTRACT GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE AGREEMENT CURRENT WAGE DETERMINATIONS DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SECTION 01010 SECTION 01019 SECTION 01039 SECTION 01090 SECTION 01300 SECTION 01410 SECTION 01500 SECTION 01600 SECTION 01650 SECTION 01700 DIVISION 2 SITE WORK SECTION 02072 DIVISION 3 CONCRETE NOT USED S; DIVISION 4 MASONRY (1; NOT USED DIVISION 5 METAL NOT USED 03879198 04/99 9616 PAGES SUMMARY OF WORK .................................... 2 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS ............................. 2 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS ............................ 4 REFERENCE STANDARDS ................................. 7 SUBMITTALS ......................................... 3 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES .......................... 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES ................................. 4 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT ............................... 2 STARTING OF SYSTEMS ................................. 2 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT .................................. 3 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING ....................... 3 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION DIVISION 6 WOOD AND PLASTICS a SECTION 06112 ROUGH CARPENTRY ..................................... 4 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK .................................... 5 DIVISION 7 THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS ........................................ 6 DIVISION 8 DOORS AND WINDOWS SECTION 08110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES ............................... 4 SECTION 08211 FLUSH WOOD DOORS .................................... 5 SECTION 08700 HARDWARE .......................................... 17 r.. SECTION 08800 GLAZING ............................................. 5 DIVISION 9 FINISHES r" SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS ................................ 7 i SECTION 09510 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS ................................... 4 SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE ................................... 4 SECTION 09680 CARPET .............................................. 4 SECTION 09900 PAINTING ........................................... 11 DIVISION 10 SPECIALITIES SECTION 10260 CORNER GUARDS ....................................... 3 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT NOT USED DIVISION 12 FURNISHINGS ' �iF-c AR�C,; NOT USEDct �: z� w: c;,;�*•; DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION: y S ` 0 NOT USED �rLE v DIVISION 14 CONVEYING SYSTEMS �. X )d t ' NOT USED ~V you ( g d ! y DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 3 !t Ail -Joe( •�wg yt -`� SECTION 15000 GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL ........ 13 SECTION 15300 PIPING AND ACCESSORIES ................................. 8 SECTION 15310 PLUMBING SYSTEMS ..................................... 1 SECTION 15330 CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS ...................... 2 SECTION 15390 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION .............................. 4 03879198 PAGE - 2 04/99 6 - POLICE SQUARE a SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION e F 9616 SECTION 15400 AIR DISTRIBUTION ....................................... 8 SECTION 15500 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS ................................. 3 SECTION 15600 INSULATION ............................................ 3 SECTION 15700 EQUIPMENT ........................................... 10 SECTION 15800 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS ...... 2 SECTION 15900 TEMPERATURE REGULATION ................................ 5 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL SECTION 16000 SECTION 16111 SECTION 16123 SECTION 16130 SECTION 16140 SECTION 16170 SECTION 16190 SECTION 16195 SECTION 16441 SECTION 16470 SECTION 16481 SECTION 16510 SECTION 16721 .a V � A Lp co BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS ............................... 3 CONDUIT.............................................. 4 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE ................................. 4 BOXES................................................ 3 WIRING DEVICES ........................................ 3 GROUNDING AND BONDING ................................. 2 SUPPORTING DEVICES .................................... 2 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION ................................ 2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES ..................................... 2 PANELBOARDS.......................................... 3 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS ............................ 3 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES .................................... 3 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS .................................... 4 3 y eye. -T<< v/ , I 03879198 PAGE — 3 04/99 4 POLICE SQUARE 9616 CSECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. +� 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES a A. Work covered by Contract Documents. B. Work by Owner. +. C. Owner furnished products. D. Contractor use of site. E. Future work. F. Work Sequence. I G. Owner occupancy. 1 1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. Location: 916 Texas Avenue, Lubbock, Texas. B. Verbal Summary: Without force or effect on requirements of the Contract Documents a brief description of the Project is as follows: The relocation of the switchboard operators office and the Traffic Engineering Department from the ground floor to the second floor. r• A portion of the existing Traffic Engineering computer room is to remain on the ground floor. 1.4 WORK BY OWNER A. The Owner will award contracts which will commence at an undetermined time after the start of construction on this project. Work under these contracts will include: 1. Telephone System: The Owner will contract for furnishing and installing of a telephone network system. 2. Installation of computer cabling. ,.. B. Items noted 'NIC' (Not in Contract), will be furnished and installed by Owner as required s to meet the occupancy schedule. 1.5 OWNER FURNISHED PRODUCTS A. Products furnished to the site and paid for by Owner: 1. Residential appliances not scheduled nor specified to be furnished as part of this project. B. Owner's Responsibilities: 1. Arrange for and deliver Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples, to Contractor. 2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site. 3. On delivery, inspect products jointly with Contractor. e 03879198 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 4. Submit claims for transportation damage and replace damaged, defective, or deficient items. 5. Arrange for manufacturers' warranties, inspections and service. C. Contractor's Responsibilities: 1. Review Owner reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. 2. Receive and unload products at site; inspect for completeness or damage, jointly with Owner. 3. Handle, store, install and finish products. 4. Repair or replace items damaged after receipt. -- 1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF SITE A. Limit use of site to allow: 1. Work by Others and Work by Owner. B. Construction Operations: Limited to areas indicated on drawings to be constructed. C. The facility will be occupied by the Owner throughout construction. 1.7 WORK SEQUENCE A. During the construction period, coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner and Architect: Normal hours of operation are 8:00 am to 5:00 pm, Monday through Friday. However, there is staff in the facility 24 hours/day, 7 days/week. A 24 _ hour notice to Owner must be given prior to working before or after normal hours of operation. Contractor will not be given key to facility. 1.8 OWNER OCCUPANCY A. Cooperate with Owner to minimize conflict, and to facilitate Owner's operations. B. Schedule the Work to accommodate this requirement. _ PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879198 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010 - 2 04/99 7 r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 01019 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS s. . A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Schedule of Values. B. Application for Payment. C. Change Procedures. D. Measurement and payment - unit prices. E. Alternates. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Schedule of Values. B. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product substitutions. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES A. Submit typed schedule on AIA Form G703 Application and Certificate for Payment Continuation Sheet. B. Submit Schedule of Values in duplicate within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. C. Format: Utilize the Table of Contents of this Specification. Identify each line item with number and title of the major specification Section. Identify site mobilization, bonds and insurance. D. Include within each line item, a directly proportional amount of Contractor's overhead and profit. E. Revise schedule to list approved Change Orders, with each Application For Payment. 1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT A. Submit three copies of each application on AIA Form G702 - Application and Certificate for Payment and AIA G703 - Continuation Sheet. B. Content and Format: Utilize Schedule of Values for listing items in Application for Payment. C. Payment Period: As defined in Owner -Contractor agreement. D. Include one copy of waiver of liens from each subcontractor. 1.6 CHANGE PROCEDURES A. The Architect will advise of minor changes in the Work not involving an adjustment to Contract Sum/Price or Contract Time as described in the General Conditions of the Agreement. By issuing Architect's Supplemental Instruction form. B. The Architect may issue a Construction Change Request which includes a detailed description of a proposed change with supplementary or revised Drawings and specifications and a 03879198 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019 - 1 04/99 i POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 change in Contract Time for executing the change. Contractor will prepare and submit an estimate within 7 days. C. The Contractor may propose a change by submitting request for change to the Architect, describing the proposed change and its full effect on the Work. Include a statement describing the reason for the change, and the effect on the Contract Sum/Price and Contract Time with full documentation and a statement describing the effect on Work by separate or other contractors. Document any requested substitutions in accordance with Section 01600. D. Cost Determination: As defined in Article 24 - EXTRA WORK of the General Conditions of the Agreement. E. Change Order Forms: to be provided by City. F. Execution of Change Orders: Owner will issue Change Orders for signatures of parties as provided in the Conditions of the Contract. 1.7 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT - UNIT PRICES A. Authority: Measurement methods are delineated in the individual specification sections. B. Take measurements and compute quantities. The Architect will verify measurements and quantities. C. Unit Quantities: quantities and measurements indicated in the Bid Form are for contract purposes only. Actual quantities provided will determine payment. D. Payment Includes: Full compensation for required labor, Products, tools, equipment, plant, transportation, services and incidentals; erection, application or installation of an item of the Work; overhead and profit. E. Defect Assessment: Replace the Work, or portions of the Work, not conforming to specified requirements. If, in the opinion of the Architect, it is not practical to remove and replace the Work, the Architect will direct an appropriate remedy or adjust payment. F. Unit Price Schedule: As indicated in the Bid Submittal. 1.8 ALTERNATES A. Alternates quoted on Bid Forms will be reviewed and accepted or rejected at the Owner's option. Accepted Alternates will be identified in Owner -Contractor Agreement. B. Coordinate related work and modify surrounding work as required. C. Schedule of Alternates - None. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879198 CONTRACT CONSIDERATIONS 01019 - 2 04/99 r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 01039 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Coordination. B. Field engineering. C. Preconstruction meeting. D. Progress meetings. E. Preinstallation meetings. F. Cutting and patching. 1.3 COORDINATION A. Coordinate scheduling, submittals, and Work of the various Sections of the Project Manual to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of interdependent construction elements, with provisions for accommodating items installed later. B. Verify that utility requirements and characteristics of operating equipment are compatible with building utilities. Coordinate work of various Sections having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connecting to, and placing in service, such equipment. C. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work which are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduit, as closely as practicable; place runs parallel with line of building. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for maintenance, and for repairs. D. In finished areas, except as otherwise indicated, conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring within the construction. Coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements. E. Large Apparatus: Any large piece of apparatus which is to be installed in any space in the building, and which is too large to permit access through windows, doorways or shafts, shall be brought to the job by the Contractor involved and placed in the space before the enclosing structure is completed. F. Items which require electrical connections shall be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details G. Coordinate completion and clean up of Work of separate Sections in preparation for Substantial Completion. H. After Owner occupancy of premises, coordinate access to site for correction of defective Work and Work not in accordance with Contract Documents, to minimize disruption of Owner's activities. 03879198 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.4 PRECONSTRUCTION MEETING A. Owner will schedule a meeting after the contract has been signed by all parties. B. Attendance Required: Owner, Architect, Engineer, Contractor and major Subcontractors. C. Agenda: 1. Designation of personnel representing the parties in Contract and the Architect. 2. Procedures and processing of field decisions, submittals, substitutions, applications for payments, proposal request, Change Orders and Contract closeout procedures. 3. Scheduling. a. Use of premises by Owner and Contractor. b. Owner's requirements. C. Construction facilities and controls provided by Owner. d. Survey and building layout. e. Security and housekeeping procedures. f. Schedules. g. Procedures for testing. h. Procedures for maintaining record documents. i. Requirements for start-up of equipment. j. Inspection and acceptance of equipment put into service during construction period. k. Determine date of Notice to Proceed. The City will issue a N.T.P. D. Record minutes and distribute copies within five days after meeting to participants with two copies to Architect and those affected by decisions made. 1.5 PROGRESS MEETINGS A. Schedule and administer meetings throughout progress of the Work at minimum monthly weekly intervals. B. Architect will make arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for participants, preside at meetings. C. Attendance Required: Job superintendent, major Subcontractors and suppliers, Architect, Engineer as appropriate to agenda topics for each meeting. D. Agenda: 1 . Review minutes of previous meetings. 2. Review of Work progress. 3. Field observations, problems, and decisions. 4. Identification of problems which impede planned progress. 5. Review of submittals schedule and status of submittals. 6. Review of off -site fabrication and delivery schedules. 7. Maintenance of progress schedule. B. Corrective measures to regain projected schedules. 9. Planned progress during succeeding work period. 10. Coordination of projected progress. 11. Maintenance of quality and work standards. 12. Effect of proposed changes on progress schedule and coordination. 13. Other business relating to Work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within five days to Architect, participants, and those affected by decisions made. 03879198 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 2 04/99 r POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.6 PREINSTALLATION MEETING A. When required in individual specification Sections, convene a preinstallation meeting at work site prior to commencing work of the Section. �. B. Require attendance of parties directly affecting, or affected by, work of the specific Section. r C. Notify Architect four days in advance of meeting date. D. Prepare agenda and preside at meeting. 1. Review conditions of installation, preparation and installation procedures. 2. Review coordination with related work. E. Record minutes, and distribute copies within five days after meeting to participants, with four copies to Architect. i PART 2 PRODUCTS , 2.1 EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS AND COMPONENTS i A. Motors: Specific motor type is specified in individual specification sections. B. Wiring Terminations: Provide terminal lugs to match branch circuit conductor quantities, sizes, and materials indicated. Size terminal lugs to NFPA 70, include lugs for terminal box. C. Cord and Plug: Provide minimum 6 foot cord and plug including grounding connector for connection to electric wiring system. Cord of longer length is specified in individual ,., specification sections. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that existing site conditions and substrate surfaces are acceptable for subsequent Work. Beginning new Work means acceptance of existing conditions. B. Examine and verify specific conditions described in individual specification sections. C. Verify that utility services are available, of the correct characteristics, and in the correct location. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean substrate surfaces prior to applying next material or substance. B. Seal cracks or openings of substrate prior to applying next material or substance. C. Apply any manufacturer required or recommended substrate primer, sealer, or conditioner prior to applying any new material or substance in contact or bond. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING j A. Employ skilled and experienced installer to perform cutting and patching. B. Submit written request in advance of cutting or altering elements which affects: 1 . Structural integrity of element. 2. Integrity of weather -exposed or moisture -resistant elements. 3. Efficiency, maintenance, or safety of element. 4. Visual qualities of sight -exposed elements. 5. Work of Owner or separate contractor. C. Execute cutting, fitting, and patching, including excavation and fill, to complete Work, and to: 1. Fit the several parts together, to integrate with other Work. f 03879198 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 3 f.. 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 2. Uncover Work to install or correct ill-timed Work. 3. Remove and replace defective and non -conforming Work. 4. Remove samples of installed Work for testing. 5. Provide openings in elements of Work for penetrations of mechanical and electrical Work, D. Execute work by methods which will avoid damage to other Work, and provide proper surfaces to receive patching and finishing. E. Cut rigid materials using masonry saw or core drill. F. Restore Work with new products in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. G. Fit Work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit, and other penetrations through surfaces. H. Maintain integrity of wall, ceiling, or floor construction; completely seal voids. I. Refinish surfaces to match adjacent finishes. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection; for an assembly, refinish entire unit. J. Identify any hazardous condition exposed during the Work to the Architect for decision or remedy. END OF SECTION 03879198 COORDINATION AND MEETINGS 01039 - 4 04/99 r-� POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Quality assurance. B. Schedule of references. 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. For products or workmanship specified by association, trade, or other consensus standards, comply with requirements of the standard, except when more rigid requirements are specified or are required by applicable codes. B. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Contract Documents. C. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, request clarification from Architect before proceeding. D. The contractual relationship duties and responsibilities of the parties in Contract nor those of the Architect shall not be altered from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any reference document. 1.4 SCHEDULE OF REFERENCES AA Aluminum Association 818 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AABC Associated Air Balance Council 1000 Vermont Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials 444 North Capitol Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20001 ACI American Concrete Institute Box 19150 Reford Station Detroit, MI 48219 ADC Air Diffusion Council 230 North Michigan Avenue Chicago, IL 60601 03879198 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION '- AGA American Gas Association 1515 Wilson Blvd. -� Arlington, VA 22209 AGC Associated General Contractors of America _ 1957 E Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 Al Asphalt Institute '— Asphalt Institute Building College Park, MD 20740 AIA American Institute of Architects 1735 New York Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20006 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 400 North Michigan Avenue Eighth Floor Chicago, IL 60611 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute _ 1000 16th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 AMCA Air Movement and Control Association 30 West University Drive Arlington Heights, IL 60004 ANSI American National Standards Institute 1430 Broadway New York, NY 10018 , APA American Plywood Association Box 11700 Tacoma, WA 98411 ARI Air -Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute 1501 Wilson Boulevard -- Arlington, VA 22209 ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers 1791 Tullie Circle, N.E. Atlanta, GA 30329 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 ASPE American Society of Plumbing Engineers 15233 Ventura Blvd., Suite 811 Sherman Oaks, CA 91403 _ 03879198 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 2 04/99 .— POLICE SQUARE 9616 i SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION ASTM American Society for Testing and .Materials 1916 Race Street Philadelphia, PA 19103 AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute 2310 South Walter Reed Drive Arlington, VA 22206 AWPA American Wood -Preservers' Association 3246 Fall Creek Highway, Suite 1900 Grandbury, TX 76049-7979 { AWS American Welding Society 550 LeJeune Road, N.W. Miami, FL 33135 E, AWWA American Water Works Association 6666 West Quincy Avenue Denver, CO 80235 BHMA Builders' Hardware Manufacturer Association 60 East 42nd Street, Room 511 New York, NY 10165 BIA Brick Institute of America 11490 Commerce Park Drive Reston, VA 22091 f-' CDA Copper Development Association e 57th Floor, Chrysler Building 405 Lexington Avenue New York, NY 10174 CFR Code of Federal Regulations North Capitol Street between G & H Streets, NW r Washington, DC 20402 CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute r- 1 101 Connecticut Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission 1111 Eighteenth Street, NW Washington, DC 20207 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 933 Plum Grove Road Schaumburg, IL 60195 �- I DHI Door and Hardware Institute ' 7711 Old Springhouse Road McLean, VA 22102 03879198 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 3 �., i 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION DOT Department of Transportation 400 Seventh Street, SW -. Washington, DC 20590 EJCDC Engineers' Joint Contract Documents Committee _ American Consulting Engineers Council 1015 15th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association 25 North Broadway Tarrytown, NY 10591 ... EPA Environmental Protection Agency 401 M Street, SW _ Washington, DC 20460 FCC Federal Communications Commission 1919 M Street, NW — Washington, DC 20554 FGMA Flat Glass Marketing Association ,.. 3310 Harrison White Lakes Professional Building Topeka, KS 66611 FM Factory Mutual System 1 151 Boston -Providence Turnpike P.O. Box 688 -- Norwood, MA 02062 FS Federal Specification — General Services Administration Specifications and Consumer Information Distribution Section (WFSIS) Washington Navy Yard, Bldg. 197 Washington, DC 20407 GA Gypsum Association .- 810 First St. NE, Suite 510 Washington, DC 20002 HPMA Hardwood Plywood Manufacturers Association — 1825 Michael Faraday Drive P.O. Box 2789 HPW H.P. White Laboratory 3114 Scarboro Road Street, MD 21154 Reston, VA 22090-2789 03879198 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 4 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION ICBO International Conference of Building Officials 5360 S. Workman Mill Road Whittier, CA 90601 IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 IES Illumination Engineering Society of North America 345 East 47th Street New York, NY 10017 IMIAC International Masonry Industry All -Weather Council International Masonry Institute 815 15th Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20005 ISWA Insect Screen Weavers Association r P.O. Box 1018 Ossining NY 10562 MBMA Metal Building Manufacturer's Association 1300 Sumner Avenue Cleveland, OH 441 15-2851 MIL Military Specification 6 Naval Publications and Forms Center 5801 Tabor Avenue Philadelphia, PA 19120 ML/SFA Metal Lath/Steel Framing Association 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers 221 North LaSalle Street Chicago, IL 60601 NBS National Bureau of Standards 1 (U.S. Department of Commerce) Gaithersburg, MD 20234 NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association P.O. Box 781 Herndon, VA 22070 r I_ NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau 8224 Old Courthouse Road Vienna, VA 22180 NEC National Electrical Code (by NFPA) 03879198 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 5 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 7315 Wisconsin Avenue Bethesda, MD 20814 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 2101 'L' Street, N.W. Washington, DC 20037 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Battery March Park Quincy, MA 02269 NFoPA National Forest Products Association 1619 Massachusetts Avenue, N.W. Washington, DC 20036 NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association P.O. Box 34518 Memphis, TN 38135 NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association 8600 Bryn Mawr Avenue Chicago, IL 60631 NSF National Sanitation Foundation 3475 Plymouth Road P.O. Box 1468 Ann Arbor, MI 47106 NWWDA National Wood Window & Door Manufacturers Association 205 W. Touhy Avenue Park Ridge, IL 60068 OSHA Occupational Safety and Health Administration (U.S. Department of Labor) Government Printing Office Washington, D.C. 20402 PCA Portland Cement Association 5420 Old Orchard Road Skokie, IL 60077 PS Product Standard U. S. Department of Commerce Washington, DC 20203 RIS Redwood Inspection Service One Lombard Street San Francisco, CA 94111 03879198 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 6 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 r" j SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION RMA Rubber Manufacturer's Association 1400 K Street, N.W. Washington, D.C. 20005 SDI Steel Deck Institute P.O. Box 9506 Canton, OH 44711 S.D.I. Steel Door Institute g 712 Lakewood Center North 14600 Detroit Avenue r-. Cleveland, OH 44107 SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council Route 11, Industrial Park Cortland, NY 13045 SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 1 1 1 East Wacker Drive z Chicago, IL 60601 SJI Steel Joist Institute 1205 48th Avenue North, Suite A Myrtle Beach, SC 29577 SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association 8224 Old Court House Road Vienna, VA 22180 SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau 4709 Scenic Highway Pensacola, FL 32504-9094 r„ f SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council 4400 Fifth Avenue Pittsburgh, PA 15213 TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. Box 326 Princeton, NJ 08540 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. r 333 Pfingston Road Northbrook, IL 60062 WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau 6980 S.W. Varns Road Box 23145 �.. Portland, OR 97223 03879198 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 7 04199 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION WRI Wire Reinforcement Institute 8361 A Greensboro Drive McLean, VA 22102 WWPA Western Wood Products Association 1500 Yeon Building Portland, OR 97204 W.W.P.A.Woven Wire Products Association 2515 N. Nordica Avenue Chicago, IL 60635 PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879198 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 - 8 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 01300 SUBMITTALS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Submittal procedures. B. Construction progress schedules. C. Proposed products list. D. Shop drawings. E. Product data. F. Samples. G. Manufacturers' instructions. H. Manufacturers' certificates. I. Construction photographs. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01019 - Contract Considerations: Schedule of Values. B. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Test Reports. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Contract warranty, manufacturer's certificates and closeout submittals. 1.4 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. Transmit each submittal with Contractor's standard transmittal letter including Contractor's name, address and phone number. B. Sequentially number the transmittal forms. C. Identify Project, Contractor, Subcontractor or supplier; pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number(s), and specification Section number, as appropriate. D. Apply Contractor's stamp, signed or initialed certifying that review, verification of Products required, field dimensions, adjacent construction Work, and coordination of information, is in accordance with the requirements of the Work and Contract Documents. E. Schedule submittals to expedite the Project, and deliver to architect's at business address. Coordinate submission of related items. f F. For each submittal for review, allow 15 days excluding delivery time to and from the contractor. G. Identify variations from Contract Documents and Product or system limitations which may be detrimental to successful performance of the completed Work. H. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps. I. Revise and resubmit submittals as required, identify all changes made since previous �. submittal. J. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned parties. Instruct parties to promptly report any inability to comply with provisions. K. Submittals not requested will not be recognized or processed. 03879198 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.5 RESUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Revise initial submittal as required and resubmit to meet requirements as specified. B. Mark as RESUBMITTAL. C. Re -use original transmittal number and supplement with sequential alphabetical suffix for each re -submittal. 1,6 CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS SCHEDULES A. Submit initial progress schedule in duplicate for Architect review within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. B. Submit revised schedules with each Application for Payment, identifying changes since previous version. C. Submit a horizontal bar chart with separate line for each section of Work, identifying first work day of each week. _ D. Show complete sequence of construction by activity, identifying Work of separate stages and other logically grouped activities. Indicate the early and late start, early and late finish, float dates, and duration. E. Indicate estimated percentage of completion for each item of Work at each submission. F. Indicate submittal dates required for shop drawings, product data, samples, and product delivery dates, including those furnished by Owner. 1.7 PROPOSED PRODUCTS LIST A. Within 15 days after date of Notice to Proceed, submit complete list of major products proposed for use, with name of manufacturer, trade name, and model number of each product. B. For products specified only by reference standards, give manufacturer, trade name, model or catalog designation, and reference standards. 1.8 SHOP DRAWINGS A. For drawings larger than 11 x 17 inches, submit in the form of one reproducible transparency and two opaque reproduction. Two copies will be retained by Architect. B. For drawings 11 x 17 inches and smaller, submit three opaque reproductions. Two copies will be retained by Architect. C. Drawing size shall be minimum 8'/2 x 11 inches and maximum of 30 x 42 inches. D. Details shall be drawn to a minimum size of 1 % inches equal to 1 foot. E. After review and return of one reproducible copy to the Contractor, produce copies and distribute in accordance with SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES article above and for record document purposes described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.9 PRODUCT DATA A. Submit three copies, two will be retained by the Architect. B. Mark each copy to identify applicable products, models, options, and other data. Supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information unique to this Project. C. Include recommendations for application and use, and reference to compliance with specified standards of trade associations and testing agencies. 03879198 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 2 04/99 4 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION D. Include notation of special coordination requirements for interfacing with adjacent work. r E. After review and return of one reproducible copy to the Contractor, distribute in accordance with Article on Procedures above and provide copies for Record Documents described in Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. 1.10 SAMPLES A. Submit samples to illustrate functional and aesthetic characteristics of the Product, with integral parts and attachment devices. Coordinate sample submittals for interfacing work. B. Submit samples of finishes from the full range of manufacturers' standard colors or in custom colors, textures, and patterns, as specified and as scheduled for Architect's selection. C. Where variations in color, pattern or texture are inherent in the material or product, submit multiple samples to indicate the approximate range or variations. D. Include full Project information and identification of manufacturer, model number, type, style and color on each sample. E. Submit the number or samples specified in individual specification Sections; one of which will be retained by Architect. F. Reviewed samples which may remain as part of the Work are indicated in individual specification Sections. 1.11 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' printed instructions for delivery, storage, assembly, installation, start-up, adjusting, and finishing, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Identify conflicts between manufacturers' instructions and Contract Documents. C. Indicate special procedures, conditions requiring special attention and special environmental criteria required for application or installation. 1.12 MANUFACTURER'S CERTIFICATES A. When specified in individual specification Sections, submit manufacturers' certificate to Architect, in quantities specified for Product Data. B. Indicate material or product conforms to or exceeds specified requirements. Submit supporting reference data, affidavits, and certifications as appropriate. C. Certificates may be recent or previous test results on material or Product, but must be acceptable to Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION 03879198 SUBMITTALS 01300 - 3 r. 04/99 e r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 6 k SECTION 01410 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 9616 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS r A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Selection and payment. B. Contractor submittals. C. Laboratory responsibilities. D. Laboratory reports. E. Limits on testing laboratory authority. F. Contractor responsibilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Manufacturer's certificates. B. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems and Section 15600: Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing. C. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Project Record Documents. D. Individual Specification Sections: Inspections and tests required, and standards for testing. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI/ASTM E329 - Recommended Practice for Inspection and Testing Agencies for Concrete, Steel, and Bituminous Materials as Used in Construction. 1.5 SELECTION AND PAYMENT r A. Contractor shall employ and pay for services of an independent testing laboratory to perform specified inspection and testing. B. Employment of testing laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor of obligation to perform r work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents. i ` 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with requirements of ANSI/ASTM E329 and ANSI/ASTM D3740R. B. Laboratory Staff: Maintain a full time registered Engineer on staff to review services. C. Testing Equipment: Calibrated at reasonable intervals with devices of an accuracy traceable to either National Bureau of Standards (NBS) standards or accepted values of natural physical constants. i 03879198 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 - 1 r. 04199 i r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.7 CONTRACTOR SUBMITTALS 9616 A. Prior to start of Work, submit testing laboratory name, address, and telephone number, and names of full time registered Engineer and responsible officer. 1.8 LABORATORY RESPONSIBILITIES A. Test samples of mixes submitted by Contractor. B. Provide qualified personnel at site. Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of services. C. Perform specified inspection, sampling, and testing of Products in accordance with specified standards. D. Ascertain compliance of materials and mixes with requirements of Contract Documents. E. Promptly notify Architect and Contractor of observed irregularities or non-conformance of Work or Products. F. Perform additional inspections and tests required by Architect. G. Attend preconstruction conferences and progress meetings. 1.9 LABORATORY REPORTS A. After each inspection and test, promptly submit two copies of laboratory report to Architect, and to Contractor. B. Include: 1. Date issued, 2. Project title and number, 3. Name of inspector, 4. Date and time of sampling or inspection, 5. Identification of product and Specifications Section, 6. Location in the Project, 7. Type of inspection or test, 8. Date of test, 9. Results of tests and 10. Conformance with Contract Documents. C. When requested by Architect, provide interpretation of test results. 1.10 LIMITS ON TESTING LABORATORY AUTHORITY A. Laboratory may not release, revoke, alter, or enlarge on requirements of Contract Documents. B. Laboratory may not approve or accept any portion of the Work. C. Laboratory may not assume any duties of Contractor. D. Laboratory has no authority to stop the Work. 1.11 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBILITIES A. Deliver to laboratory at designated location, adequate samples of materials proposed to be used which require testing, along with proposed mix designs. B. Cooperate with laboratory personnel, and provide access to the Work. C. Provide incidental labor and facilities to provide access to Work to be tested, to obtain and handle samples at the site or at source of products to be tested, to facilitate tests and inspections, storage and curing of test samples. 03879198 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 - 2 04/99 _ POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION D. Notify Architect and laboratory 24 hours prior to expected time for operations requiring inspection and testing services. E. Employ services of a separate qualified testing laboratory, arrange with laboratory and pay for additional samples and tests required by Contractor beyond specified requirements. 1.12 SCHEDULE OF INSPECTIONS AND TESTS A. As indicated in individual Specification Sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879198 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 - 3 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 01500 P' CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Temporary Utilities: Electricity, lighting, heat, ventilation, telephone service, water, and sanitary facilities. B. Temporary Controls: Barriers, enclosures and fencing, protection of the Work, and water control. C. Construction Facilities: Access roads, parking, progress cleaning, project signage, and temporary buildings. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Final Cleaning 1.4 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY A. Owner to provide and pay for power service required. B. Permanent convenience receptacles may be utilized during construction. C. Provide adequate distribution equipment, wiring, and outlets to provide single phase branch circuits for power and lighting for construction operations. 1. Provide 20 ampere duplex outlets served by single phase circuits for power tools for every 2000 sq ft of active work area and at specific locations as required. 2. Provide flexible power cords as required. 3. Provide 20 ampere, single phase branch circuits for lighting. 1.5 TEMPORARY LIGHTING A. Provide and maintain lighting for construction operations to achieve a minimum lighting level of 2 watt/sq ft. B. Provide and maintain 1 watt/sq ft lighting to exterior staging and storage areas after dark for security purposes. C. Provide and maintain 0.25 watt/sq ft H.I.D. lighting to interior work areas after dark for security purposes. ` D. Provide branch wiring from power source to distribution boxes with lighting conductors, pigtails, and lamps as required. E. Maintain lighting and provide routine repairs. F. Permanent building lighting may be utilized during construction. r is 1.6 TEMPORARY HEAT A. Provide and pay for heat devices and heat as required to maintain specified conditions for construction operations. 03879198 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 1 r 04199 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION B. Prior to operation of permanent equipment for temporary heating purposes, verify that installation is approved for operation, equipment is lubricated and filters are in place. Provide and pay for operation, maintenance, and regular replacement of filters and worn or consumed — parts. C. Maintain minimum ambient temperature of 50 degrees F in areas where construction is in progress, unless indicated otherwise in specifications. _ D. Do not use permanent building heating equipment until all dust related operations are completed. 1.7 TEMPORARY VENTILATION A. Ventilate enclosed areas to assist cure of materials, to dissipate humidity, and to prevent accumulation of dust, fumes, vapors, or gases. 1.8 TELEPHONE SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for telephone service to field office at time of project mobilization. 1.9 TEMPORARY WATER SERVICE A. Provide, maintain and pay for suitable quality water service required. B. Extend branch piping with outlets located so water is available by hoses with threaded connections. Provide temporary pipe insulation to prevent freezing. — 1.10 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES A. Permanent building facilities may be used during construction operations. Maintain cleanliness of Owner's restrooms. 1.11 BARRIERS A. Provide barriers to prevent unauthorized entry to construction areas to allow for Owner's use of the site, and to protect adjacent properties from damage from construction operations. B. Provide barricades required by governing authorities for public rights -of -way. C. Protect non -owned vehicular traffic, stored materials, site and structures from damage. 1.12 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED WORK A. Protect installed Work and provide special protection where specified in individual specification Sections. B. Provide temporary and removable protection for installed Products. Control activity in immediate work area to minimize damage. C. Provide protective coverings at walls, projections, jambs, sills, and soffits of openings. D. Protect finished floors, stairs, and other surfaces from traffic, dirt, wear, damage, or movement of heavy objects, by protecting with durable sheet materials. E. Prohibit traffic or storage upon waterproofed or roofed surfaces. If traffic or activity is necessary, obtain recommendations for protection from waterproofing or roofing material — manufacturer. F. Prohibit traffic from landscaped areas. 1.13 SECURITY A. Provide security and facilities to protect Work from unauthorized entry, vandalism, or theft. 03879198 . CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 2 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 1.14 PROGRESS CLEANING A. Maintain areas free of waste materials, debris, and rubbish. Maintain site in a clean and orderly condition. B. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing the space. C. Broom and vacuum clean interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust. D. Remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site and dispose off -site at intervals as required to maintain clean site. 1.15 REMOVAL OF UTILITIES, FACILITIES, AND CONTROLS A. Remove temporary above grade or buried utilities, equipment, facilities and materials as soon as permanent facilities can be utilized. B. Remove underground installations to a minimum depth of 2 feet. Grade site as indicated. C. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary work. D. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 PRODUCTS Not Used END OF SECTION 03879198 CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND TEMPORARY CONTROLS 01500 - 3 04/99 I POLICE SQUARE r SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Products. B. Product Delivery, Storage and Handling. C. Product options. D. Substitutions. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Product quality monitoring. 1.4 PRODUCTS A. Products: Means new material, machinery, components, equipment, fixtures, and systems forming the Work and does not include machinery and equipment used for preparation, fabrication, conveying and erection of the Work. Products may also include existing materials or components required for reuse. B. Provide interchangeable components of the same manufacturer, for similar components. 1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery 1. Deliver materials, products and equipment to the project site in manufacturer's original, unopened containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 2. Promptly inspect shipments to assure that products comply with requirements, quantities are correct, and products are undamaged. 3. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. 4. Arrange deliveries in accordance with the construction schedule and in ample time to facilitate inspection prior to installation to avoid unnecessary delays in the construction process. B. Storage 1. Store and protect products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels intact and legible. 2. Store sensitive products in weather -tight, climate controlled enclosures. 3. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports, above ground. 4. Cover products subject to deterioration with impervious sheet covering. Provide ventilation to avoid condensation or potential degradation of Products. 5. Store loose granular materials on solid flat surfaces in a well -drained area. Prevent mixing with foreign matter. T 03879198 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 1 r 04199 l N POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 6. Provide equipment and personnel to store products by methods to prevent soiling, disfigurement, or damage. — 7. Arrange storage of products to permit access for inspection. Periodically inspect to verify products are undamaged and are maintained in acceptable condition. 8. Materials, products and equipment stored in off -site storage facilities may not be included in progress pay requests. C. Handling 1 . Handle materials, products and equipment in a manner prescribed by manufacturer or specified to protect from damage during storage and installation. 1.6 PRODUCT OPTIONS A. Products Specified by Reference Standards or by Description Only: Any product meeting those standards or description. B. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers: Products of manufacturers named and meeting specifications, no options or substitutions allowed. C. Products Specified by Naming One or More Manufacturers with a Provision for Substitutions: Submit a request for substitution for any manufacturer not named in accordance with the following article. 1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Architect will consider requests for substitutions only within 15 days after date established in Notice to Proceed. A. Substitutions may be considered when a product becomes unavailable through no fault of the Contractor. B. Document each request with complete data substantiating compliance of proposed Substitution with Contract Documents. C. A request constitutes a representation that the Bidder: 1. Has investigated proposed product and determined that it meets or exceeds the quality level of the specified product. 2. Will provide the same warranty for the Substitution as for the specified product. _ 3. Will coordinate installation and make changes to other Work which may be required for the Work to be complete with no additional cost to Owner. 4. Waives claims for additional costs or time extension which may subsequently become apparent. 5. Will reimburse Owner for review or redesign services associated with re -approval. D. Substitutions will not be considered when they are indicated or implied on shop drawing or product data submittals, without separate written request, or when acceptance will require — revision to the Contract Documents. E. Substitution Submittal Procedure: 1. Submit four copies of request for Substitution for consideration. Limit each request to one proposed Substitution. 2. Submit shop drawings, product data, and certified test results attesting to the proposed product equivalence. Burden of proof is on proposer. 3. The Architect will notify Contractor, in writing, of decision to accept or reject request. PART PRODUCTS Not Used 03879198 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 2 04/99 — F. POLICE SQUARE 9616 roll SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION I; PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION 03879198 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 - 3 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 01650 STARTING OF SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS a. . A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Starting systems. B. Demonstration and instructions. C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services: Manufacturers field reports. B. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: System operation and maintenance data and extra materials. C. Division 15 - Testing Adjusting and Balancing. 1.4 STARTING SYSTEMS A. Coordinate schedule for start-up of various equipment and systems. B. Notify Architect seven days prior to start-up of each item. C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or other conditions which may cause damage. D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by the equipment or system manufacturer. E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested. F. Execute start-up under supervision of responsible manufacturer's representative and ~ Contractors' personnel in accordance with manufacturers' instructions. G. When specified in individual specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check and approve equipment or r-� system installation prior to start-up, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation. H. Submit a written report in accordance with Section 01410 that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly. 1.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of Products to Owner's personnel two weeks prior to date of final inspection. B. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season. C. Utilize operation and maintenance manuals as basis for instruction. Review contents of manual with Owners' personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance. 1. 03879198 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION D. Demonstrate start-up, operation, control, adjustment, trouble -shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment at agreed -upon times, at equipment location. E. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction. PART PRODUCTS Not Used PART 3 EXECUTION Not Used END OF SECTION 03879198 STARTING OF SYSTEMS 01650 - 2 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Closeout procedures. B. Final cleaning. C. Adjusting. D. Project record documents. E. Operation and maintenance data. F. Warranties. G. Spare parts and maintenance materials. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Progress cleaning. B. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: System start-up, testing, adjusting, and balancing. 1.4 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES A. Submit written certification that Contract Documents have been reviewed, Work has been inspected, and that Work is complete in accordance with Contract Documents and ready for Architect's inspection. B. Provide submittals to Architect that are required by governing or other authorities. C. Submit final Application for Payment identifying total adjusted Contract Sum, previous payments, and sum remaining due. 1.5 FINAL CLEANING A. Execute final cleaning prior to final inspection. B. Clean interior and exterior glass and surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels, stains and foreign substances, polish transparent and glossy surfaces, vacuum carpeted and soft surfaces. C. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition. D. Replace filters of operating equipment. E. Clean debris from roofs, gutters, downspouts, and drainage systems. F. Clean site; sweep paved areas, rake clean landscaped surfaces. G. Remove waste and surplus materials, rubbish, and construction facilities from the site. H. Repair, patch and touch-up marred surfaces to match adjacent finishes. 1. Clean ducts, blowers and coils if air conditioning units were operated during construction. 03879198 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 1 f• 04/99 i POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.6 ADJUSTING 9616 A. Adjust operating Products and equipment to ensure smooth and unhindered operation. 1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain on site, one set of the following record documents; record actual revisions to the Work: 1. Contract Drawings. 2. Specifications. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract. 5. Reviewed shop drawings, product data, and samples. B. Store Record Documents separate from documents used for construction. C. Record information concurrent with construction progress. D. Specifications: Legibly mark and record at each Product section description of actual Products installed, including the following: 1. Manufacturer's name and product model and number. 2. Product substitutions or alternates utilized. 3. Changes made by Addenda and Modifications. E. Record Documents and Shop Drawings: Legibly mark each item to record actual construction including: 1. Measured depths of foundations in relation to finish first floor datum. 2. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 3. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the Work. 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 5. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 6. Changes made by addenda and modification. F. Submit documents to Architect with claim for final Application for Payment. 1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit one copy 15 days prior to final inspection, 8-1/2 x 11 inch text pages, bound in three D ring binders with durable plastic covers. B. This copy will be returned after final inspection, with Architect comments. Revise content of documents as required prior to final submittal. C. Submit two final volumes revised within ten days after final inspection. D. Prepare binder covers with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS", title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required. E. Internally subdivide the binder contents with permanent page dividers, logically organized as described below; with tab titling clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs. F. Contents: Prepare a Table of Contents for each volume, with each Product or system description identified, type on 24 pound white paper. G. Part 1: Directory, listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Contractor, Subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers. H. Part 2: Operation and maintenance instructions, arranged by system and subdivided by specification section. For each category, identify names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. Identify the following: 1. Significant design criteria. 2. List of equipment. 03879198 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 2 04/99 WE POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 3. Parts list for each component. ^* 4. Operating instructions necessary for Owner to make full and efficient use of equipment including recommended maintenance and seasonal change -over procedures for HVAC systems. 5. Maintenance instructions for equipment and systems. 6. Maintenance instructions for finishes, including recommended cleaning methods and - materials and special precautions identifying detrimental agents. I. Part 3: Project documents and certificates, including the following: 1. Shop drawings and product data. !; 2. Air and water balance reports. 3. Certificates. r" 4. Photocopies of warranties and bonds. 1.9 WARRANTIES A. Provide duplicate notarized copies. B. Execute and assemble documents from Subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers. C. Provide Table of Contents and assemble with metal prong binder in durable plastic presentation cover. D. Submit prior to final Application for Payment. E. For items of Work delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of acceptance as start of warranty period. 1.10 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide products, spare parts, maintenance and extra materials in quantities specified in individual specification Sections. B. Deliver to project site and place in location as directed; obtain receipt prior to final payment. PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION Not used END OF SECTION t: 03879198 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 - 3 Flo 04/99 I I i POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 06112 ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Agreement and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fire retardant treatment of wood; miscellaneous framing and sheathing; telephone and electrical panel back boards; wood nailers and concealed wood blocking for support of wall cabinets, and all other wall mounted equipment and accessories requiring support or other sections referencing this section. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 05120 - Structural Steel: Prefabricated steel structural supports. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Placement of steel fabrications embedded into masonry. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ALSC (American Lumber Standards Committee) - Softwood Lumber Standards. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat -Formed Wood Particleboard. C. APA/EWA (APA/The Engineered Wood Association) - Certification. D. ASTM Al 53 - Zinc Coating (Hot Dip) of Iron and Steel Hardware. E. ASTM A563 Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts. F. ASTM F568 Carbon and Alloy Steel Externally Threaded Fasteners. G. AWPA C1 (American Wood Preservers Association) - All Timber Products - Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process. H. AWPA C9 Plywood, Pressure Treatment. I. AWPA C20 (American Wood Preservers Association) - Structural Lumber Fire Retardant Treatment by Pressure Process. J. AWPA C27 Plywood, Fire -Retardant Pressure Treatment. K. FS FF-N-105B Nails, Brads, Staples and Spikes: Wire, Cut and Wrought. L. SPIB (Southern Pine Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. M. WCLIB (West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau) - Lumber Grading Rules. N. NLGA (National Lumber Rules Authority) 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Section 01300 - Submittal Procedures: Submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Submit technical data on roof sheathing, wood preservative materials, and application instructions. C. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify that products conform to specified requirements. 03879198 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061 12 - 1 �++ 04/99 a POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 9616 u A. Perform Work in accordance with the following agencies: 1. Lumber Grading Agency: Certified by ALSC. 2. Wood Structural Panel Grading Agency: Certified by APA/EWA - The Engineered Wood Association. B. Factory grade stamp each piece of lumber and each wood structural panel. In lieu of grade stamping, submit manufacturer's certificate certifying that. products meet or exceed specified requirements. C. Mark each treated item with the Quality Mark Requirements of an inspection agency approved by ALSC's Board of Review. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Section 01600 - Material and Equipment: Product storage and handling requirements. B. Protect all wood materials from warping or other distortion by stacking in vertical position, braced to resist movement. C. Keep all wood materials covered and dry. Provide air circulation within and around stacks. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry lumber. B. Provide dressed lumber, 54S, unless otherwise indicated. C. Provide lumber of the following species. The stess group is used as a reference only. Stress Group Species (Commercial Design) A Douglas Fir, Larch B Hem -Fir C Southern Yellow Pine D. Lumber Grading Rules: SPIB, WCLIB, or WWPA. E. Rafter Framing: Stress Group A, B, or C; 15 percent maximum moisture content with a minimum bending stress of 1200 psi and a modulus of elasticity of 1600 ksi. F. Non-structural Light Framing: Stress Group A, B, or C; 19 percent maximum moisture content with a minimum bending stress of 1100 psi and a modulus of elasticity of 1500 ksi. G. Miscellaneous Framing: Stress Group C, 19 percent maximum moisture content, pressure preservative treat. 2.2 SHEATHING MATERIALS A. Telephone and Electrical Panel Boards: APA/EWA rated plywood, Exposure Durability 1, grade CD, plugged, sanded. 2.3 ACCESSORIES A. Fasteners and Anchors: 1. Fasteners: ASTM F568 and FS FF-N-105B, Hot dipped or Electro galvanized steel. 03879198 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06112 - 2 04/99 r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION l 9616 2. Anchors: a) At Metal Studs: Flat or oval head sheet metal screws as required by project conditions. b) At Face Brick: Self tapping masonry anchors equal to Hilti Kwik-Con. c) At Mortar Joints: Expansion type anchors equal to Rawl wedge anchors. d) At Hollow Masonry: Resin injected screen anchors equal to Hilti HIT C20. e) At Grout Filled Masonry and Concrete: Expansion bolts or self tapping masonry anchors as required by project conditions. f) At Drywall: Equal to Hilti Togglers. B. Structural Framing Connectors: Hot dipped galvanized steel, sized to suit framing conditions. 2.4 FACTORY WOOD TREATMENT A. Wood Preservative (Pressure Treatment): AWPA Treatment C1, C9, C20 and C27 using water borne preservative with a minimum retention of 0.25 lb/cu. ft. B. Wood Preservative (Surface Application): Colored type, as recommended by pressure treatment manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Set framing and sheathing to required lines and level, with members plumb, true to line, cut and fitted. 2. Fit framing to other construction, scribe and cope as required for accurate fit. 3. Correlate location of furring, nailers, blocking grounds and similar supports to allow attachment of other construction. 4. Apply field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative -treated lumber and plywood. 5. Securely attach carpentry work in accordance with requirements of applicable code indicated on drawings. 6. Use fasteners of appropriate type and length. Predrill members when necessary to avoid splitting wood. B. Framing 1 . Make provisions for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing. 2. Place roof rafters crown side up. 3. Construct load bearing framing and curb members full length without splices. 4. Coordinate installation of wood decking and wood joists. 5. Curb roof openings except where prefabricated curbs are provided. Form corners by alternating lapping side members. 6. Coordinate curb installation with installation of decking and support of deck openings. C. Sheathing 1. Install telephone and electrical panel back boards with flat head drywall screws. Size the back board by 12 inches beyond size of electrical panel. D. Nailers and Blocking 1 . Attach roof nailers with anchors recessed flush with exposed surface. 03879198 ROUGH CARPENTRY 061 12 - 3 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 2. At metal studs, install blocking cut between studs. Anchor to studs with bugle head drywall screws. 3. Provide blocking of minimum 2 x 6 size. 3.2 SITE APPLIED WOOD TREATMENT A. Apply preservative treatment. B. Brush apply two coats of preservative treatment on wood in contact with roofing and related metal flashings. Treat site -sawn cuts. C. Allow preservative to dry prior to erecting members. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Section 01410 - Quality Control: Tolerances. B. Framing Members: 1 /4 inch from true position, maximum. C. Surface Flatness of Roof: 1 /4 inch in 10 feet maximum, and 1 /2 inch in 30 feet maximum. 3.4 SCHEDULES A. Pressure Treated Lumber: Nailers, curbs, blocking and similar members in connection with roofing and flashing. B. Pressure Treated Plywood: All parapet sheathing. C. Fire Retardant Treated Lumber: All wood blocking in interior partitions. END OF SECTION 03879198 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06112 - 4 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS �' • t A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Cabinet units. B. Countertops. C. Cabinet hardware. D. Prefinished exposed surfaces. E. Preparation for site finishing concealed surfaces. F. Preparation for installing utilities. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06114 - Wood Blocking and Curbing: Grounds and support framing. B. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Related trim not specified in this section. C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Seals at adjoining construction. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing of casework. E. Division 16 - Electrical: Power, signal, and data wiring. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. C. AWI - Quality Standards. D. BHMA All 56.9 - Cabinet Hardware. E. BHMA All 56.11 - Cabinet Locks. F. CID A -A 1936A - Adhesive, Contact. G. HPMA HP - American Standard for Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. H. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. I. NHLA - Rules for the Measurement and Inspection of Hardwood & Cypress J. PS 1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood. K. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawing and Product Data 1. Indicate materials, component profiles and elevations, assembly methods, joint details, fastening methods, accessory listings, hardware location and schedule of finishes. 2. For shop drawings submitted in phases, number phases in sequential order and provide master cross reference indicating room number in numerical sequence, millwork elevation and shop drawing sheet where detailed. 3. Product Data: Provide data for hardware accessories. 03879198 04/99 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 1 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION B. Samples 1 . Submit four 2 x 3 inch size samples of each color selected, illustrating counter top and .. cabinet finish. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform cabinet construction in accordance with AWI as follows: 1. All spaces: Custom quality. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Transport, handle, store, and protect products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect units from moisture damage. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. During and after installation of work of this section, maintain the same temperature and humidity conditions in building spaces as will occur after occupancy. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hardware 1. Julius Blum, Inc.; Stanley NC. 2. Grass America, Inc.; Kernersville, NC. 3. Hafele America Co.; Archdale, NC. 4. H.B. Ives; New Haven, CT. 5. Hewi, Inc.; Lancaster, PA. 6. Knape & Vogt Manufacturing Co.; Grand Rapids, MI. 7. Liberty Hardware; Greensboro, NC. 8. Stanley Hardware; New Britain, CN. B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Softwood Lumber: PS 20; graded in accordance with AWI custom grade, average moisture content of 8 percent. B. Hardwood Lumber: NHLA; graded in accordance with AWI premium grade; average moisture _ content of 8 percent. C. Softwood Plywood: PS-1; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer lumber or particleboard, type of glue recommended for application; face veneer and cuts D. Hardwood Plywood: HPMA; graded in accordance with AWI, core materials of veneer lumber or particleboard, type of glue recommended for application. E. Wood Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M-S, composed of wood chips, medium density, made with water resistant adhesive; of grade to suit application; sanded faces. F. Melamine Covered Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; Grade M-S, composed of wood chips, medium density, made with water resistant adhesive; of grade to suit application; surfaced with thermofused melamine. 03879198 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 2 04/99 r I r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 G. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4; Pressed wood fiber with resin binder, tempered grade, 1/4 inch thick, smooth one side. H. Plastic Laminate 1. Conformance: NEMA LD 3. 2. Grade a. Horizontal Exposed Surfaces: GP-50, 0.50 inch thick. b. Vertical Exposed Surfaces: GP-28, 0.28 inch thick. C. Backing Sheet: BK20, 0.20 inch thick backing grade, undecorated plastic laminate. 3. Color, Pattern, and Surface Texture: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. I. Adhesive: FS MMM-A-130 contact adhesive. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. J. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. K. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; Cadmium finish. L. Concealed Joint Fasteners: Threaded steel. M. Grommets: Two piece plastic, with spring loaded access port equal to Hafele model no. 429.99, color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard. N. Shelf Standards 1. Cabinet Mounted: BHMA A156.9, Type B04071, cut for fitted rests spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. 2. Wall Mounted: BHMA A156.9, Type B04102, slotted for brackets spaced at 1 inch centers; chrome satin finish. 0. Shelf Rests: BHMA All56.9, Type B04081, chrome satin finish. P. Shelf Brackets: BHMA All 56.9, Type B041 12, formed steel brackets, chrome satin finish. Q. Closet Rods 1. Fixed Rod: Equal to K&V model no. PKV 3 CHR, length to fit cabinet depth. 2. Sliding Rod: Equal to K&V model no. KV 1 NP, 16 inch length. R. Cabinet Drawer and Door Pulls: Extruded aluminum wire pull, satin finish, equal to Stanley no. 4484. S. Locker and Sliding Door Pulls: Cast nylon, semi -recessed type equal to Hewi no. 535.75. T. Locks 1. Conformance: BHMA A 156.11 2. Style a. Cabinet Drawers [and Doors]: Type E07271 for drug storage cabinet in Med rooms and Type E07261 at all other locations. Provide locks with cams not requiring mortising or recessing into cabinet door or drawer front. b. Display Cases: Type E070191. 3. Finish: Satin chrome steel finish. 4. Keying: Master key all drug storage cabinets to one master key. Master key all other locks to separate master key. Provide two keys per lock. U. Catches: BHMA A156.9, Type B03141. V. Slides 1. Standard Drawers: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051, with positive stop levers. 2. File Drawers: BHMA A156.9, Type B05051 (100 lb. load rated), full extension type with positive stop levers. 3. Cupboard Slides: Equal to Hafele floor mounted pull-out system model no. 421.56.409. with ceiling guide model no. 421.57.406. W. Hinges: Semi -mortised, self closing, three dimensional adjustable type equal to Grass model no. 1203 screw -on hinge with winged base plate; brushed nickel finish. 03879198 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 3 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 2.3 FINISHING MATERIALS A. Finishing: Site finish of casework scheduled to receive opaque and transparent finishes specified in Section 09900. 2.4 FABRICATION A. General 1. Shop assemble casework for delivery to site in units easily handled and to permit passage through building openings. 2. Fit shelves, doors, drawer fronts and other exposed and semi -exposed edges with veneer matching face finish as scheduled. Use one piece for full length only. 3. Cap exposed plastic laminate finish edges with material of same finish and pattern. 4. When necessary to cut and fit on site, provide materials with ample allowance for cutting. Provide trim for scribing and site cutting. ` 5. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. 6. Fit corners and joints hairline; secure with concealed fasteners. Slightly bevel arises. 7. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic wood laminate finished surfaces. 8. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal cut edges. B. Transparent Finish Casework 1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 400A, flush overlay style, using the following materials: a. Body Members (1) Exposed: Rotary cut red oak. (2) Semi -exposed: Medium density particleboard. b. Stiles and Rails: Plain sawn red oak. C. Shelves (1) Exposed: Rotary cut red oak. (2) Semi -exposed: Medium density particleboard. d. Backs (1) Exposed: Rotary cut red oak veneer on particle board core. (2) Semi -exposed: Tempered hardboard. e. Drawer Sides, Backs and Subfronts: Poplar or Alder. f. Drawer Bottoms: Tempered hardboard. " g. Drawer Fronts: Rotary cut red oak veneer on particle board core. h. Doors: Rotary cut red oak veneer on particle board core. i. Door, Drawer and Shelf Edging: Red oak veneer banding. C. Countertops 1. Fabricate in accordance with AWI Section 1600C with GP-50 high pressure decorative laminate exposed finish and BK-20 backing sheet on particle board core except on tops with sinks, provide exterior grade plywood. 2. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut-outs. 3. Mechanically fasten back splash to countertops. 4. Provide grommet at each knee space. Coordinate location with utilities. " 2.5 FINISHING A. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws. B. Finish for items scheduled to receive,transparent or opaque finishes, specified in Section 09900 - Painting .� 03879198 CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 4 04199 r r t: POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verifiy existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. C. Verify location and sizes of utility rough -in associated with work of this section. 3.2 INSTALLATION 4-1 A. Install casework and associated trim in accordance with AWI Section 1700. B. Set and secure casework in place; rigid, plumb, and level. C. Use fixture attachments in concealed locations for wall mounted components. D. Use concealed joint fasteners to align and secure adjoining cabinet units and counter tops. E. Seal splashes and returns to countertop and wall with type sealant specified in Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. F. Carefully scribe casework abutting other components, with maximum gaps of 1 /32 inch. Do not use additional overlay trim for this purpose. G. Secure cabinet and counter bases to floor using appropriate angles and anchorages. H. Anchorage Devices 1. General: Use concealed anchorage devices at all locations except where otherwise approved by Architect. 2. Transparent or Opaque Finish Casework a. At exposed fixed locations, countersink and putty or countersink and conceal with solid wood plugs of species to match surrounding wood; finish flush with surrounding surfaces. b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and countersunk finishing washers. 3. Laminated Plastic -Covered Casework a. At exposed fixed locations, provide cadmium coated screws with countersunk finishing washers. b. At exposed locations requiring removable panels, provide brass screws and countersunk finishing washers. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Adjust installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Test installed work for rigidity and ability to support loads. C. Adjust moving or operating parts to function smoothly and correctly. 3.4 CLEANING A. Clean installed work in accordance with Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Clean casework, counters, shelves, hardware, fittings, and fixtures. 03879198 04/99 END OF SECTION CUSTOM CASEWORK 06410 - 5 POLICE SQUARE + SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1, SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 . - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08800 - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods. B. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction wiht sound rated partitions. 1.4 REFERENCES A. AAMA 803.3 - Voluntary Specification for Narrow -Joint Seam Sealer. B. AAMA 808.3 - Voluntary Specification for Exterior Perimeter Sealing Compound C. ASTM C719 - Adhesion and Cohesion of Elastomeric Joint Sealants Under Cyclic Movement. D. ASTM C792 - Effects of Heat Aging on Weight Loss, Cracking, and Chalking of Elastomeric Sealants. E. ASTM C570 - Oil and Resin - Base Caulking Compound for Building Construction. F. ASTM C834 - Latex Sealing Compounds. G. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. H. ASTM C1085 - Butyl Rubber - Based Solvent - Release Sealants. I. ASTM C1193 - Use of Joint Sealants. J. ASTM D1056 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Sponge or Expanded Rubber. K. ASTM D1565 - Flexible Cellular Materials - Vinyl Chloride Polymers and Copolymers (Open -Cell Foam). L. FS TT-S-00230C - Sealing Compound; Elastomeric Type, Single Component (for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing in Buildings or Other Structures). 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Submit product data indicating sealant chemical characteristics, performance criteria, limitations and color availability. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Samples 1. Submit four sample kits in form of manufacturer's standard bead samples, consisting of strips of actual products showing full range of colors available, for each product exposed to view. J 03879198 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 C. Certificates 1. Submit manufacturer's certificate that products meet or exceed specified requirements and are suitable for use indicated. 2. Joint sealant manufacturer's certification that sealants, primers, and cleaners required for sealant installation comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this Section with minimum ten years documented experience. B. Applicator: Company specializing in applying the work of this Section with minimum five years documented experience. C. Conform to ASTM C1193 requirements for materials and installation. 1. Obtain joint sealant materials from a single manufacturer for each different product required. 2. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. D. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, joint fillers, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for use, pot life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials. B. Store and handle materials in compliance with manufacturer's recommendations to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, high or low temperatures, contaminants, or other causes. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Requirements 1. Do not install solvent curing sealants in enclosed building spaces. 2. Do not install sealants when joint substrates are wet. 3. Maintain temperature and humidity recommended by the sealant manufacturer during and after installation. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate the work of this Section with all Sections referencing this Section. 1.10 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty. B. Warranty: Include coverage of installed sealants and accessories which fail to achieve air tight and watertight seal, exhibit loss of adhesion or cohesion, or do not cure. 03879198 JOINT SEALERS 07900-2 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION i PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Elastomeric Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard chemically curing, urethane, polyurethane, or polysulfide polymer based elastomeric sealant complying with ASTM C 920. 2. Types a. S-1: Type M, Grade P, Class 25. b. S-2: Type S, Grade P, Class 25. C. S-3: Type M, Grade NS, Class 25. r d. S-4: Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. ` 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. B. Latex Sealants 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, mildew -resistant, paintable latex sealant of formulation indicated that is recommended for exposed applications on interior and protected exterior locations and that accommodates indicated percentage change in joint width existing at time of installation without failing either adhesively or cohesively. 2. Types a. S-5; Acrylic -Emulsion Sealant (1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product accommodating joint movement of not more than 5 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 10 percent. (2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 b. S-6; Silicone Emulsion Sealant (1) Composition: Manufacturer's standard product that accommodates joint movement of not more than 25 percent in both extension and compression for a total of 50 percent. (2) Conformance: ASTM C 834 and, except for weight loss measured per ASTM C 792, ASTM C 920. 3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 4. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. C. Type S-7; Acrylic Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, solvent -release -curing acrylic terpolymer sealant complying with AAMA 808.3 and/or FS TT-S-00230, with capability to withstand 15 percent maximum cyclic movement (7-1 /2 percent movement in both extension and compression) at time of application and remain adhered to joint substrates indicated for Project without failing cohesively when tested for adhesion and cohesion per ASTM C 719. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. D. Type S-8; Butyl Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard one -part, nonsag, nonstaining, paintable, solvent -release -curing, polymerized butyl sealant formulated with minimum of 75 percent solids and tack -free time of 24 hours or less, complying with ASTM C 1085. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. r" 03879198 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 3 r., 04/99 r• z POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION " E. Type S-9; Pigmented Narrow Joint Sealant 1. General: Manufacturer's standard, solvent -release -curing, pigmented synthetic rubber sealant formulated for sealing joints 3/16 inch or smaller in width, complying with AAMA 803.3 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of standard colors. ... 3. Use Locations: As indicated in Schedule at end of this Section. F. Accessories 1. Primer: Non -staining type, recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 2. Joint Cleaner: Non -corrosive and non -staining type, recommended by sealant '— manufacturer; compatible with joint forming materials. 3. Joint Backing: ANSI/ASTM D1056; round, closed cell polyethylene foam rod; oversized 30 to 50 percent larger than joint width. ... 4. Bond Breaker: Pressure sensitive tape recommended by sealant manufacturer to suit application. 5. Masking Tape: Non -staining, non -absorbing type as recommended by sealant manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that joint openings are ready to receive work and field measurements areas shown on Drawings and recommended by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions and substrate. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean and prime joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Remove loose materials and foreign matter which might impair adhesion of sealant. C. Verify that joint backing and release tapes are compatible with sealant. D. Perform preparation in accordance with ASTM C1193. E. Install masking tape where required to protect adjacent finished surfaces. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Perform installation in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written " instructions. B. Measure joint dimensions and size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios. C. Install joint backing to achieve a neck dimension no greater than 1 /3 the joint width. D. Install bond breaker where joint backing is not used. E. Remove and replace joint backing which has become wet, dirty, or exposed to weather for extended period of time. F. Apply sealant within recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges. G. Install sealant free of air pockets, foreign embedded matter, ridges, and sags. H. Tool joints concave in accordance with ASTM C1193 and manufacturer's written instructions. 03879198 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 4 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIRING A. Clean off excess sealants or sealant smears adjacent to joints as work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur. B. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by work of this Section. C. Cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants and repair so that repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances or from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so that they are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. 3.6 SCHEDULE A. Interior Joints 1. Horizontal traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, or S-2. 2. Horizontal non -traffic joints not exposed to fuel or gas spillage: Sealant types S-1, S- 2, S-3, or S-4. 3. Vertical or inclined joints such as panel, coping and control: Sealant types S-3, S-4. 4. Vertical or inclined joints such as perimeters of doors, windows, wall penetrations: Sealant types S-3, S-4 or S-6. 5. Non-structural hollow metal doors and borrowed lites. Sealant types S-3, S-4 S-5, S-6 or S-7. 6. Non-structural perimeter seals around plumbing fixtures and joints between ceramic tile and dissimilar materials: Sealant type S-6. 7. Non-structural perimeter seals at joints between countertops, backsplashes and walls: Sealant type S-6. END OF SECTION 03879198 JOINT SEALERS 07900 - 5 04199 r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 06110 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. Custom fabricated, standard, non -rated and fire rated steel frames. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08211 - Flush Wood Doors. B. Section 08700 - Hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glazing. D. Section 09250 - Gypsum Drywall: Prepared openings. E. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors and frames; bituminous coating. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Architectural and Transportation Barriers Compliance Board - 36 CFR Part 1191, Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities. B. ANSI/SDI-100 - Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors & Frames. C. ANSI A 117.1 - Specifications for Making Buildings and Facilities Accessible to and Usable by Physically Handicapped People. D. ANSI A224.1 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames. E. ASTM A167 - Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium - Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip. F. ANSI/ASTM A366 - Steel Sheet, Carbon, Cold -Rolled, Commercial Quality. G. ASTM A525 - Steel Sheet, Zinc -Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, General Requirements. H. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1. FS RR-W-365A - Wire Fabric (Insect Screening), J. MIL-M-17194C(2) - Metal, Expanded, Steel K. SDI-107 - Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement --Application). L. SDI-1 13 - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Apparent Thermal Performance for Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. M. SDI-1 14 -Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Acoustical Performance for Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. N. SDI-1 16 - Standard Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Rate of Air Flow Through Closed Steel Door and Frame Assemblies. 0. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. P. NFPA 252 - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 03879198 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 10 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 9616 A. Regulatory Requirements ' 1. Conform to requirements of 36 CFR Part 1191. 2. Conform to NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for fire rated class indicated B. Manufacturer ._ 1 . Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Indicate each type door and frame elevation, reinforcements, hardware locations, metal types and guages, and finish. Use same numbering system as indicated on drawings. 2. Indicate frame configuration, anchor spacings and anchor types. _ 3. Indicate door core construction and head and sill closure method. 4. Manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. B. Certificates 1. Manufacturer's Certificate certifying that Products and fabrications meet or exceed — specified requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Provide frames with manufacturer's standard sill spreader bar for all welded units. B. Protect doors and frames with manufacturer's standard resilient packaging. C. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. _ 1.8 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Doors 1. Exterior: 16 gage stretch level steel conforming to ASTM A366. B. Frames 1. Interior: 16 gage steel conforming to ASTM A366. 2. Exterior: 14 gage steel conforming to ASTM A366. ' C. Protective Coatings 1. Bituminous Coating: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Primer: Manufacturer's standard oven dried, gray alkyd enamel primer, complying with requirements of ANSI/SDI A224.1. D. Accessories \ 1. Jamb Anchors a. Steel Stud Construction: Z type, same gage and material as frame. b. Masonry Construction: 'T' strap type, corrugated and galvanized. C. Expansion anchors for connection into existing masonry iambs. 2. Silencers: As specified in Section 08700 - Hardware. 03879198 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 2 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION k t ; 2.2 FABRICATION A. General ` 1. Fabricate doors and frames to sizes and profiles indicated and in conformance with, except as otherwise specified, SDI-100, SDI-1 13andSDI-116 for non -rated assemblies and NFPA 80 and NFPA 252 for rated assemblies. 2. Fabricate frames and doors with hardware reinforcement plates welded in place. Provide mortar guard boxes for frames set in masonry. 3. Attach fire rated label to each frame and door unit. E' 4. Grind all welds smooth, fill all voids with body putty and seam filler and sand smooth. Welds and joints shall not be visible. r B. Doors i 1 . Exterior doors: Grade 1 1, model 2. 2. Close top edge of doors with flush steel channel closures, seal jambs weather -tight. 3. Close bottom edge of doors with inverted steel channel closure. r r 4. Core construction, exterior doors a. Type F vertical steel stiffeners formed from not less than 20 gage steel, spaced not more than 6" apart, and securely attached to face sheets by spot welds not more than 6" on center. 6 b. Fill spaces between stiffeners full height of door with a minimum 0.6 pound density insulation. r.. C. U-value through door: Maximum 0.24. C. Frames 1. Fabricate and assemble as complete welded unit. 2. Weld Z anchors to frame. j 3. Reinforce frames wider than 48 inches with roll formed steel channels fitted tightly into frame head, flush with top. 4. Prepare frame for silencers. Provide for three single silencers on strike side of single !� doors and two single silencers on frame head at double doors without mullions. t # 5. Provide minimum 14 gage steel floor angle clips welded to each jamb. 6. Fabricate KD frames with double back bend, concealed corner reinforcement and T., manufacturer's standard compression clip. 7. Removeable Stops: Roll formed channel shape, mitered corners; prepared for countersunk style tamper proof screws. 2.3 FINISH A. Finish: As Specified in SECTION - 09900. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Install frames in accordance with SDI-105 and manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Coordinate with masonry and gypsum wallboard wall construction for anchor placement. 3. Coat inside of frame profile with bituminous coating to a thickness of 1 /16 inch where in direct contact with masonry and concrete. k 4. Install lead sheet in continuous strips in frames where scheduled. 5. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. 03879198 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 081 10 - 3 04/99 i POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 6. Install roll formed steel reinforcement channels between two abutting frames. Anchor to structure and floor. 7. Install field applied hardware in accordance with SDI-107. B. Two Piece Frames 1. Anchor base section to substrate with appropriate fasteners spaced at 16 inches o.c. maximum. 2. Attach second section to base section with pop rivets in each flange spaced at 16 inches o.c. maximum. 3.2 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Diagonal Distortion: 1 /16 inch measured with straight edge, corner to corner. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING A. Adjust for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 03879198 STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110 - 4 04/99 7 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION k SECTION 08211 P w FLUSH WOOD DOORS r, PART 1 GENERAL i 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS { 7 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and t Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated and fire rated flush wood doors and transom panels to receive transparent finish. r B. Cut outs for glass panels. f t 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Steel doors and frames. B. Section 08700 - Door Hardware. C. Section 08800 - Glazing. D. Section 09900 - Painting: Site finishing doors. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI A135.4 - Basic Hardboard. B. ANSI/HPMA HP - Hardwood and Decorative Plywood. C. ASTM E152 - Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. F. NFPA 252 - Standard Method of Fire Tests for Door Assemblies. G. NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association. H. UL 1 OB - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. I. Warnock -Hersey - Certification Listings for fire doors. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Shop Drawings and Product Data 1. Illustrate door opening criteria, elevations, sizes, types, swings, undercuts required, special beveling, special blocking for hardware, and identify cutouts for glazing. 2. Indicate door core materials and construction; veneer species, type and characteristics; factory machining criteria, and factory finishing criteria. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions 1 . Indicate special installation instructions. D. Manufacturer's Certificates 1. Certify that doors meet or exceed specified requirements and requirements of NWWDA standards referenced. 2. Certify that doors meet or exceed adhesive bond test of NWWDA T.M.-6. r 03879198 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -1 p- 04/99 P' POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with NWWDA Industry Standard I.S. 1-A for Flush Wood Doors. B. Maintain one copy of document on site. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Fire Door Construction: Conform to UL 10B. B. Installed Fire Rated Door Assembly: Conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class as scheduled. 1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Protect doors with manufacturer's standard sealed resilient packaging. C. Handle doors with clean hands or while wearing clean gloves. D. Store doors in flat position, raised above floor, not in damp or wet areas or in areas where sunlight might bleach veneer. E. Seal top and bottom edges if stored more than one week. Break seal on -site to permit ventilation. 1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on shop drawings. 1.11 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Coordinate the work with door opening construction, door frame and door hardware installation. 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide warranty under provisions of Section 01700 to the following term: 1. Interior Doors: Life of Installation. B. Include coverage for delamination of veneer, warping beyond specified installation tolerances, defective materials, and telegraphing core construction. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Doors 1 . Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.; Algoma, Wl. 2. Eggers Industries, Inc.; Two Rivers, WI. 3. VT Industries, Inc.; Holstein, IA. 4. Weyerhaeuser; Marshfield, WI. 03879198 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 06211 -2 04/99 Fm POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION lh B. Door Lite Surround Frames 1. Air Louvers, Inc.; Pico Rivera, CA. 2. Anemostat Door Products; Carson, CA. C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Lumber 1. Transparent Finish: NHLA first grade, Walnut to match existing kiln dried to maximum 10 percent moisture content. B. Cores 1. Solid Core a. Non -Fire Rated: ANSI 208.1, grade 1-LD2 particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. b. Fire Rated (1). 20 Minute Rated: ANSI 208.1, LD2 fire retardant treated particleboard, minimum 40 pounds per cubic foot density. (2). 90 Minute Rated: Manufacturer's standard mineral core. C. Veneers 1. Transparent Finish:.050 inch thick, NWWDA Custom, A grade Oak species wood, plain sliced to match existing. D. Adhesives 1. Interior Doors: Type I - waterproof. E. Transom Panels 1. Transom panels to be cut to fit from salvaged walnut species wood doors from second floor. . 2.3 FABRICATION A. General 1. Fabricate fire rated doors to meet fire ratings scheduled in accordance with ASTM E84 classifications for flame spread/smoke developed of 20/45. Attach fire rating label to door edge. 2. Fabricate doors to thickness scheduled. 3. Veneer Match a. Between Individual Pieces of Veneer: Slip Match. b. Assembly on Door Face: Running Match. C. On Pairs of Doors: Pair Match. 4. Hardware a. Factory machine doors for finish hardware in accordance with templates furnished by hardware supplier at locations indicated in NWWDA I.S.1.7-87 - Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors. b. Do not machine for surface hardware. C. Provide solid blocking for through bolted hardware. 5. Factory pre -fit doors for frame opening dimensions identified on shop drawings with prefit clearances specified in NWWDA I.S. 1-A. B. Flush Face Doors 1. Fabricate in accordance with NWWDA I.S. 1 and 1-A for 5 ply construction except as otherwise specified, with finish as scheduled. 2. Stiles a. Transparent Finish: Solid wood of same species as veneer facing. f 03879198 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 3 �.. 04/99 ,i POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 3. Edge Banding a. Wood Cores: Type A - bonded. 2.4 FINISH A. As specified in Section 09900 - PAINTING. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 9616 A. Verify frame opening conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that opening sizes and tolerances are acceptable. C. Do not install doors in frame openings that are not plumb or are out -of -tolerance for size or _ alignment. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Install doors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Trim non -rated door width by cutting equally on both jamb edges. C. Trim door height by cutting bottom edges to a maximum of 314 inch. Trim fire door height at bottom edge only, in accordance with fire rating requirements. D. Pilot drill screw and bolt holes. -- E. Machine cut for hardware. Core for handsets and cylinders. F. Coordinate installation of doors with installation of frames specified in Section 08110 and hardware specified in Section 08700. G. Coordinate installation of glass and glazing. H. Install door louvers, plumb and level. -- 3.3 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Maximum Telegraphing: 1 /10 inch measured with straight edge in any three inch span. B. Maximum Diagonal Distortion (Warp): 1 /8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, corner to corner, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. C. Maximum Vertical Distortion (Bow): 1 /8 inch measured with straightedge or taught string, top to bottom, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. D. Maximum Width Distortion (Cup): 1 /8 inch measured with straight edge or taught string, edge to edge, over an imaginary 36 x 84 inch surface area. -- 3.4 ADJUSTING A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 01700. B. Adjust door for smooth and balanced door movement. END OF SECTION 03879198 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 - 4 04/99 F 0 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 08700 HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 WORK INCLUDED A. All finish hardware necessary for completion of project. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section 08110 - Steel Frames B. Section 08211 -Flush Wood Doors ` C. Section 16721 - Fire Alarm and Smoke Detection System: Electrical connection to activate door closers. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturers Qualifications 1. Companies specializing in manufacturing door hardware with minimum three years experience. - B. Regulatory Requirements 1. Fire Door Hardware a a. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and 101 for doors shown, scheduled, or specified to be in a fire rated wall or to receive a UL-label. b. In case of conflict between hardware specified and NFPA requirements, provide type required by NFPA. C. Provide door hardware listed by UL or Warnock Hersey or other testing laboratory approved by code authority having jurisdiction. d. Provide hardware tested in accordance with NFPA 252. 1.5 REFERENCES A. NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURER'S ASSOCIATION (NEMA LB3-1985) - Performance Standards for High Pressure Decorative Laminate. B. AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE (ANSI) 1. ANSI Al 17 Building and Facilities - Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People. 2. ANSI Al 56.1 Butts and Hinges. 3. ANSI Al 56.2 Bored and Preassembled Locks and Latches. 4. ANSI Al56.3 Exit Devices. 5. ANSI Al56.4 Door Controls - Closers. 6. ANSI Al 56.5 Auxiliary Locks & Associated Products. 7. ANSI Al 56.6 Architectural Door Trim. 8. ANSI A156.7 Template Hinge Dimensions. 03879198 04/99 HARDWARE 08700 - 1 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 9. ANSI A156.8 Door Controls - Overhead Holders. 10. ANSI A156.12 Interconnected Locks & Latches. 11. ANSI A156.13 Mortise Locks & Latches. 12. ANSI A156.15 Closer Holder Release Devices. 13. ANSI A156.16 Auxiliary Hardware. 14. ANSI A156.17 Self -Closing Hinges and Pivots. 15. ANSI A156.18 Materials and Finishes. 16. ANSI A156.21 Thresholds 17. ANSI A156.23 Electromagnetic Locks 18. ANSI A156.24 Delayed Egress Locks C. BUILDERS HARDWARE MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION (BHMA) 1. BHMA Directory of Certified Locks & Latches. - 2. BHMA Directory of Certified Door Closers. 3. BHMA Directory of Certified Exit Devices. D. CODE OF FEDERAL REGULATIONS (CFR) 1. 36CFR Part 1 191 - Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) E. DOOR AND HARDWARE INSTITUTE (DHI) 1. DHI-02 Installation Guide for Doors and Hardware. 2. DHI-03 Keying Systems and Nomenclature. 3. DHI-04 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Door and Frames. 4. DHI-05 Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors _ and Frames. 5. DHI A115 Wood Door Preparation Standards F. NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION (NFPA) 1. NFPA 80 Fire Doors and Windows. - 2. NFPA 101 Code for Safety to Life from Fire in Buildings and Structures. 3. NFPA 105 Installation of Smoke and Draft Control Door Assemblies. G. STEEL DOOR INSTITUTE - 1 . SDI-107 Hardware on Steel Doors (Reinforcement and Application). H. Texas Civil Statutes, Article 9102, Architectural Barriers Act, Texas Accessibility Standards (TAS) - 1. TAS 4.13.8 Door Thresholds 2. TAS 4.13.9 Door Hardware 3. TAS 4.13.10 Door Closers I. UNDERWRITER'S LABORATORIES, INC. -' 1. Building Materials Directory. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on specified hardware. - 2. Submit manufacturer's parts lists, templates, and installation instructions. 3. Provide wiring diagrams, electrical characteristics, and product data on all electrically controlled devices. B. Hardware Schedule 1. Include for each item: Quantities; manufacturer's name and catalog numbers; sizes; detail information or catalog cuts; finishes; door and frame size and materials; location and hardware set identification using same opening numbers as indicated on the drawings; lock trim material thicknesses; lock trim material evaluation test results; corresponding ANSI/ BHMA standard type number or function number from manufacturer's catalog if not covered by ANSI/ BHMA; and list of abbreviations. 03879198 HARDWARE 08700 - 2 04/99 F11 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 2. Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. r 3. Indicate lock side of single cylinder doors. 4. Include master cross reference indicating door numbers in numerical sequence and f associated hardware set. C. Keying Schedule 1. Hold a keying conference with the Owner and users to develop a keying schedule. 2. Develop schedule in accordance with DHI-03. 3. Obtain keying system approval before delivering hardware to project. D. Certificates of Compliance 1. Submit certificates of compliance attesting that hardware items conform to the NFPA, CFR and ANSI/ BHMA standards specified. In lieu of certificates, submit statement that proposed hardware items appear in current BHMA directories of certified products. 2. Fire Rated Doors: Submit certificates of compliance, attesting that doors which are ' indicated, scheduled, or specified to be fire rated are fitted with the required hardware (i.e. active latch bolts, self -closing devices) and operate in accordance with the r requirements of NFPA 80 and 101. Identify all such doors on certificates. I E. Closeout Submittals 1 . Submit in accordance with Section 01700. 2. Provide list of actual locations of installed cylinders and their master key code. 3. Submit data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements adjustment methods and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 4. Furnish spare parts data, including a complete list of parts and supplies and source of supply, for locksets, exit devices, closers, electronic locking devices and electro-magnetic closer holder release devices. 5. Submit special tools required for hardware adjustment or control. 6. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish 6 complete copies of maintenance instructions listing routine maintenance procedures, possible breakdowns and repairs, and trouble shooting guides. r- 7. Submit simplified "as installed" diagrams for electronic locking devices and electro- magnetic closer holder release devices. 1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store and handle hardware to site in accordance with provisions of Section 01600. B. Individually package each article of hardware in manufacturer's standard commercial carton or container, and properly mark or label to be readily identifiable with approved hardware schedule. C. Tag or otherwise identify each change key with door for which its cylinder is intended. 1.8 COORDINATION A. Coordinate requirements for hardware to be mounted on metal doors or metal frames between hardware manufacturer and door or frame manufacturer to establish location, reinforcement required, size of holes, and similar details. 1.9 WARRANTY A. Provide five year warranty for door closers. r- 03879198 HARDWARE 08700 - 3 �.. 04/99 E POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.10 EXTRA MATERIAL A. Blank keys: Provide one for each lock scheduled. B. Provide 20 extra cylinder cores for each master key group. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 9616 A. Hinges 1. Bommer; Landrum, SC 2. Hager Hinge Co.; St. Louis, MO 3. McKinney Manufacturing Co.; Scranton, PA 4. Stanley Hardware Division, Stanley Works; New Britain, CT B. Lock _ and Latches 1. Adams Rite Manufacturing Co.; City of Industry, CA 2. Best Lock Corporation; Indianapolis, IN 3. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT ^- 4. PDQ Industries, Inc.; Leoia, PA 5. Sargent Division, ESSEX Industries, Inc.; New Haven, CT 6. Schlage Lock Co.; San Francisco, CA _ C. Push/Pulls 1. Rockwood Manufacturing Co.; Rockwood, PA 2. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA D. Exit Devices 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC 3. Sargent Division ESSEX Industries Inc.; New Haven, CT 4. Von Duprin, Inc.; Indianapolis, IN E. Closers 1. Corbin/Russwin Architectural Hardware; Berlin, CT 2. LCN Closers Division, Schlage Lock Co.; Princeton, IL 3. Norton Door Controls; Charlotte, NC F. Protection Plates 1. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO "- 2. Ralph Wilson Plastics Co.; Temple, TX 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA G. Door Stops/Bumpers 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. Hager Companies; St. Louis, MO 3. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT _ 4. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA H. Door Silencers 1. Glynn -Johnson; Indianapolis, IN 2. H.B. Ives, Harrow Co.; Wallingford, CT 3. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Co.; Los Angeles, CA 1. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 03879198 HARDWARE 04/99 08700 - 4 i POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 2.2 COMPONENTS A. General 1. Provide hardware components as indicated in paragraph HARDWARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section. 2. Schedule is based on products manufactured by McKinney, Corbin/Russwin, LCN, Pemko and Trimco. Components of other manufacturers will be acceptable provided they comply with the ANSI/BHMA standards for Grade 1 products and are listed in the latest edition of the BHMA Directories of certification. 3. Regardless of whether or not the HARDARE SCHEDULE at the end of this section has every door and every component scheduled for each opening, provide all components required to make every opening functional based on hardware scheduled for similar openings and the referenced codes. B. Closers 1. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Size one size larger than manufacturer's published recommendations, but not less than size 5. 2. Size requirements for other closers: Conform to manufacturer's published recommendations, except as specified otherwise. 3. Closers for outswinging exterior doors: Provide parallel arms or top jam mount closers for outswinging exterior doors. 4. Provide narrow projection closers for doors close to a wall so as not to strike wall at 90- degree open position. 5. Operating Pressure: Provide closers with maximum operating pressure as follows: a. Interior Doors: Set closing force on doors accessible to the physically handicapped for a push-pull of 5 pounds applied at knob or handle. b. Exterior Doors: Maximum 8.5 pounds. C. Fire Rated Doors: Set to minimum required to relatch door. C. Protection Plates 1. Fabrication a. Metal Plates (1) Fabricate from 0.062 inch thick 0.050 inch thick stainless steel. (2) Bevel all edges. (3) Countersink screw holes for flat head screws. 2. Size a. Width: 2 inches less in width than door width for single doors and 1 inch less for pairs of doors. b. Height (1) Kick Plates: 10 inches except where bottom rail is less than 10 inches, extend plate extend to within 1/2-inch of panel mold or glass bead. D. Accessories 1. Special Tools: Provide special tools such as spanner and socket wrenches and dogging keys, required to adjust hardware items. E. Fastenings 1. Provide proper type, size, quantity, and finish with each article of hardware. 2. Concrete or Grout Filled Masonry: Provide machine screws and expansion shields. 3. Hollow Masonry: Provide resin filled screen anchors equal to Hilti C7 anchors. 4. Gypsum Wallboard: Provide nylon or derlin expansion anchors equal to Hilti "Togglers". 5. Fastenings exposed to weather and in finished work: brass, bronze, or stainless steel. 6. Provide one-way or tamperproof screws on exterior doors equipped with half or full surface hinges. 03879198 HARDWARE 08700 - 5 r., 04/99 i POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 F. Fire Door Hardware 1. Conform to requirements of NFPA 80 and NFPA 101. G. Finishes 1. Painting of primed surfaces: Specified in Section 09900 - Painting. 2. Conform to ANSI All 56.18 as follows: _ a. Hinges: 626 b. Lock and door trim: 626 C. Door closers: US26D d. Miscellaneous hardware: Finish appearance to match door hardware. -- 3. Door Protection Plates a. Metal Plates: US26D H. Keying 1 . Provide a grand master keying system, an extension of existing keying system. 2. Key locks in sets or subsets. 3. Furnish locks with the manufacturer's standard construction key system. 4. Send keys directly from lock manufacturer to Owner by registered mail or other approved means. 5. Supply keys in following quantities: a. 2 keys for each lock b. 3 master keys C. 3 grand master keys d. 6 construction keys _ e. 2 control keys. 6. Furnish keys to Owner arranged in a container for key control system storage in sets or subsets as scheduled. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that doors and frames are ready to receive work and dimensions are as indicated on ` shop drawings. B. Verify that power supply is available to power operated devices. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. General _ 1. Locate in accordance with DHI 04 and DHI 05 recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames and DHI Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames. 2. Install in accordance with DHI-02. 3. When approved, slight variations in locations or dimensions will be permitted. 4. Attach door control devices for exterior doors such as closers and holders to doors with thru bolts such as sex bolts and nuts. -- 5. Conform to 36CFR Part 1 191 for positioning requirements for handicapped. B. Door -Closing Device 1. Install and adjust in accordance with templates and printed instructions supplied by _ manufacturer. 2. Insofar as practicable, mount closer on room side of door for doors opening to or from halls and corridors. 03879198 HARDWARE 08700 - 6 04/99 _ POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION C. Key Control Storage System 1. Install where directed by Architect. D. Kick Plates 1. Install kick plates on push side of single -acting doors and on both sides of double-acting doors. E. Weatherseals 1. Locate as indicated, snug to door face and fastened in place with color matched metal screws after door and frames have been finish painted. i" 2. Install to exclude light and air flow when door is in closed position. 3. - Screw spacing: as recommended by manufacturer. F. Gasketing r- 1. Install at inside edge of hinge, head and latch side of door frame. r G. Hardware for Labeled Fire Doors 1. Install in accordance with requirements of NFPA 80 AND NFPA 105. n f 4 i 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE HW1 DOORS 01, 11, 13 l EACH DOOR TO HAVE: r 1.5 PR HINGES T2314 US626 MCKINNEY 1 EA LEVER LOCKSET ML2242 LSN CT6 US626 CORBIN r 1 EA CLOSER 4820 US26D LCN 1 EA WALL STOP 1276CCS US26D TRIMCO r' @ 13 ONLY 3 EA SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO !^ HW2 DOORS 03, 04, 05, 06, 07, 08, 09 ` EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1.5 PR HINGES T2314 US626 MCKINNEY 1 EA LEVER LOCKSET ML2251 LSN CT6 US626 CORBIN 1 EA WALL STOP 1276CCS US26D TRIMCO r" 3 SET SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO HW3 r DOOR 10 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1.5 PR HINGES T2314 US626 MCKINNEY r^ 1 1 EA LEVER LOCKSET ML2255 LSN CT6 US626 CORBIN 3 EA SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO HW4 t ' DOOR 02 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1.5 PR HINGES T2314 US626 MCKINNEY I 1 EA LEVEL LATCHSET ML2210 LSN CT6 US626 CORBIN 1 EA WALL STOP 1276CCS US26D TRIMCO 3 EA SILENCERS 1229A TRIMCO 03879198 HARDWARE 08700 • 7 04199 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION HW5 DOOR 16 EACH DOOR TO HAVE: 1.5 PR HINGES T2314 US626 1 EA LEVER LOCKSET ML2224 LSN CT6 US626 1EA CLOSER 4040 US26D 1EA THRESHOLD 158A 1EA WEATHERSEAL PK55BL 1 EA FLOOR STOP 1201-5 US26D END OF SECTION 03879198 HARDWARE 04199 MCKINNEY CORBIN LCN PEMKO PEMKO TRIMCO 08700 - 8 F POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 08800 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass glazing for Sections referencing this Section for products and installation. B. Glass for hollow metal and aluminum frame work. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazed doors and sidelites. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety Glazing Used in Buildings. B. ASCE 7-95 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and other Structures. C. ASTM C920 - Elastomeric Joint Sealants. D. ASTM C1036 - Flat Glass. E. ASTM C1048 - Heat -Treated Flat Glass - Kind HS, Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass. F. ASTM C1085 - Butyl Rubber -Based Solvent - Release Sealants. G. ASTM F1233 - Standard Test Method for Security Glazing Materials and Systems. H. GANA - Glazing Manual. I. GANA - Sealant Manual. J. FS TT-C-00598 - Caulking Compound, Oil and Resin Base Type. K. FS TT-G-410 - Glazing Compound, Sash (Metal) for Back Bedding and Face Glazing (Not for Channel or Stop Glazing). 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Limit glass deflection to 1 /200 flexure limit of glass with full recovery of glazing materials, whichever is less. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Glass: a. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling or installation requirements. b. Provide copy of manufacturer's sample warranty. 2. Glazing Sealants, Compounds and Accessories: Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. 03879198 GLAZING 08800 - 1 r.. 04/99 I L POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special precautions required. C. Samples: 1. Submit four samples, minimum 6 x 6 inch in size, illustrating glass units. Mark each sample to match glazing legend. 2. Submit 3 inch long bead of glazing sealant, color as scheduled. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with GANA Glazing Manual, GANA Sealant Manual, SIGMA and GANA Laminators Safety Glass Association - Standards Manual for glazing installation methods. 1.8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Do not install glazing when ambient temperature is less than 50 degrees F. B. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.10 COORDINATION A. Coordinate the Work with glazing frames, wall openings, and perimeter air and vapor seal to adjacent Work. 1.11 WARRANTY A. Provide Warranties in accordance with Section 01700. B. Ten year manufacturer's warranty: 1. Include coverage for plastic film from coating failure, fading or cracking for 5 years. _ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Glazing 1. G1 - Wired Glass: ASTM C1036, Type II -Wired Glass, 'Flat; Class 1 -Translucent; Form 1; Quality q8 glazing; Mesh, m1 - Diamond; thickness as noted on drawings. B. Glazing Compounds 1. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C1085; Shore A hardness of 10-20 non -skinning. 2. Silicone Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class and Use suitable for glazing application indicated; single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; non -bleeding, non -staining, cured Shore A hardness of 15 to 25. a. Color: As selected. b. Structural Silicone: Provide high -modulus structural silicone glazing materials �- where sealant bonds glass to substrate. 03879198 GLAZING 08800 - 2 04/99 F POLICE SQUARE r SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION L, 9616 C. Glazing Accessories 1 . Setting Blocks: Neoprene or Silicone, 80 - 90 Shore A durometer hardness, length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1 /16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area. 2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene or Silicone, 50 - 60 Shore A durometer hardness, minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self adhesive on one face. 3. Glazing Tape: Preformed butyl compound with integral resilient tube spacing device; 10 - 15 Shore A durometer hardness; coiled on release paper; size as required for glazing channel; black color. 4. Glazing Clips: Manufacturer's standard type. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify that openings for glazing are correctly sized and within tolerance. B. Verify that surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready to receive glazing. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer. C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer's instructions. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. General 1. Comply with combined recommendations of manufacturers of glass, sealants, and other glazing materials, except where more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications. 2. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics. 3. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites. 4. Provide spacers for glass sizes larger than 50 united inches (length plus height) as follows: a. Locate spacers inside, outside, and directly opposite each other. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, except where gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and comply with system performance requirements. b. Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape. 5. Provide edge blocking to comply with requirements of referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. 6. Install elastomeric setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing standard, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead. 03879198 GLAZING 08800 - 3 '.., 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION B. Interior Glazing 1. Dry Method (Tape and Tape) a. Cut glazing tape to length and set against permanent stops, projecting 1 /16 inch above sight line. b. Place setting blocks at location as recommended by glazing manufacturer with edge block no more than 6 inches from corners. C. Rest glazing on setting blocks and push against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane or unit. d. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glazing in same manner described above. e. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. f. Knife trim protruding tape. 3.4 CLEANING A. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces. B. Remove labels after work is complete. C. Clean glass and mirrors. 3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste. Do not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units. END OF SECTION 03879198 GLAZING 08800 - 4 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 09250 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal stud wall framing. B. Framing accessories. C. Acoustical insulation. D. Acoustical sealant. E. Gypsum board. F. Taped and sanded joint treatment. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06100 -Rough Carpentry: Wood framing and furring; Gypsum sheathing applied over wood framing. B. Section 08110 - Steel Frames. C. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. B. ASTM C475 - Joint Compound and Joint Tape for Finishing Gypsum Board. C. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Board. D. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. E. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Board. F. ASTM C840 - Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. G. ASTM C919 - Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. H. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. I. ASTM E90 - Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. J. ASTM E1 19 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. K. FM 1-21 - Fire Resistance of Building Assemblies. L. GA-214 - Levels of Gypsum Board Finish. M. GA-600 - Fire Resistance Design Manual. N. UL - Fire Resistance Directory and Building Material Directory. 0. WHI - Certification Listings. 1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Acoustical Attenuation for [Identified] Interior Partitions: STC 48 in accordance with ASTM E90. 03879198 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 B. Design system to accommodate construction tolerances, deflection of building structural members, and clearances of intended openings. C. Partition Component Sizes and Spacings: Provide steel framing members as indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754 under the following maximum deflection and lateral loading conditions: 1. Interior Partitions a. Maximum Deflection: L/240 at 5 Ibf per sq. ft. b. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 5 Ibf per sq. ft. C. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 7.5 Ibf per sq. ft. _ d. Maximum Deflection: L/120 at 10 Ibf per sq. ft. 2. Ceiling Component Sizes and Spacings: As indicated but not less than that required to comply with ASTM C 754, maximum deflection of L/240 and deadload of 5 Ibf per _ sq. ft. minimum. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Submit following in accordance with provisions of Section 01 300: 1. Product Data: Provide data on metal framing, gypsum board, joint tape, joint compounds. 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Qualifications 1. Applicator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum three years documented experience. B. Regulatory Requirements 1 . Conform to applicable code for fire rated assemblies in conjunction with Section 05400 as follows: a. Fire Rated Partitions: Listed assembly by UL. C. Material Compatability 1 . Obtain finishing materials from either the same manufacturer that supplies gypsum board and other panel products or from a manufacturer acceptable to gypsum board manufacturer. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes. C. Neatly stack gypsum panels flat to prevent sagging. _ D. Handle gypsum board to prevent damage to edges, ends, and surfaces. E. Do not bend or otherwise damage metal corner beads and trim. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions 1. General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and finishing ,— gypsum board to comply with ASTM C840 and with gypsum board manufacturer's recommendations. 03879198 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 2 04199 — r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION W 9616 2. Room Temperatures a. For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing, maintain not less than 40 deg F. b. For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board, maintain not less than 50 deg F for 48 hours prior to application and continuously after until dry. C. Do not exceed 95 deg F when using temporary heat sources. 3. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces, as required, for drying joint treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Celotex Building Products. B. G-P Gypsum Corp. C. National Gypsum Co. D. United.States Gypsum Co. E. Substitutions: In accordance with provisions of Section 01600. 2.2 MATERIALS A. Framing 1. Interior Studs and Tracks a. To Receive Gypsum Board: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 25 gage thick (unless otherwise required by partition height for loading specified), C shape, with knurled faces. Double 20 gage studs at door frame jambs. b. To receive Plaster: ASTM C645; galvanized sheet steel, 22 gage thick unless otherwise indicated, C shape, with knurled faces. 2. Furring, Framing and Accessories: ASTM C645. 3. Interior Channels: ASTM C645; Hot or Cold -rolled steel, ASTM A 525 G-60, hot dipped galvanized coating. B. Gypsum Board 1. Standard Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. 2. Fire Rated Gypsum Board: ASTM C36; fire resistive type, UL rated; 5/8 inch thick except where otherwise scheduled, maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered edges. C. Accessories 1. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C1085; Non -hardening, non -skinning, for use in conjunction with gypsum board; black in concealed locations; color as selected from manufacturer's standard in exposed locations. 2. Trim: a. Corner Beads: ASTM C 1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces; 1-1 /4 inch wide flanges. b. Edge Trim: ASTM C1047; Galvanized steel with knurled faces, types as indicated. 3. Furring Brackets: ASTM C645; galvanized steel. Serrated -arm type, adjustable, minimum thickness of base (uncoated) metal of 0.0329 inch, designed for screw attachment to steel studs and steel rigid furring channels used for furring. 4. Joint Materials: ASTM C475; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, and water. 03879198 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 3 04199 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 5. Wall Texture: Latex based non -aggregated texturing material. 6. Fasteners a. Framing to Substrate: Tie wire, nails, screws and other metal supports, of type and size to suit application; to rigidly secure materials in place. b. Powder -Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: FS FF-P-395 (Rev. C), size and type recommended by framing manufacturer. _ C. Metal Framing to Metal Framing: Manufacturer's standard screw attachments. d. Gypsum Board to Metal Framing -- (1) Screws complying with [ASTM C954.1 [ASTM C1002.1; type as required for substrate indicated. (2) Adhesive: ASTM C557. 7. Tie and Hanger Wire: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1 190 conducted by a qualified testing agency. 8. Expansion Joints: a. Non -rated (1) Joint to be flush with wall line in both wall/wall and corner wall -- applications. (2) Elastomeric gasket, color to be selected from manufacturer's standard colors. _ (3) Equal to MM System Series FSW-100, non rated, and FSWL-100. b. Fire rated (1) Joint to be flush with wall line in both wall/wall and corner wall applications. (2) Elastomeric gasket color to be selected from manufacturer's standard colors. (3) Equal to MM System series FSW-100, 2 hour rated and FSWL-100 2 hour rated. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach comply with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions ,.. affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Metal Studs 1 . Install studs in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Metal Stud Spacing: 16 inches on center unless otherwise indicated. 3. Refer to Drawings for indication of partitions extending through the ceiling to the structure above. Maintain clearance under structural building members to avoid ^ deflection transfer to studs. Provide extended leg ceiling runners. 03879198 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 4 04/99 o° r t r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 4. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs. Install stud tracks on each side of opening, at frame head height, and between studs and adjacent studs. 5. Blocking: Screw wood blocking to studs or bolt or screw steel channels to studs. Install blocking for support of finish carpentry items, wall cabinets, hardware, and other wall mounted equipment. 6. Coordinate installation of anchors, and wood blocking with electrical and mechanical work to be placed within or behind stud framing. B. Metal Wall Furring 1. Erect wall furring for direct attachment to concrete block or plastery walls. 2. Erect furring channels horizontally; space maximum 16 inches on center, not more than 4 inches from floor and ceiling lines and abutting walls. Secure in place on alternate channel flanges at maximum 24 inches on center. 3. Install furring as required for fire resistance ratings indicated. C. Acoustical Accessories 1. Caulk all penetrations of rated partitions by conduit, pipe, duct work, and rough -in boxes, in conformance with ASTM E497. D. Gypsum Board 1. Install gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C840, and manufacturer's instructions. 2. Erect single layer gypsum board horizontal, with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing. 3. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. 4. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal furring or framing. 5. Place control joints consistent with lines of building spaces as indicated. 6. Place corner beads at all exposed external corners. Use longest practical length. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials at all exposed locations. E. Joint Treatment 1. Gypsum Board: Install joint treatment in conformance with ASTM C840 and to level as defined by GA-214 and as scheduled at the end of this Section. F. Texture Finish 1. Walls: Spray apply light finish texture coating in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved sample, to all surfaces scheduled to receive paint. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Finished Gypsum Board Surface from plumb and true Flatness: 1 /8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. 3.4 JOINT TREATMENT SCHEDULE A. Level1: B. Level 2: millwork. C. Level 3: D. Level 5: 03879198 04/99 All gypsum board surfaces concealed above ceilings. All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive ceramic tile and behind fixed All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive spray applied texture. All gypsum board surfaces scheduled to receive paint. END OF SECTION GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 09250 - 5 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION l SECTION 09510 r ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL r 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to Work of this Section. r, 1.2 WORK INCLUDED I A. Suspended metal grid ceiling system. B. Acoustical the and panels. C. Non -fire rated assemblies. D. Perimeter trim. 1.3 RELATED WORK A. Section .15000 - Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. r., B. Section 16515 - Lighting: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E 84-87 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. ASTM E 90-87 Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. C. ASTM E 1 19-83 Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. D. ASTM E 413-87 Determination of Sound Transmission Class. E. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings F. ASTM C636 -Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. G. ASTM E 1264 Standard Classification for Acoustical Ceiling Products H. UL - Underwriter's Laboratories, Building Materials Directory. r 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE .-, A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling panels with five years minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS t. A. Conform to code indicated on drawings for combustibility requirements for materials. B. Provide acoustical panels with the following surface burning characteristics as determined i by testing identical products per ASTM E 84: 1. Flame Spread: Class II, 26-75. r., 2. Smoke Developed: 450 or less. f C. Identify acoustical panels with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting d organization. r 03879198 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 1 04/99 i POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.7 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data 1. Provide product data on metal grid system components, acoustic units, accessories. 2. Submit manufacturer's standard printed installation instructions. _ B. Samples 1. Submit four samples, 12 x 12 inch in size, illustrating material and finish of acoustic units. 2. Submit four samples each, 12 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross — runner, and edge trim. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver acoustical units to project site in original unopened packages. B. Store materials in enclosed space protected against damage from moisture, direct sunlight and surface contamination. C. Handle acoustic units carefully to avoid chipping edges or surface finish. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F., and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation. 1.10 SEQUENCING/SCHEDULING A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust _ generating activities have terminated, and overhead work is completed, tested, and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.11 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide 1 box of each type acoustical ceiling unit specified to Owner. PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. Suspension Systems 1. Grid a. Conformance: ASTM C635, intermediate duty, non -fire rated. b. Type: Exposed T C. Finish: Factory applied white baked enamel. d. Materials: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. 2. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings and hold down clips as required for suspended grid system. B. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with _ maximum deflection of 1 /360. 03879198 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 2 04/99 r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION C. Acoustic Units 1. Conformance: ASTM E1264. a. Size: 24 x 48 inches. b. Thickness: 3/4 inches. C. Type: III d. Form: 1 e. Light Reflectance: 75 percent f. NRC Range:.65 - .75 g. CAC Range: Minimum 40 h. Fire Hazard Classification: None i. Edge Detail: Square j. Surface Color: White PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. B. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. C. Verify that walls and partitions are plumb and straight within specified tolerances. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Suspension System 1. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636, manufacturer's instructions and as supplemented in this Section. 2. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1 /360 maximum. 3. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. 4. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. 5. If metal deck is not supplied with hanger tabs, coordinate the installation of hanger clips during steel deck erection. Provide additional hangers and inserts as required. 6. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. 7. Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. 8. Center system on room axis leaving equal border units no less than 50 percent of acoustical unit size in accordance with reflected ceiling plan. 9. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. 10. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located within 6 inches of each corner; or support components independently. 11. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. 12. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. Fa ` 03879198 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 3 04/99 I E POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION B. Acoustic Units 1. Fit in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. 2. Lay all units one way with pattern parallel to longest room axis. 3. Fit border neatly against abutting surfaces. ' 4. Install level, in uniform plane, and free from twist, warp and dents. 5. Rabbet edges of field cut reveal edge border the to match factory edges. Paint field cut edges to match factory finish. C. Accessories 1. Install hold-down clips to retain panels tight to grid system within 10 ft of an exterior door. 3.3 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1 /8 inch in 10 ft. B. Maximum variation from Plumb of Grid Members Caused by Eccentric Loads: Two degrees maximum. 3.4 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide two full cartons extra quantity of each type acoustic units specified to Contracting Officer at location designated. END OF SECTION 03879198 ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 09510 - 4 04/99 r" t POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION r- SECTION 09653 RESILIENT WALL BASE PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Resilient wall base. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product specified. B. Samples for Verification: In manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each product color and pattern specified. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform work of this Section who has specialized in installing resilient products similar to those required for this Project and with a 5 year record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and color of product specified from one source with resources to provide products of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying the Work. C. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide products with the following fire -test -response characteristics as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Critical Radiant Flux: 0.45 W/sq. cm or greater when tested per ASTM E 648. 2. Smoke Density: Maximum specific optical density of 450 or less when tested per ASTM E 662. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to Project site in manufacturer's original, unopened cartons and containers, each bearing names of product and manufacturer, Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Store products in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained between 50 and 90 deg F 110 and 32 deg C1. C. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours before installation, unless longer conditioning period is recommended in writing by manufacturer. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Maintain a temperature of not less than 70 deg F (21 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C) in spaces to receive resilient products for at least 48 hours before installation, during installation, and for at least 48 hours after installation, unless manufacturer's written recommendations specify longer time periods. After postinstallation period, maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F (13 deg C) or more than 95 deg F (35 deg C). 03879198 RESILIENT WALL BASE 09653 - 1 04/99 r POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION B. Do not install products until they are at the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. C. Coordinate resilient product installation with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, those indicated in the Resilient Wall Base Schedule at the end of Part 3. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products indicated for each designation in the Resilient Wall Base Schedule at the end of Part 3. 2.2 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Vinyl Wall Base: Products complying with FS SS-W-40, Type II and with requirements specified in the Resilient Wall Base and Accessory Schedule. 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient product manufacturer for applications indicated. B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where installation of resilient products will occur, with Installer present, for compliance with manufacturer's requirements, including those for maximum moisture content. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for resilient product installation and comply with requirements specified. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive resilient products. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing resilient products. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 03879198 RESILIENT WALL BASE 09653 - 2 04/99 r F 7 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 3.3 INSTALLATION 9616 A. General: Install resilient products according to manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Apply resilient wall base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required. 1. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned. 2. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. 3. Do not stretch base during installation. 4. Form outside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, without whitening at bends. Shave back of base at points where bends occur and remove strips perpendicular to length of base that are only deep enough to produce a snug fit without removing more than half the wall base thickness. 5. Form inside corners on job, from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible, by cutting an inverted V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce a snug fit to substrate. C. Place resilient products so they are butted to adjacent materials and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of flooring that would otherwise be exposed. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing resilient products: 1. Remove adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by resilient product manufacturers. 2. Sweep or vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly. 3. Do not wash resilient products until after time period recommended by resilient product manufacturer. 4. Damp -mop or sponge resilient products to remove marks and soil. B. Protect resilient products against mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by resilient product manufacturer. 3.5 RESILIENT WALL BASE SCHEDULE A. Rubber Wall Base: Provide rubber wall base complying with the following: 1 . Available Products: As follows: a. Roppe Corporation; 700 Series. 2. Color and Pattern: To be selected. 3. Style: Cove with top -set toe. 4. Minimum Thickness: 1 /8 inch (3.2 mm). 5. Height: 4 inches (101.6 mm). 6. Lengths: 48 inches. 7. Outside Corners: Job formed. 8. Inside Corners: Job formed. 9. Surface: Smooth. END OF SECTION 03879198 RESILIENT WALL BASE 09653 - 3 r, 04/99 1 7 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 09680 CARPET PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Woven carpet. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Wall Base and Accessories" for resilient wall base and accessories installed with carpet. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include installation recommendations for each type of substrate required. B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet. 2. Existing flooring materials to be removed. 3. Carpet type, color, and dye lot. 4. Locations where dye lot changes occur. 5. Seam locations, types, and methods. 6. Type of subfloor. 7. Type of installation. 8. Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point. 9. Pile direction. 10. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 11. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 12. Transition details to other flooring materials. C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each Sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet: 12-inch square Sample. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch long Samples. 3. Carpet Seam: 6-inch Sample. D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. E. Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain -removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet. jn 1, 03879198 CARPET 09680 - 1 �.. 04/99 i POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation -- Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements. B. Fire -Test -Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in Part 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent _ testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling." 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.1, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity." B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and _ ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use. C. Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpet before installing these items. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 WOVEN CARPET A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Bigelow Commercial, Curriculum. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 2. Mohawk Commercial, Supertron. a. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. B. Fiber Content: Nylon. C. Face Construction: Textured loop. D. Stitches: 9.0 per inch. E. Pile Height/Wire:.155 in. F. Surface Pile Weight: 28.0 oz. per sq. in. G. Color Technique: Solution or yarn dyed. H. Density:6,503. I. Warranties: Lifetime Limited Woven Warranties J. Colorfastness: 1. 5 year limited colorfastness to atmospheric contaminants. 2. 10 year limited colorfastness to light. K. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Flammability: a. Flame Resistance: Passes Methenamine Pill Test DOC FF #1-70. b. Flooring Radian Panel: Class I. 2. Smoke Density: 450 or less. 3. Static Propensity: 3.5 k.v. or less. 4. Soil Release: Duratech. 5. Performance Certification: Class III Extra Heavy Commercial. 03879198 CARPET 09680 - 2 04/99 r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION r- 2.2 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES M. •- A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex -modified, hydraulic -cement -based formulation provided by or recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. r B. Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew -resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditions indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and that is recommended by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet performance. Verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for carpet installation and comply with requirements specified. B. Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following: 1. Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performing bond and moisture tests recommended by the following: a. Carpet manufacturer. 2. Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Division 3 Section "Cast -in -Place Concrete" for slabs receiving carpet. 3. Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits. C. Plywood subfloors: Verify that plywood of computer flooring ramp is installed without cracks or defects and is prepared to accept floor finish material. D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet installation. B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates. C. Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methods recommended in writing by the following: 1. Carpet manufacturer. D. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet. After cleaning, examine substrates for moisture, alkaline salts, carbonation, or dust. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. Direct -Glue -Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 8, "Direct Glue -Down Installation." B. Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations for seam locations and direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seams under the door in closed position. rC. Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet. 1 03879198 CARPET 09680 - 3 r.. 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION D. Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet manufacturer. E. Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open -bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings. F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by — repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device. G. Install pattern parallel to walls. 3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner — recommended by carpet manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface. 3. Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face -beater element. — B. Protect installed carpet to comply with CR1 104, Section 15, "Protection of Indoor Installations." C. Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet manufacturer. END OF SECTION 09680 — 03879198 CARPET 04/99 09680 - 4 F I r C F POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: 1. Exposed interior items and surfaces. B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. If the paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface, paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. If the schedules do not indicate color or finish, the Architect will select from standard colors and finishes available. 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts, hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, all sides. C. Do not paint prefinished items, concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces, operating parts, and labels unless noted otherwise. 1. Prefinished items include the following factory -finished components: a. Metal toilet enclosures. b. Metal lockers. C. Unit kitchens. d. Elevator entrance doors and frames. e. Elevator equipment. f. Finished mechanical and electrical equipment. g. Light fixtures. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in the following generally inaccessible spaces: a. Foundation spaces. b. Furred areas. C. Ceiling plenums. d. Utility tunnels. e. Pipe spaces. f. Duct shafts. g. Elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include the following: a. Anodized aluminum. b. Stainless steel. C. Chromium plate. d. Copper. e. Bronze and brass. 4. Operating parts include moving parts of operating equipment and the following: a. Valve and damper operators. b. Linkages. C. Sensing devices. d. Motor and fan shafts. e. Door hardware. 03879198 PAINTING 09900 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 f. Window hardware. g. Switch gear. 5. Labels: Do not paint over Underwriters Laboratories (UL), Factory Mutual (FM), or other code -required labels or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates. D. Alternates: Refer to General and Supplementary Conditions, Section "Alternates" for description r_ of Work in this Section affected by alternates. E. Contractor is responsible to verify all job conditions of base bid and alternates prior to bid opening, materials being ordered, and work being performed. Contractor will provide unit prices per General and Supplementary Conditions for surface repairs prior to substrate and finish coats. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree meter. 2. Eggshell refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 5 and 20 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 3. Satin refers to low -sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 4. Semigloss refers to medium -sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Material Safety Data Sheets: Contractor will provide 3 sets of MSDS for all materials used on _ job site to Architect prior to work being performed. B. Product Data: For each paint system specified. Include block fillers and primers. 1 . Material List: Provide an inclusive list of required coating materials. Indicate each material and cross-reference specific coating, finish system, and application. Identify each material by manufacturer's catalog number and general classification. 2. Manufacturer's Information: Provide manufacturer's technical information, including label analysis and instructions for handling, storing, and applying each coating material proposed for use. 3. Certification by the manufacturer that products supplied comply with local regulations controlling use of volatile organic compounds (VOCs). C. Samples for Verification: Of each color and material to be applied, with texture to simulate actual conditions, on representative Samples of the actual substrate. Priming and finish coats will not be applied until all samples have been approved. 1. Provide stepped Samples, defining each separate coat, including block fillers and primers. Use representative colors and application techniques when preparing Samples for review. Resubmit until required sheen, color, and texture are achieved. 2. Provide a list of materials and applications for each coat of each sample. Label each sample — for location and application. 3. Submit stepped samples on the following substrates for the Architect's review of color and texture only: a. Concrete: Provide two 4-inch (100-mm.) square samples for each color and finish. b. Concrete Masonry: Provide two 4-by-8 inch (100 by 200 mm) samples of masonry, with mortar joint in the center, for each finish and color. C. Painted Wood: Provide two 12-inch (300 mm) square samples of each color and — material on hardboard. d. Stained or Natural Wood: Provide two 4-by-8-inch (100-by-200-mm) samples of natural- or stained -wood finish on actual wood surfaces. 03879198 PAINTING 09900 - 2 04/99 r POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION e. Ferrous Metal: Provide two 4-inch- (100-mm.) square samples of flat metal and two 8-inch- (200-mm-) long samples of solid metal for each color and finish. f. Zinc Coated Metal: Provide two 8-inch (200-mm.) flat samples of solid metal for each color and finish. g. Gypsum Board: Provide two 8-inch (200-mm.) flat samples of material for each color and finish. D. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in the "Quality Assurance" article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience, include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Applicator Qualifications: Engage an experienced applicator who has completed painting system applications similar in material and extent to that indicated for this Project with a record of successful in-service performance. B. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers, primers, and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. C. Benchmark Samples (Mockups): Provide a full -coat benchmark finish sample of each type of coating and substrate required on the Project. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA P5. Duplicate finish of approved prepared samples. 1. The Architect will select one room or surface to represent surfaces and conditions for each type of coating and substrate to be painted. Finish coat application will not proceed until acceptance of the following is approved by the Architect. a. Wall Surfaces: Provide samples on at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m) of wall surface. b. Small Areas and Items: The Architect will designate an item or area as required. 2. Apply coatings in this room or to each surface according to the Schedule or as specified. Provide required sheen, color, and texture on each surface. a. After finishes are accepted, the Architect will use the room or surface to evaluate coating systems of a similar nature. 3. Final approval of colors will be from job -applied samples. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A C. 03879198 04/99 Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original, packages and containers bearing manufacturer's name and label, and the following information: 1. Product name or title of material. 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. 8. VOC content. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well -ventilated area at a minimum ambient temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. Storage space will be available in buildings for contractor's supplies. 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take necessary measures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards resulting from handling, mixing, and application. Contractor will obtain and keep on site approved fire safety equipment for duration of contract. PAINTING 09900 - 3 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS 9616 MO A. Apply water -based paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F (10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent -thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F (7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog, or mist; or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F (3 deg C) above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces. 1. Painting may continue during inclement weather if surfaces and areas to be painted are _ enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. 2. Moisture contents around window opening may exceed the recommended paint manufacturers surface conditions. Verify site conditions before applying under coat and finish coat applications. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products listed in the paint schedules. B. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products in the paint schedules. C. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names, which are shown in parentheses: 1. Devoe & Raynolds Co. (Devoe). 2. Fuller -O'Brien Paints (Fuller). 3. ICI Paints (ICI). v 4. Benjamin Moore & Co. (Moore). 5. PPG Industries, Inc. (PPG). 6. Pratt & Lambert, Inc. (P & Q. 7. Sherwin-Williams Co. (SW). S. NAPA 9. Kelly Moore (KM). 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish -coat materials that are compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and `- application, as demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best -quality paint material of the various coating types specified. Paint -material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. Proprietary Names: Use of manufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion of equivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. C. Colors: To be selected. 03879198 PAINTING 09900 - 4 04/99 i r r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION 9616 A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator and Architect present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance of surfaces and conditions within a particular area. Architect will examine preparation prior to finish coats as necessary. 3. Notify the Architect about anticipated problems using the materials specified over any substrates. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates, machined surfaces, lighting fixtures, and similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of the size or weight of the item, provide surface -applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations in each space or area, reinstall items removed. Reference drawings. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments, clean the substrates of substances that could impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. 1. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not fall on wet, newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. 1. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Provide barrier coats over incompatible finish coats. 3. Cementitious Materials: Prepare concrete, concrete masonry block, cement plaster, and mineral -fiber -reinforced cement panel surfaces to be painted. Remove efflorescence, chalk, dust, dirt, grease, oils, and release agents. Roughen as required to remove glaze. If hardeners or sealers have been used to improve curing, use mechanical methods of surface preparation. a. Use mechanical methods if recommended by paint manufacturer. b. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces by performing appropriate tests. If surfaces are sufficiently alkaline to cause the finish paint to blister and burn, correct this condition before application. Do not paint surfaces where moisture content exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions. C. Clean concrete floors to be painted with a 5 percent solution of muriatic acid or other etching cleaner. Flush the floor with clean water to remove acid, neutralize with ammonia, rinse, allow to dry, and vacuum before painting. 4. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances with scrapers, mineral spirits, sandpaper, and tack cloths, as required. Sand all surfaces smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small, dry, seasoned knots, and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. When transparent'finish is required, sand existing finish to insure adequate adhesion. Apply oil stain in appropriate color to match over scratches through existing finish. Fill holes and imperfections. 03879198 04/99 PAINTING 09900 5 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 5. Ferrous Metals: Clean ungalvanized ferrous -metal surfaces that have not been shop coated; remove oil, grease, dirt, loose mill scale, and other foreign substances. Use solvent or mechanical cleaning methods that comply with the Steel Structures Painting Council's (SSPC) recommendations. a. Treat bare or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. b. Touch up bare areas that have been damaged. Wire -brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer, and touch up with primer as specified. 6. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum-based solvents so surface is free of oil and surface contaminants. Remove pretreatment from galvanized sheet metal fabricated from coil stock by mechanical methods. D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying paint in a clean condition, free of foreign "- materials and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film r. and strain material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 4. Only mix material in approved storage area. E. Tinting: Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to simplify identification of each coat when multiple coats of the same material are applied. Tint undercoats to match the color of the finish coat, but provide sufficient differences in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat. 3.3 APPLICATION A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied. 1 . Paint colors, surface treatments, and finishes are indicated in' the schedules. 2. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, chalk dust, or conditions detrimental to formation of a durable paint film. 3. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers and substrates used. 4. The term "exposed surfaces" includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures, convector covers, covers for finned -tube radiation, grilles, and similar components are in -- place. Extend coatings in these areas, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired protection. 5. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as similar exposed surfaces. 6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts with a flat, nonspecular black paint where visible through registers or grilles. 7. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 8. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated, or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. 1. The number of coats and the film thickness required are the same regardless of application method. Do not apply succeeding coats until the previous coat has cured as recommended r. by the manufacturer. If sanding is required to produce a smooth, even surface according to manufacturer's written instructions, sand between applications. 2. If undercoats, stains, or other conditions show through final coat of paint, apply additional coats until paint film is of uniform finish, color, and appearance. Give special attention to ensure edges, corners, crevices, welds, and exposed fasteners receive a dry film thickness equivalent to that of flat surfaces. 03879198 PAINTING 09900 - 6 04199 r"+ POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 3. Allow sufficient time between successive coats to permit proper drying. Do not recoat surfaces until paint has dried to where it feels firm, does not deform or feel sticky under moderate thumb pressure, and where application of another coat of paint does not cause the undercoat to lift or lose adhesion. Refer to manufacturers recommended drying times. C. Application Procedures: Apply paints and coatings by brush, roller, spray, or other applicators according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Brushes: Use brushes best suited for the type of material applied. Use brush of appropriate size for the surface or item being painted. 2. Rollers: Use rollers of carpet, velvet back, or high -pile sheep's wool as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. 3. Spray Equipment: Use airless spray equipment with orifice size as recommended by the manufacturer for the material and texture required. D. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. E. Mechanical and Electrical Work: Painting of mechanical and electrical work in occupied spaces shall be painted to match surrounding walls and/or ceilings. F. Mechanical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Piping, pipe hangers, and supports. 2. Ductwork. 3. Insulation. 4. Accessory items. G. Electrical items to be painted include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Conduit wiremold and fittings. 2. Switchgear. 3. Panelboards, if already painted. H. Block Fillers: Apply block fillers to concrete masonry block, whether previously painted or not, at a rate to ensure complete coverage with pores filled. 1. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer, to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears, to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. J. Pigmented (Opaque) Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth, opaque surface of uniform finish, color, appearance, and coverage. Cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. K. Transparent (Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass -smooth surface film of even luster. Provide a finish free of laps, runs, cloudiness, color irregularity, brush marks, orange peel, nail holes, or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. L. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture, and coverage. Remove, refinish, or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. The Owner reserves the right to invoke the following test procedure at any time and as often as the Owner deems necessary during the period when paint is being applied: 1. The Owner will engage the services of an independent testing agency to sample the paint material being used. Samples of material delivered to the Project will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in the presence of the Contractor. 03879198 PAINTING 09900 - 7 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION I • • 2. The testing agency will perform appropriate tests for the following characteristics as required by the Owner: a. Quantitative material analysis. b. Abrasion resistance. C. Apparent reflectivity. d. Flexibility. e. Washability. f. Absorption. g. Accelerated weathering. h. Dry opacity. i. Accelerated yellowness. j. Recoating. k. Skinning. I. Color retention. M. Alkali and mildew resistance. 3. The Owner may direct the Contractor to stop painting if test results show material being used does not comply with specified requirements. The Contractor shall remove noncomplying paint from the site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces previously coated with the rejected paint. If necessary, the Contractor may be required to remove rejected paint from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with specified paint, the 2 coatings are incompatible. 3.5 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, sweep all floors in work areas, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint materials. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint -spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Protect work, whether being painted or not, against damage by painting including all office equipment. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as approved by Architect. B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs and/or barriers to protect newly painted finishes. 3.7 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Concrete and Masonry (Other than Concrete Masonry Units): Provide the following paint systems over interior concrete and brick masonry surfaces: 1. Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats minimum over a primer to acquire uniform finish. a. Filler: Alkali -resistant, acrylic -latex, interior filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 522-Acrylic Block Filler (smooth). b. Primer: Alkali -resistant, acrylic -latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mil (0.028 mm) or equal approved by Architect. 0) Kelly Moore: 970-100 Acry-Plex Vinyl Wall Sealer. 12) SW: ElasToArmic. 03879198 PAINTING 09900 - 8 04/99 r- I,_ ( r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION B. C. A 9616 C. First and Second Coats: Low -luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 1640-111 Acry-Plex Latex Eggshell Enamel. Concrete Masonry Units: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete masonry block units: 1. Low -Luster, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats minimum over a block filler to acquire uniform finish. Block filler must be used over previously painted concrete masonry units. a. Block Filler: High-performance, latex -based, block filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 8.0 mils (0.21 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 522-Acrylic Block Filler (Smooth). b. Primer: Alkali -resistant, acrylic -latex, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mil (0.025 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 970-100 Acry-Plex Vinyl Wall Sealer. (2) SW: ElasToArmic. C. First and Second Coats: Low -luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 1640-111 Acry-Plex Latex Eggshell Enamel. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: 1. Low -Luster, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats minimum over a primer to acquire uniform finish. a. Primer: Latex -based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 970-100 Acry-Plex Vinyl Wall Sealer. (2) SW: ElasToArmic. b. First and Second Coats: Low -luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 1640-111 Acry-Plex Latex Eggshell Enamel. (2) Kelly Moore: 1655 Kel-Cote Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel. Plaster: Provide the following finish systems over interior plaster surfaces: 1. Low -Luster, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats minimum over a primer to acquire uniform finish. a. Primer: Alkali -resistant, alkyd- or latex -based, interior primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 970-100 Acry-Plex Vinyl Wall Sealer. (2) SW: ElasToArmic. b. First and Second Coats: Low -luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 1640-1 1 1 Acry-Plex Latex Eggshell Enamel. (2) Kelly Moore: 1655 Kel-Cote Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel. Vinyl Wall Covering: Provide the following paint finish system over Vinyl Wall Covering: 1. Low -luster, acrylic -enamel finish: 2 finish coats minimum over vinyl sealer and primer to acquire uniform finish. 03879198 PAINTING 09900 - 9 04/99 1 i POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION W W 9616 a. Surface Prep: Check all seams and edges for proper adhesion of vinyl wall covering. Apply vinyl edge sealer to any loose conditions following manufacturers recommended procedure. b. Sealer: Rapid drying interior sealer as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.6 mils (0.040 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 935 Stain -Lock Sealer C. Primer: Latex -based, interior primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.1 mils (0.028 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 970-100 Acry-Plex Vinyl Wall Sealer. (2) SW: ElasToArmic. d. First and Second Coats: Low -luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.0 mils (0.076 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 1640-1 1 1 Acry-Plex Latex Eggshell Enamel. (2) Kelly Moore: 1655 Kel-Cote Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel. Woodwork and Hardboard: Provide the following paint finish systems over interior wood surfaces: 1 . Low Luster, Alkyd -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats minimum over vinyl sealer to acquire uniform finish. a. Primer: Alkyd or latex -based, interior enamel undercoater applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.1 mils (0.053 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 220 Oil Alkyd Base Exterior Primer (Flat). b. First and Second Coats: Odorless, low luster, alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.4 mils (0.086 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 1620-1 1 1 Kel-Cote Alkyd Eggshell Enamel. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over interior woodwork: 1. Alkyd -Based, Varnish Finish: 2 finish coats minimum of an alkyd or urethane -based, clear - satin varnish over existing stained wood. Use stain to tone striped wood for uniform appearance as approved by architect. a. First and Second Finish Coats: Alkyd -based or polyurethane varnish, as recommended by the manufacturer, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. (1) Devoe: 4600 WoodWorks Alkyd Satin Varnish. (2) Fuller: 653-01 EPA Compliant Clear Polyurethane Satin Finish. (3) ICI: 82 Satin Sheen Woodmaster Polyurethane Clear Finishes Varnish. (4) Moore: Benwood Satin Finish Varnish #404. (5) PPG: 77-7 Rez Varnish, Interior Satin Oil Clear. (6) P & L: H24 38 Clear Finish Gloss. (7) S-W: Oil Base Varnish, Gloss A66V91. (8) Absolute Coatings: Last-N-Last, Clear Polyurethane Wood Finish Satin. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: 1. Low -Luster, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats minimum over vinyl sealer to acquire uniform finish. Only brush work is acceptable. a. Primer: Quick -drying, rust -inhibitive, alkyd -based or epoxy -metal primer, as recommended by the manufacturer for this substrate, applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.5 mils (0.038 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 1710-Kel-Guard Red Oxide Primer. 03879198 PAINTING 09900 - 10 04/99 PC POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION b. First and Second Coats: Low -luster (eggshell or satin), acrylic -latex, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.4 mils (0.086 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 1625 Kel-Cote Alkyd Semi -Gloss Enamel. Zinc -Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc -coated metal: 1. Low -Luster, Acrylic -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats minimum over a rust -inhibitive primer to acquire uniform finish. a. Primer: Two component, self -etching filler. (1) NAPA: 8847-Trio Prime Etching Filler; 8848-Trio Prime (Activator). b. First and Second Coats: Low -luster (eggshell or satin), alkyd, interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.4 mils (0.086 mm) or equal approved by Architect. (1) Kelly Moore: 1620-1 1 1 Kel-Cote Alkyd Eggshell Enamel. Concrete Floor: Provide the following finish systems over interior concrete floors. 1. Alkyd -Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats minimum over thinned coat primer to acquire a uniform finish. J. t r t 03879198 04/99 i t 9616 a. Surface Prep: Remove loose paint and use etching solution of muratic acid. b. Primer: Alkyd -enamel finish thinned 20% as recommended by manufacturer or equal approved by architect. 1) Kelly Moore: 1300 Industrial Maintenance Alkyd Floor Enamel. C. First and Second Coats: Gloss, alkyd -enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 3.6 mil (0.091 mm) or equal approved by architect. 11 Kelly Moore: 1300 Industrial Maintenance Alkyd Floor Enamel. END OF SECTION 09900 PAINTING 09900 - 11 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 10260 HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Provisions including General Conditions, Supplementary General Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to the work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Corner guards. B. End -wall guards. C. Handrails. 1.3 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board Systems: Wall construction. 1.4 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Corner guards to resist lateral impact force of 100 Ibs at any point without permanent damage. B. Installed handrails and attachments shall resist lateral forces of 75 Ibs at any point without damage or permanent set. C. Installed handrail component assembly shall support vertical live load of 100 lb/lineal ft without deflection not to exceed 1 /50 of span between supports. 1.6 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings 1. Provide plans indicating locations for corner guards and 'end -wall guards. Indicate attachment details and recommended spacing for all components. 2. Provide plans and elevations indicating locations of handrails. Indicate attachment details and recommended spacing of all components. B. Product Data 1. Indicate physical dimensions, system features, wall mounting brackets with mounting measurements, anchorage details, and rough -in measurements. C. Certificate 1. Certify that products meet or exceed flame spread rating of 25 and smoke development of 450 in accordance with ASTM E84 for surface finish. 03879198 HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260 - 1 04/99 t POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to 36 CFR 1191, and the Texas Accessibility standards requirements for the physically challenged. 1.8 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated on Drawings. 1.9 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work under provisions of Section 01039. r B. Coordinate work with wall or partition Sections for installation of concealed blocking or anchor devices. f.+ PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Construction Specialties, Inc.; Muncy, PA. B. Institution Product Corp.; Muskego, WI. — 2.2 COMPONENTS A. Corner Guard i 1. Cover: Molded vinyl/acrylic, .078 inch thick, 3 inch wide with 1 /4 inch corner radius. 2. Cover Retainer:.063 inch thick continuous extruded aluminum. 3. End Caps: Molded, high -impact type, color to match corner guard. 4. Finish: All exposed vinyl/acrylic to have clear finish. B. End Wall Guard 1. Cover: Molded vinyl/acrylic, .078 inch thick x width of finish wall with 1 /4 inch corner radiuses. 2. Cover Retainer:.063 inch thick continuous extruded aluminum. 3. Cushion: Manufacturer's standard shop applied sponge neoprene. 4. End Caps: Molded, high -impact type, color to match corner guard. 5. Finish: All exposed vinyl/acrylic to have clear finish. C. Accessories 1. Mounting Brackets and Attachment Hardware: Appropriate to component and substrate. 2.3 FABRICATION A. Fabricate components with tight joints, corners and seams. B. Predrill holes for attachment. C. Form end trim closure by capping and finishing smooth. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Verify site conditions under provisions of Section 01039. B. Verify that rough -in for components are correctly sized and located. 03879198 HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260 - 2 04/99 ti POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION I� 3.2 INSTALLATION r f 9616 A. Install components in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb, secured rigidly in position. B. Position corner guard flush with finished floor, extend to 48 inches high. C. Install end -wall guards full height from floor to ceiling. D. Install vinyl cove base support at base of end -wall guards. 3.3 SCHEDULE A. Corner Guards 1. All exposed exterior wall corners, unless noted otherwise. B. End Caps 1. All exposed wall ends, or cased openings, unless noted otherwise. END OF SECTION 03879198 HANDRAILS AND CORNER GUARDS 10260 - 3 *^ 04/99 I SECTION 15000 - GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 SPECIAL NOTE A. The Architectural and Structural Plans and Specifications, including the supplements issued thereto, Information to Bidders, and other pertinent documents issued by the Architect, are a part of these specifications and the accompanying mechanical and electrical plans, and shall be complied with in every respect. All the above is included herewith, will be issued separately or is on file at the Architect's office, and shall be examined by all bidders. Failure to comply shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility or be used as a basis for additional compensation due to omission of drawings. B. Where the Supplementary General Conditions conflict with the General Conditions, the Supplementary General Conditions shall govern. 1.2 CHECKING DOCUMENTS A. The drawings and the specifications are numbered consecutively. The Contractor shall check the drawings and specifications thoroughly and shall notify the Architect of any discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages. Upon notification, the Architect will y_ promptly provide the Contractor with any missing portions of the drawings or specifications. No discrepancies or omissions of sheets or pages of the contract documents will relieve the Contractor of his duty to provide all work required by the complete contract documents. 1.3 GENERAL A. In general, the lines and ducts to be installed by the various trades under these �— specifications shall be rain as indicated, as specified herein, as required by particular s conditions at the site, and as required to conform to the generally accepted standards as to complete the work in a neat and satisfactorily workable manner. The following is a general outline concerning the running of various lines and ducts and is to be excepted where the drawings or conditions at the building necessitate deviating from these standards. ' B. All piping, conduit and ductwork for the mechanical and electrical trades shall be concealed in chases in finished areas, except as indicated on the drawings. Horizontal lines run in areas that have ceilings shall be run concealed in those ceilings, unless otherwise specifically indicated or directed. ,.,,. C. Piping, ductwork, conduits and raceways may be run exposed in machinery and equipment spaces, where serving as connections to motors and equipment items in finished rooms where exposed connections are required, and elsewhere as indicated on the drawings or required. D. All conduits in any space where they are exposed shall run parallel with the building walls. They shall enter the concealed areas perpendicular with the walls, ceilings or floors. Fittings shall be used where necessary to comply with this requirement. E. The Contractor shall thoroughly acquaint himself with the details of the construction and finishes before submitting his bid as no allowances will be made because of the Contractor's unfamiliarity with these details. Place all inserts in masonry walls while they i r GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 1 i are under construction. All concealed lines shall be installed as required by the pace of the general construction to precede that general construction. F. The mechanical and electrical plans do not give exact details as to elevations of lines and ducts, exact locations, etc., and do not show all the offsets, control lines, pilot lines and other installation details. The Contractor shall carefully lay out his work at the site to conform to the architectural and structural conditions, to provide proper grading of lines, to avoid all obstruction, to conform to details of installation supplied by the manufacturers of the equipment to be installed, and thereby to provide an integrated, satisfactorily operating installation. G. The electrical plans show diagrammatically the locations of the various electrical outlets and apparatus and the method of circuiting and controlling them. Exact locations of these outlets and apparatus shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail - drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections, and in all cases shall be subject to the approval of the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to make any reasonable change in location of any outlet or apparatus before installation (within 10 feet of location shown on drawings) or after installation if an obvious conflict exists, without additional cost to the Owner. H. The mechanical plans do not give exact locations of outlets, fixtures, equipment items, etc. The exact location of each item shall be determined by reference to the general plans and to all detail drawings, equipment drawings, roughing -in drawings, etc., by measurements at the building, and in cooperation with other sections. Minor relocations necessitated by the conditions at the site or as directed by the Architect shall be made without any additional cost accruing to the Owner. I. The Contractor shall be responsible for the proper fitting of his material and apparatus into the space. Should the particular equipment which any bidder proposes to install require other space conditions than those indicated on the drawings, he shall arrange for such space with the Architect before submitting his bid. Should changes become necessary on account of failure to comply with this clause, the Contractor shall make such necessary changes at his (the Contractor's) own expense. J. The Contractor shall submit working scale drawings of all his apparatus and equipment which in any way varies from these specifications and plans, which shall be checked by the Architect before the work is started, and interferences with the structural conditions shall be corrected by the Contractor before the work proceeds. — K. Order of precedence shall be observed in laying out the pipe, ductwork, material, and conduit in order to fit the material into the space above the ceiling and in the chases and walls. The following order shall govern: 1. Items affecting the visual appearance of the inside of the building such as lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, outlets, panelboards, etc. Coordinate all items to avoid conflicts at the site. 2. Lines requiring grade to function such as sewers. 3. Large ducts and pipes with critical clearances. 4. Conduit, water lines, and other lines whose routing is not critical and whose function would not be impaired by bends and offsets. L. Piping, ducts, and conduits serving outlets on items of equipment shall be run in the most appropriate manner. Where the equipment has built-in chases, the lines shall be contained therein. Where the equipment is of the open type, the lines shall be run as close as possible to the underside of the top and in a neat and inconspicuous manner. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 2 M. Exceptions and inconsistencies in plans and specifications shall be brought to the Architect's attention before the contract is signed. Otherwise, the Contractor shall be responsible for any and all changes and additions that may be necessary to accommodate his particular apparatus, material, or equipment. N. The Contractor shall distinctly understand that the work described herein and shown on the raccompanying drawings shall result in a finished and working job, and any item required to accomplish this intent shall be included whether specifically mentioned or not. .0. Each bidder shall examine the plans and specifications for the General Construction. If these documents show any item requiring work under Division 15 or 16 and that work is i not indicated on the respective "M", "P" & "E" drawings, he shall notify the Architect in sufficient time to clarify before bidding. If no notification is received, the Contractor is {^ assumed to require no clarification, and shall install the work as indicated on the General Plans in accordance with the specifications. 1.4 DIMENSIONS A. Before ordering any material or doing any work, the Contractor shall verify all dimensions, including elevations, and shall be responsible for the correctness of the same. No extra charge or compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements indicated on the drawings. Any difference which may be found shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work. 1.5 INSPECTION OF SITE A. The accompanying plans do not indicate completely the existing mechanical and electrical installations. The bidders for the work under these sections of the specifications shall inspect the existing installations and thoroughly acquaint themselves with conditions to be met and the work to be accomplished in removing and modifying the existing work, and in installing the new work in the present building and underground serving to and from that structure. Failure to comply with this shall not constitute grounds for any additional payments in connection with removing or modifying any part of the existing installations and/or installing any new work. 1.6 ELECTRICAL WIRING A. All electric wiring of every character, both for power supply, for pilot and control, for temperature control, for communications, etc. will be done under Division 16 of these specifications. The Contractor for each section shall erect all his motors in place ready for connections. The Contractor, under Division 16, shall mount all the starters and controls, furnishing the supporting structures and any required outlet boxes. B. Every electrical current consuming device furnished as a part of this project, or furnished by the Owner and installed in this project, shall be completely wired up under Division 16. Verification of exact location, method of connection, number and size of wires required, voltage requirements, and phase requirements is the responsibility of the Contractor under Division 16. If conflicts occur between the drawings and the actual requirements, actual requirements shall govern. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 3 1.7 MOTORS AND CONTROLS A. All motors furnished under any of the several sections of these specifications shall be of recognized manufacture, of adequate capacity for the loads involved and wound for the current characteristics shown on the electrical drawings. All motors shall conform to the standards of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association as shown in their latest publications. They shall further be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. B. Unless otherwise noted, the Contractor under Division 16 shall furnish each motor with a starter and all controls of the types specified or required. C. These starters shall be of the totally enclosed type, of capacity rating within the required limits of the motors which they are to serve, shall be suitable for the motor current characteristics and shall provide thermal overload protection. All starters shall be standard of manufacture and performance of the National Electrical Manufacturers' Association. They further shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provide overload protection in each phase wire. 1.8 PROGRESS OF WORK A. The Contractor shall keep himself fully informed as to the progress of the work and do his work at the proper time without waiting for notification from the Architect or Owner. 1.9 MANUFACTURER'S DIRECTIONS A. All manufactured articles shall be applied, installed and handled as recommended by the manufacturer. 1.10 MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP A. All materials shall be new unless otherwise specified and of the quality specified. Materials shall be free" from defects. All materials of a type for which the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. have established a standard shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and shall bear their label. B. Wherever the make of material or apparatus required is not definitely specified, the Contractor shall submit a sample to the Architect before proceeding. C. The Architect reserves the right to call for samples of any item of material offered in — substitution, together with a sample of the specified material, when, in the Architect's �. opinion, the quality of the material and/or the appearance is involved and it is deemed that an evaluation of the two materials may be better made by visual inspection. This shall be limited to lighting fixtures, wiring devices, plumbing brass, grilles, registers, ceiling outlets and similar items and shall not be applicable to mqjor manufacturers' items of equipment. D. The Contractor shall be responsible for transportation of his materials to and on the job, and shall be responsible for the storage and protection of these materials and work until the final acceptance of the job. E. The Contractor shall furnish all necessary scaffolding, tackle, tools and appurtenances of all kinds, and all labor required for the safe and expeditious execution of his contract. F. The workmanship shall in all respects be of the highest grade and all construction shall be done according to the best practice of the trade. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 4 i 1.11 SUBSTITUTION OF MATERIAL A. Where a definite material or only one manufacturer's name is mentioned in these specifications, it has been done in order to establish a standard. The product of the particular manufacturer mentioned is of satisfactory construction and any substitution must be of quality as good as or better than the named article. No substitution shall be made without review by the Architect, who will be the sole judge of equality. B. Within 30 days of being awarded the Contract for any section or sections of the work under this heading, the Contractor shall submit for approval a complete list of the materials he proposes to use. This list shall give manufacturers' names and designations corresponding to each and every item and the submission shall be accompanied by complete descriptive literature and/or any supplementary data, drawings, etc., necessary to give full and complete details. If the material is not submitted within 30 days of the contract signing, the Contractor shall furnish the specified materials. C. Should a substitution be accepted under the provisions of the conditions of these specifications, and should this substitute prove to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service for which it is intended within the guarantee period, the Contractor who originally requested the substitution shall replace the substitute material with the specified material. 1.12 SHOP DRAWINGS A. Wherever shop drawings are called for in these specifications, they shall be furnished by the Contractor for the work involved after review by the Architect as to the make and type of material and in sufficient time so that no delay or changes will be caused. This is done in order to facilitate progress on the job and failure on the part of the Contractor to comply shall render him liable to stand the expense of any and all delays, changes in construction, etc., occasioned by his failure to provide the necessary details. Also, if the Contractor fails to comply with this provision, the Architect reserves the right to go directly to the manufacturer he selects and secure any details he might deem necessary and should there be any charges in connection with this, they shall be borne by the Contractor. B. Shop drawings will be reviewed by the Architect for general compliance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the contract documents. Review by the Architect and any action by the Architect in marking shop drawings is subject to the requirements of the entire contract documents. Contractor will be held responsible for quantities, dimensions which shall be confirmed and correlated at the job site, fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordination of all trades and the satisfactory performance of his work. C. Shop drawings submitted shall not consist of manufacturers' catalogues or tear sheets therefrom that contain no indication of the exact item offered. Rather, the submission of individual items shall designate the exact item offered and shall clearly identify the item with the project. D. All shop drawings shall be submitted at one time and shall consist of a bound catalogue of all shop drawings under each section, properly indexed and certified that they have been checked by the Contractor. E. The omissions of any material from the shop drawings which has been shown on the contract drawings or specified, even though reviewed by the Architect, shall not relieve the Contractor from furnishing and erecting same. f.- GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 5 1 l 1.13 PROTECTION OF APPARATUS A. The Contractor shall at all times take such precautions as may be necessary to properly -� protect his new apparatus from damage. This shall include the erection of all required temporary shelters to adequately protect ,any apparatus stored in the open on the site, the cribbing of any apparatus above the floor of the construction, and the covering of apparatus in the incompleted building with tarpaulins or other protective covering. Failure on the part of the Contractor to comply with the above to the entire satisfaction of the Architect will be sufficient cause for the rejection of the pieces of apparatus in question. 1.14 PERMITS, FEES, ETC A. The Contractor under each section of these specifications shall arrange for a permit from the local authority. The Contractor shall arrange for all utility services, including sewer, water, gas and electric services as applicable. If any charges are made by any of the utility companies due to the work on this project, the Contractor shall pay these charges, including charges for metering, connection, street cutting, etc. The Contractor shall pay for any inspection fees or other fees and charges required by ordinance, law, codes and these specifications. 1.15 TESTING A. The Contractor under each division shall at his own expense perform the various tests as specified and required by the Architect and as required by the State and local authorities. The Contractor shall furnish all fuel and materials necessary for making tests. 1.16 LAWS, CODES AND ORDINANCES v A. All work shall be executed in strict accordance with all local, state and national codes, ordinances and regulations governing the particular class of work involved, as interpreted by the inspecting authority. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final execution of the work under this heading to suit those requirements. Where these specifications and the accompanying drawings conflict with these requirements, the Contractor shall report the matter to the Architect, shall prepare any supplemental drawings required illustrating how the work may be installed so as to comply and, on approval, make the changes at no cost to the Owner. On completion of the various portions of the work the installation shall be tested by the constituted authorities, approved and, on completion of the work, the Contractor shall obtain and deliver to the Owner a final certificate of acceptance. 1.17 TERMINOLOGY A. Whenever the words "furnish", "provide", "furnish and install," "provide and install", and/or similar phrases occur, it is the intent that the materials and equipment described be furnished, installed and connected under this Division of the Specifications, complete for operation unless specifically noted to the contrary. B. Where a material is described in detail, listed by catalogue number or otherwise called for, it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install the material. C. The use of the word "shall" conveys a mandatory condition to the contract. D. "This section" always refers to the section in which the statement occurs. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 6 Zii } i E. "The project" includes all work in progress during the construction period. F. In describing the various items of equipment, in general, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical or similar items. 1.18 COOPERATION AND CLEANING UP A. The contractor for the work under each section of these specifications shall coordinate his work -with the work described in all other sections of the specifications to the end that, as a whole, the job shall be a finished one of its kind, and shall carry on his work in such a manner that none of the work under any section of these specifications shall be handicapped, hindered or delayed at any time. B. At all times during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall keep the premises clean and free of unnecessary materials and debris. The Contractor shall, on direction at any time from the Architect, clear any designated areas or area of materials and debris. On completion of any portion of the work, the Contractor shall remove from the premises all tools and machinery and all debris occasioned by the work, leaving the premises free of all obstructions and hindrances. r 1.19 COORDINATION OF TRADES t A. The Contractor shall be responsible for resolving all coordination required between trades. For example, items furnished under Division 15 which require electrical connections shall i be coordinated with Division 16 for: 1. Voltage 2. Phase 3. Ampacity 4. No. and size of wires 5. Wiring diagrams i 6. Starter size, details and location 7. Control devices and details B. Items furnished under various sections which require plumbing connections shall be coordinated for services, pressure, size and location of connections, type of fuel, clearances for service, auxiliary devices required, etc. r; C. Items requiring insulation shall be fully insulated and that insulation shall be checked # against manufacturer's directions and job requirements for suitability, coverage, thickness and finish. D. Items installed in/on finished ceilings shall be coordinated with the ceiling construction. The Contractor under each section shall conform to the reflected ceiling plan and shall secure details and/or samples of the ceiling materials as necessary to insure compatibility. Any device not conforming to this requirement shall be replaced by the Contractor at his expense. E. All items specified under Divisions 15 and 16 shall be installed tight, plumb, level, square and symmetrically placed in relation to the work of other trades. 1.20 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. The Contractor for work specified under each section shall perform all structural and general construction modifications and cut all openings through either roof, walls, floors or ceilings required to install all work specified under that section or to repair any defects GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 7 that appear up to the expiration of the guarantee. All of this cutting shall be done under the supervision of the Architect and the Contractor shall exercise due diligence to avoid cutting openings larger than required or in wrong locations. Verify the scope of this work at the site and in cooperation with all other trades before bidding. B. No cutting shall be done to any of the structural members that would tend to lessen their strength, unless specific permission is granted by the Architect to do such cutting. C. The Contractor for work under each section shall be responsible for the patching of all openings cut to install the work covered by that section and to repair the damage resulting from the failure of any part of the work installed hereunder. D. Before bidding, the Contractor shall review and coordinate the cutting and patching required under the respective section with all trades. E. In all spaces where new work under Division 15 and 16 is installed and no other alteration or refinishing work is shown or called for, existing floors, walls and ceilings shall be restored to match existing conditions. All cutting and patching shall be done by workmen skilled in the affected trade. F. Where openings are cut through masonry walls, the Contractor under each respective section shall provide and install lintels or other structural supports to protect the remaining masonry and adequate support shall be provided during the cutting operation to prevent any damage to the masonry occasioned by the operation. All structural members, supports, etc. shall be of the size, shape, and installed as directed by the Architect. 1.21 PAINTING A. Painting for Divisions 15 and 16 shall be as follows: 1. If the factory finish on any apparatus or equipment is marred, it shall be touched up and then given one coat of half -flat -half -enamel, followed by a coat of machinery enamel of a color to match the original. Paint factory primed surfaces. 2. Paint all exposed pipe, conduit, boxes, cabinets, hangers and supports, and �- miscellaneous metal. 3. Paint all exposed sheet metal. 4. Paint all insulated surfaces exposed to view, including piping, equipment, etc. -- Surfaces until a smooth, non grainy surface is obtained. B. Generally, painting is required on all surfaces such that no exposed bare metal or — insulation surface is visible. 1.22 SEALING A. The Contractor installing pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., shall seal all spaces between pipes and/or sleeves where they pierce walls, partitions or floors by packing fire resistant rope and fire resistant cement. The packing shall effect a complete fire and/or air seal where pipes, conduits, ducts, etc., pierce walls, floors or partitions. 1.23 ACCESS PANELS A. Wherever mechanical and/or electrical equipment is installed and where future access is required through either walls or ceilings and such cannot be obtained through the removable ceiling or through other means, the Contractor shall provide Milcor Style "M" access doors at least 12 inches by 12 inches in size or larger if required for access. Provide access doors for all fire dampers, smoke dampers, valves, etc. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 8 6 ' S 1 1.24 .OWNERS OCCUPANCY ' A. It shall be understood that the building in which the work is to be done is a necessary part of the Owner's operation, and shall continue in use throughout the construction period without interruption. Take all precautions required by the Owner for the protection of his equipment and property. B. Contractor shall cooperate with the owner in scheduling areas in which work is permitted. Owners schedule will govern. 1.25 SCHEDULE OF WORK A. Under no condition shall any work be done in the present building that would interfere with its natural use during its normal hours of occupancy, unless special permission is granted by the Owner. This is particularly applicable where new connections are to be made to present lines or items of equipment in that building or where present equipment items in that building are to be relocated or modified in any way. The Contractor shall include this scheduling requirement in his proposal as no additional compensation for overtime work will be granted. 1.26 WORKING TIME r 'A. Where new connections are to be made into existing lines, present lines must be relocated or rerouted, present equipment items relocated or other work accomplished that would affect the operation of the present building, the work shall be carried on at such times as to cause a minimum of interference with the normal operation of that building. In certain cases the work may be accomplished during normal working hours during certain designated seasons or times of the year. In other cases the work may have to be executed t" during times of the day outside of the normal working period, on holidays, etc. Each f individual case presents a separate decision as to the time during which it shall be performed. The Contractor involved shall present each case to the Architect for his r- decision, which will be made after due consultation with the Owner. No additional compensation for overtime will be granted for compliance with these requirements. 1.27 RELOCATION OF EXISTING INSTALLATIONS A. There are portions of the existing plumbing system, heating, ventilating and air �. conditioning system and electrical System which shall remain in use to serve the finished building in conjunction with the indicated new installations. By actual examination at the site, each bidder shall determine those portions of the remaining present installations which must be relocated to avoid interferences with the installations of new work of his particular trade and that of all other trades. All such existing installations which interfere with new installations shall be relocated by the Contractor under the Division in which the existing material normally belongs, and in a manner as directed by the Architect. For example: 1. Existing Plumbing piping, etc. shall be relocated under Division 15 where it interferes with the installation of new work. 2. Where existing piping, ductwork, etc. interferes with the installation of new work, j" it shall be relocated under Division 15. 3. Where existing conduit and electrical equipment interferes with the installation of new work, it shall be relocated under Division 16. i t �.. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 9 E B. Failure to become familiar with the extent of the relocation work involved shall not relieve the Contractor of responsibility and shall not be used as a basis for additional compensation. 1.28 SALVAGE MATERIALS A. The Contractor shall remove existing equipment, piping, duct, grilles, conduit, wire, junction boxes, light fixtures and other items associated with the mechanical, plumbing and electrical systems where shown on the drawings. Where such items are exposed to view or uncovered by any cutting or removal of general construction and has no continuing function (as determined by the Architect), they shall be removed by the contractor under the section in which the item normally falls. B. Existing items (see above) where concealed in/above construction which is not disturbed, abandon in place. Plug, cap, disconnect or otherwise render harmless all such items. C. All items or materials removed from the project shall be made available for the Owner's inspection. The Owner retains the option to claim any item or material. Contractor shall deliver any claimed item or material in good condition to the place designated by the Owner. All item not claimed become the property of the contractor and shall be removed from the site. 1.29 SLEEVE DRAWINGS A. The Contractor shall, before concrete is poured, prepare 1/8" scale floor plan drawings on tracing paper and shall show on these drawings, with dimension lines, the size and location of every pipe sleeve required for the passage of his lines. Prints shall be reviewed by the Architect prior to the setting of the pipe sleeves. 1.30 INSTALLATION DRAWINGS A. It shall be incumbent upon the Contractor to prepare special drawings as called for elsewhere herein or as directed by the Architect to coordinate the work under each section, to illustrate changes in his work, to facilitate its concealment in finished spaces to avoid obstructions or to illustrate the adaptability of any item of equipment which he proposes to use. B. These drawings shall be used in the field for the actual installation of the work. Unless otherwise directed, they shall not be submitted for approval but three copies shall be provided to the Architect -for his information. 1.31 ROUGH -IN AND MAKE FINAL CONNECTION FOR EQUIPMENT A. The shop drawings for all equipment are hereby made a part of these specifications. The Contractor under each section of the specifications shall rough -in for the exact item to be furnished on the job, whether in another section of the specifications or by the Owner. The Contractor shall refer to all drawings and other sections of the specifications for the scope of work involved for the new equipment, and by actual site examination determine the scope of the required equipment connections for the Owner furnished equipment. B. Should any of the equipment furnished require connections of a nature different from that shown on the drawings, report the matter to the Architect and finally connect as directed by the Architect. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 10 C. Should any shop drawings not be available for equipment furnished under other contracts or by the Owner, the Contractor under each section of these specifications shall bid the work as detailed on the drawings. D. Minor differences in the equipment furnished and that indicated on the drawings will not constitute ground for additional payment to the Contractor. 1.32 MARKING OF PIPE A. The Contractor shall mark all accessible piping systems. The identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. B. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a mom and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a mom without being identified therein. Marker on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers. C. Size of Identification: Outside Diameter Size'of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 1.33 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF-I, EF-2, etc.; AC Units will be AC-1, AC-2, etc. B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units ,.. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 11 5. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans S. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items 1.34 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor for each section of the work hereunder shall, in cooperation with the representatives of the manufacturers of the various equipment items, carefully instruct the -� Owner's representatives in the proper operation of each item of equipment and of each system. During the balancing and adjusting of systems, the Owner's representative shall be made familiar with all procedures. .. 1.35 OPERATING MANUALS A. Prepare and submit 3 copies of the operating manuals bound in hard covers. Three weeks prior to completion of the work, the Architect will check the manuals and any additional material necessary to complete the manuals shall be furnished and inserted by the Contractor. r B. Manuals shall contain the following data: 1. Catalogue data of all equipment. 2. Shop drawings of all equipment. ` 3. Temperature control drawings (reduced in size) 4. Start-up instructions for major equipment. 5. Trouble shooting procedures for major equipment. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Recommended maintenance schedule for equipment. S. Parts list for all items. 9. Name and address of each vendor. 1.36 GUARANTEE A. Unless a longer period is specified elsewhere, the contractor shall guarantee all workmanship and materials for a period of one year from date of final acceptance. 1.37 COMPLETION REQUIREMENTS A. Before acceptance and final payment the Contractor under each Division of the specifications shall furnish: L Accurate "as built" drawings, shown in red ink on blue line prints furnished for that purpose all changes from the original plans made during installation of the work. Drawings shall be filed with the Architect when the work is completed. 2. All manufacturers' guarantees. 3. All operating manuals. 4. Guarantees. 5. Test and Balance Report. GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 12 1.38 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR FINAL INSPECTION A. Before calling for the final inspection, the Contractor under each Division shall carefully inspect his work to be sure it is complete and according to plans and specifications. END OF SECTION GENERAL PROVISIONS FOR MECHANICAL AND ELECTRIAL 15000 - 13 r SECTION 15300 - PIPING AND ACCESSORIES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the piping and accessories as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. 1.4 INSPECTION A. All pipe, valves, fittings, and other accessories shall be inspected upon delivery and during the course of the work. Any defective materials found during field inspection or during hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be removed from the site of the work and replaced by the Contractor. 1.5 PROTECTION DURING STORAGE A. The interior of all pipe, fittings, and other accessories shall be kept free from dirt and foreign matter at all times. Valves and fittings shall be drained and stored in a manner that will protect them from damage by freezing. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. All materials shall be manufactured or fabricated in the United States of America. B. Materials shall conform to the listed standards. Refer to specific sections for materials to be used under that section. The following tabulation is for reference only to identify the applicable standard. Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM A74, Class SV Push On Gaskets for C.I. Soil Pipe ASTM C564 Caulked Joints for C.I. Soil Pipe Fed. Spec. HH-P-117 Type II 'w No Hub Joints ASTM D3183 Clay Tile Pipe and Fittings ASTM C700 Clay Tile Joints ASTM C425 r-r r PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 1 Rubber Rings for A.C. Pipe ASTM D1869 ABS Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D2751 — ABS Soil Joints - Elastomeric ASTM D2751 PVC Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D3034, Type PSM Max. SDR=35 -- PVC Soil Fittings - Elastomeric ASTM D3212 Copper Tubing ASTM B88 Wrought Copper Solder Fittings ANSI B16.22 Cast Bronze Solder Fittings ANSI B16.18 - Steel Pipe ASTM A120, A53, A106 Butt Weld Fittings ANSI B16.9 Socket Weld Fittings ANSI B 16.11 Steel Flanges ANSI B 16.5 y Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ANSI B 16.3 Cast Iron Threaded Fittings Fed. Spec. WW-P-SOLE Cast Iron Water Pipe ANSI A21.6 Cement Lining for C.I. Water Pipe ANSI A21.4 Cast Iron Water Pipe Fittings, Lined ANSI A21.10 and A21.10a Push -On Joints for C.I. Water Pipe ANSI A21.11 " Mechanical Joints for Water Pipe ANSI A21.11 PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1584 Type 1120 — Push On Joints for PVC Water Pipe ASTM D1585, AWWA C900 Asbestos Cement Water Pipe AWWA C400 Class 150 •-- AC Water Pipe Fittings ANSI A21.10, 150 lb. AC Water Pipe Joints ASTM D1869 Flange Bolt, Sets ASME Pressure Piping C. Unions in Ferrous Lines: 150 pound malleable iron, screwed pattern, ground joint with brass to iron seat; equal to Crane. D. Insulating Fittings: Equal to Maloney. E. Unions in Copper or Brass Lines: 125 pound all brass, screwed pattern, ground joint, equal to Chase, Crane or Mueller. F. Mechanical Couplings: Victaulic Style 77 2.2 VALVES A. General Service Valves: 3" and smaller, all bronze, screwed; 3-1/2" and larger, flanged, iron body, bronze trimmed, equal to the following Crane Nos: '— PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 1 15300 - 2 Type Fluid Pressure Fluid Pressure Below 125 PSIG Above 125 PSIG Gate 3" and smaller 428 424 Gate 3-1/2" and larger 465-1/2 7-1/2 E Globe 3" and smaller 1 14-1/2 P Globe 3-1/2" and larger 351 21E Angle 3" and smaller 2 16-1/2 P Angle 3-1/2" and larger 353 23E B. Where valves have discs, select the discs for the intended service using materials as recommended by the valve manufacturer. Provide extended stems for valves in insulated �.. line, so that the handle clears the insulation and jacket. C. Acceptable General Service Valve Manufacturers: Stockham, Jenkins, OIC, Walworth, Hammond. D. Butterfly Valves: Ductile iron body, flanged or with drilled and tapped lugs, bronze discs, r, stainless steel shafts with bronze bushings, resilient EPDM seats and 0-rings, "Bubble Tight" shut-off at 150 psi pressure. On valves 4" and smaller, handle shall be infinite position with memory stops. On valves 6" and larger, provide geared operators. Norris, Keystone, Center Line, Demco or Crane valves are acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems so that the handle will clear the insulation and jacket. E. Ball Valves: Bronze threaded body, chrome plated full port bronze ball, teflon seats and i O-rings, bronze shafts, and infinite position handle with memory stops. Valve shall be three piece break away for in -line service. Apollo, Crane, Jamesbury and Stockham are acceptable. Ring type two piece ball valves are not acceptable. Where valves are installed in insulated lines, provide extended stems to clear the insulation and jacket. 2.3 GAUGE COCKS AND GAUGES A. Where gauge connections are installed in insulated lines, install a ConBraCo No. 41-380 T-handle'gauge cock on a nipple of sufficient length that the cock handle will be free of the pipe insulation, and position each cock in relation to surrounding piping and equipment so that the gauge may be easily read, and so that a gauge having a 6" diameter dial can be screwed into and out of the cock. B. Install gauge cocks at pumps as closeto pump suction and discharge connections as possible. Where drilled and tapped gauge connections are provided in the pump casing by the manufacturer, use these tappings. C. Pressure Gauges: Phosphor bronze, seamless Bourdon spring type with phosphor bronze bushed rotary movement and link; .4-1/2" dial, nickel plated ring, free standing cast aluminum case; equipped with micrometer adjustment pointer. Furnish each gauge with t scale range suitable for the duty. c D. Water Pressure Gauges: Equal to Weksler No. BA14-I with cast aluminum case; Weksler, Weiss, and Trerice acceptable. 4�•• PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 3 f 2.4 THERMOMETER WELLS A. Furnish and install brass or stainless steel closed separable thermometer wells for all thermometer and controller bulbs which are designated for liquid measurements. Whenever a thermometer or controller bulb is inserted in a pipe for either remote or local temperature indication or control, locate the thermometer well so that it will be completely -- surrounded by flowing fluid. Such thermometer locations as shown on the drawings are diagrammatic only -install thermometer wells for maximum effectiveness and in the case of locally indicating instruments, for easy readability. B. Test Wells: Test wells for use with etched stem thermometers shall be Bolton No. 615 brass, with a threaded brass plug and keeper chain. Install these test wells so that they can be filled with oil to facilitate temperature measurements. 2.5 MERCURIAL THERMOMETERS A. Industrial type with Cycolac plastic cases, glass fronts, 9" scale, adjustable straight or angle pattern as required for ready readability. Fumish thermometers with 2-1/2" stem extensions where they are installed in insulated lines. Select scale ranges for maximum readability at the design temperature of the medium being measured. Thermometer equal to Weksler No. AA5H9. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Weksler, Trerice, Weiss, Moeller. 2.6 COMBINATION PRESSURE/TEMPERATURE PORT A. Furnish and install where indicated "Pete's Plug" a 1/4" MPT fitting to receive either a temperature or pressure probe 1/8" OD. Fitting shall be solid brass with valve core of neoprene fitted with cap with gasket. Furnish an extended stem as required to extend through pipe insulation where installed in insulated lines. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SYSTEMS A. Install runs of piping essentially as indicated on the drawings and/or as required. The location, direction and size of the various lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Make up all systems straight and true and properly graded for correct flow of contained - materials and to provide drainage. Cut pipes accurately to measurements established at the building and work into place without forcing or springing. Except as required for specified grading, run all piping above ground parallel with the lines of the building. C. Make all changes in pipe sizes with reducing fittings. Use no long screws or bushings. D. Install and support piping systems with loops, bends, expansion joints and/or flexible connectors as required for flexibility, to accommodate expansion and contraction of piping due to temperature changes in the contained fluids and in the surrounding space, and to minimize the transmission of vibration to the building structure. E. Provide unions in the lines assembled with screwed and soldered fittings, at points of connection to equipment, and elsewhere as indicated or required to permit proper connections to be made, or to permit valves, equipment items, etc. to be removed. Provide unions also in welded lines at connections to equipment where flanges are not provided. Provide insulating unions where ferrous material joins non-ferrous material. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 4 .. 4 F. In piping systems assembled by welding, use factory -fabricated welding fittings of the same material and the same schedule or weight as the piping in which they are installed. except that branches or take -offs of sizes not exceeding 2/3 of the nominal diameter of the mains may be made with Bonney Weldolets or Thredolets. Mitering of pipe to form elbows, notching of straight runs to form tees, and any similar construction will not be permitted. a G. In general, use listed materials in fabricating the various piping systems. The method of assembly may be varied only to meet special conditions where it is impossible to comply with the specified method of joining piping. Where special classes of piping are involved and are not listed, request exact instructions as to the class of material involved and the method of fabricating it before ordering materials. 3.2 FLASHING A. Flash around all pipes passing through the roof with sheet lead not less than 4 lbs. per square foot, built a minimum of 8" in all directions from the outside of the pipe into the waterproofing. Flashing shall be run up the pipe and turned over into the pipe cavity. Flashing at roof drains shall be 36" square. 3.3 PITCH PANS A. Small lines thru the roof shall be installed thru pitch pans. Pans shall be 18 gage galvanized, welded, 3" deep, 8" X 8" or larger, packed with lead wool and filled with pitch. 3.4 PIPE SLEEVES A. Generally where pipes pass through walls or floors except sewer pipes through floors on grade, pipe sleeves shall be used. The sizes of these sleeves shall be such as to permit readily the subsequent insertion of the pipes of the proper size. In the case of insulated lines, the diameter of the sleeves shall be approximately 1/2 inch greater than the outside diameter of the insulation. B. The pipes passing through interior walls or floors shall pass through galvanized pipe sleeves. In walls, they shall finish flush with each finished surface. In pipe chases, they shall extend 1-1/2 inches above the floor slab. The annular space between the pipe and sleeve in floor penetrations and fire rated wall penetrations shall be fire -sealed with fire resistive material equal to Dow Coming Silicone RTV Foam Penetration Seal. C. The pipes passing through concrete beams or walls, and masonry exterior walls and through floors shall be provided with galvanized wrought iron pipe sleeves. Weld at least four No. 4 rods to each pipe sleeve to serve as an anchor as directed by the Architect. After the pipes are installed, in the case of pipes sleeving through exterior beams or walls and floors on grade, the Contractor shall fill the annular space between the pipe and its sleeve with mechanical interlocking synthetic rubber link equal to Link Seal. Contractor shall coordinate sleeve size to insure a watertight joint. 3.5 ESCUTCHEONS, CEILING PLATES A. Except as otherwise noted provide and install concealed hinge, chrome plated escutcheons or ceiling plates with spring catches around each pipe passing through any wall, floor, or fi PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 5 I ceiling in any space, except in underfloor and attic spaces. Plates shall be sized to fit snugly against the outside of the pipe, or against the outside of the insulation on lines which are insulated. B. No floor plates will be required around the iron pipe sleeves on exterior walls. 3.6 FABRICATION OF PIPE JOINTS A. Copper Tubing: Cut tubing square and deburr. Clean insides of fittings and outsides of tubing with sand cloth before assembly. Exercise care to prevent annealing of fittings and hard drawn tubing. Make all joints with solid string or wire solder, using non -corrosive paste flux of the propel type for each application. No cored solder will be permitted. Use 95-5 solder (95% tin, 5% antimony) or Silvabrite 100 solder (95.5% tin, 4% copper, .5% silver composition) for all copper tubing. Under no circumstances will solder with any lead content be permitted on the jobsite. B. Welded Joints: Make all welded joints by the metallic arc process. Use base material conforming to ANSI B31.1 for welded pipe ASTM A106 and ASTM A53. Use filler material conforming to ASTM A233 and in accordance with ANSI B31.1. Machine the ends of the material to be joined or gas cut. Make the cut smooth in order that good fit can be made and a full penetration weld made. Use direct current for welding with the electrode positive. Limit the depth of deposit to 1/8" per pass. Remove all slag or flux remaining on any bead of welding before laying down the next successive bead of welding. Remove any cracks or blow holes that appear on the surface of any bead of `- welding by chipping or grinding before depositing the next successive bead of welding. C. Mechanical Couplings: 1. Mechanical couplings and fittings shall be used to connect mechanical equipment and piping systems where specified. Couplings shall be equal to Victaulic Style 77 with housing fabricated in two or more parts of malleable iron castings, in accordance with Federal Specification AA-1-666C Grade 11. Couplings gasket shall be equal to Victaulic Grade "H" molded synthetic rubber, per ASTM D-735-61, Grade No. R615BZ. Coupling bolts shall be oval neck track head type with hexagonal heavy, nuts, per ASTM-A-183-60. 2. All pipe fittings used with couplings shall be fabricated of malleable iron castings in accordance with Federal Specification QQ-1-66C Grade 11. Where malleable fitting pattern is not available, fittings fabricated from Schedule 40 steel pipe or standard wall seamless welding fittings with grooved ends may be used. 3. Before assembly of couplings, lightly coat pipe ends and outside of gaskets with cup grease or graphite paste to facilitate installation. 4. Pipe grooving shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's specifications contained in the latest published literature. D. Testing: 1. The Contractor shall have a minimum of 10 percent of all welds made by each welder examined and inspected by radiography. If a faulty weld is discovered, the Contractor shall perform radiographic inspection on all welds made by that welder. Any faulty welds shall be repaired and reinspected at the Contractor's expense. -` 2. The system shall be hydrostatically tested at 1.5 times the design pressure, specified in Chapter VI ASME Code B31.1-1986 for Power Piping, and carefully checked for leaks. The design pressure is 400 psig. After leaks are repaired, retest system; -- repeat repair and test until proved tight. Equipment shall be isolated from hydrostatic testing of piping. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 6 ,, 3. Welds which cannot be hydrostatically tested, e.g., branch connections made to existing piping, shall be radiographed per Chapter VI, ASME Code B31.1-1986 at Contractor's expense. The Owner at his option may allow visual inspection of these welds in lieu of radiographs. 3.7 REVISIONS AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING SYSTEMS A. Where conflicts occur between the new work and the existing piping systems which cannot be resolved, the Contractor shall relocate the existing piping system. Relocated positions of piping shall be tested for new work. All piping systems shall be free from leaks. 3.8 REPAIR OF LEAKS A. All leaks in piping systems shall.be corrected as follows: 1. Repair leaks in solder joints by remaking the joint; no soldering or brazing over existing joints will be permitted. 2. Repair leaks. in , screwed joints by tightening the joint; remake the joint if the tightening fails to stop the leak. 3. Leaks in caulked joints may be stopped by additional caulking of the joint; but if that fails, remake the joint. 4. Repair leaks in welded joints by removing the defective weld completely through the base metal and grind smooth. Re -weld, accomplishing 100% penetration of the base metal. The repair weld should in no case be less than 4" in length. B. When any defect is repaired, retest that section of the system. 3.9 HANDLING OF MATERIAL A. Hauling: All materials furnished by the Contractor shall be delivered and distributed at the site by the Contractor. B. Loading and Unloading: Pipe, fittings, valves, and accessories shall be loaded or unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded or rolled against pipe already on the ground. Each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be installed. No material shall be unloaded where it will block any road, drive, building entrance, or walkway or where it will be a hazard to safe vehicular or pedestrian traffic. C. Care of Pipe Coating and Lining: Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining shall not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense. If satisfactory repair cannot be made, the Contractor shall replace the damaged pipe. 3.10 ALIGNMENT AND GRADES A. General: All pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves, at the required locations; spigots centered in bells; and all valve stems plumb. All pipe shall be installed straight and true to line. PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 7 H. Deviations Occasioned by Other Structures: Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work, the lines and/or grades shall be adjusted so to not interfere with existing obstructions. END OF SECTION PIPING AND ACCESSORIES 15300 - 8 F f SECTION 15310 - PLUMBING SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications requires the furnishing and installation of all equipment, labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of the plumbing systems. PART 2. - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Interior Sanitary Soil, Waste and Drain Lines: Except as otherwise specified or noted on i the drawings, piping inside of, under and within 10'0" of the building or other structures shall be bell and spigot, service weight cast iron soil pipe and fittings, each heavily coated at the factory with asphaltum or coal tar pitch and each having the manufacturer's mark or name and the date of manufacture cast on it. Type "L" copper in sizes up to 2" may be used where space is restricted. C.I. joints may be caulked. or push -on. Above grade, r-' no -hub may be used, unless otherwise prohibited. ! B. Drain Lines: Type L copper with solder joint fittings. f: END OF SECTION r"- r �- PLUMBING SYSTEMS 15310 - 1 FSECTION 15330 - CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the chilled and heating water systems as shown on the drawings and/or specified herein. B. Install chilled and heating water circulating piping complete and connect to coils, pumps, and other equipment. Include drain lines where shown or required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS: Refer to Section "Piping and Accessories". A. Chilled and Heating Water Lines: Standard weight black steel. Use Victaulic couplings on lines 4" and larger. Weld smaller lines. Lines 2" and smaller may be screwed using malleable iron banded fittings. B. Drain Lines: Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe assembled with 150 pound malleable iron, banded pattern, screwed fittings or, at the Contractor's option may be type L hard copper assembled with wrought copper solder joint fittings. Do not mix the two materials. C. Automatic Air Vents: ASME labeled; equal to Crane No. 976. Crane and Sarco acceptable. D. Relief Valves: ASME labeled; equal to Bell and Gossett No. 250 having a relief setting of 125 pounds. Bell and Gossett, Taco or Thrush acceptable. Provide a relief valve in every closed water circulating system. E. [Suction Diffuser: Gustin-Bacon Series 410 with 150 lb. flange pump connection and drain plug.] F. [Strainer: "Y" pattern Dunham Bush Type "MUL" or "SS -A". Vertical pattern McAlear Series 900.1 2.2 EXPANSION TANK A. Welded steel, ASME stamped for 125 PSIG. Size shall be as shown on the drawings. Tank shall be provided with valved gage glass, tappings and Bell and Gossett Airtrol tank fitting, and shall have mounting saddles. It shall be supported from the structure on adjustable hanger rods. It shall be factory coated for corrosion resistance. ,.. CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15330 - 1 B. Provide and install in the water supply line to each expansion tank a gate valve, a Bell and Gossett No. D-250 combination anti -syphon pressure reducing valve and relief valve, and a check valve. Connections to Small Coils: Connections to water coils having 3/4" connections and smaller may be served using type "L" soft copper tubing. Provide a Dielectric Unions where steel pipe ends. Use only 95-5 or other high melting solder for these runouts. C. Shot Feeder: Provide and install a two gallon shot feeder across the supply and return mains of the closed water circulating system. The feeder shall be installed with ball valves on either side of the feeder. Provide an air cock, funnel, fill valve and drain valve. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SYSTEMS A. Lay all water circulating lines on an even slope throughout to insure freedom from air _ locks and traps. Grade the system downward to the circulating pumps with valved drain connections from the low points to floor drains. Where additional low points are unavoidable, provide service drains to permit the complete drainage of the system. B. Provide automatic air vents at all high points of the system. Where horizontal mains change size, employ eccentric reducing couplings so installed as to keep the tops of coupled pipes on the same level. C. Install drains from each pump base and from each air unit pan to the nearest floor drain in each case. Provide'any other drain lines indicated on the drawings or required. D. Install manual valves where required to segregate individual items of equipment or sections of circulating systems or where indicated on the drawings or required. 3.2 CLEANING A. Chilled Water System: Fill the system with a solution consisting of either one pound of caustic soda or three pounds of trisodium phosphate per 100 gallons of water. Eliminate all air and circulate this solution for 48 hours. Drain the system and thoroughly flush it with fresh water. Clean out all strainers. Refill the system with fresh water. B. Heating Water System: Same as chilled water system, except heat the solution. 3.3 TESTING A. Before insulating or concealing any lines, test all piping. Test all lines at 150% of the system working pressure or 100 psig whichever is greater, for not less than 4 hours with no leaks. 3.4 CHEMICAL TREATMENT A. The Contractor shall provide and install the initial chemical treatment and the first year supply of chemical. Provide chemical analysis report to Architect indicating system condition after initial fill. END OF SECTION CHILLED AND HEATING WATER SYSTEMS 15330 - 2 SECTION 15390 - MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section applies to piping systems used to transport gases, liquids or semi -liquids. The term "piping systems", includes pipes, fittings, valves and pipe coverings located either inside or outside the buildings. This identification scheme does not apply to piping systems buried in the ground. 1.4 REFERENCES A. Occupational Safety and Health Standards - Part 1910.144. B. Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems - ANSI A 13.1 C. Safety Color Code for Marking Physical Hazards - ANSI 253.1 1.5 METHOD OF IDENTIFICATION A. The primary identification of a piping system shall be made by a positive identification of the material content of the system by lettered legend, giving the name of the content in full or abbreviated form. This mark shall be conspicuously placed at frequent intervals on straight runs, close to all valves, at changes of direction and where pipes pass through walls, floors or ceilings. Arrows shall be used to indicate direction of flow. B. This identifying mark shall be supplemented by the use of a color code which will indicate the nature of the material carried in the system. Piping systems shall be placed, by the nature of their contents, in one of the basic groups listed below. Each group is assigned a predominant color range as noted. C. The entire exposed length of the piping system shall be painted by its proper color code to identify the system. Markers shall be painted on using stencils. Specialties shall be painted as specified for piping. D. Markers shall be placed on piping at each connection to an item of equipment, at each pump, and on each drop to an outlet. Markers shall be placed on each run of piping at intervals not exceeding 50 feet where exposed in a room and 25 feet when installed above removable ceilings, except that no exposed line shall enter a room without being identified therein. Markers on lines above removable ceilings shall be applied on the undersides of the lines and ducts and in other areas shall be applied to be most visible. 7 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 15390 - 1 Also supply directional flow indicators adjacent to identification markers similarly color coded and sized. E. Size of Identification: -- Outside Diameter Size of Legend of Pipe or Covering Letters (" Height) — 3/4 to 1-1/4 1/2 1-1/2 to 2 3/4 2-1/2 to 6 1-1/4 8 to 10 2-1/2 Over 10 3-1/2 _ F. Colors: Exact colors shall conform to Owners Piping Identification Code. All numbers are PITTSBURGH: Piping Color Steam - 100 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Steam - 40 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Steam - 15 PSI Safety Yellow - 6-264 Condensate - High Pressure Sunset Orange - 54-124 Condensate - Low Pressure Sunset Orange - 54-124 Condensate - Pump Return Sunset Orange - 54-124 -- Ducts - Supply and Return Safety Orange - 6-259 Hot and Chilled Water Supply & Return Spanish Blue - 1-346 Waste and Vent Flat Black - 54-198 _ Cold Water Vista Green - 6-256 Hot Water Rose Coral - 15P-27 Fire Lines & Gas (Nat.) Safety Red - 6-261 _ Air Lines Autumn Brown - 54-126 Equipment Pumps H & CH Water Seal Brown - 1-344 Converter Rose Coral - 15P-27 A.H. Unit, Generator Touch up as required H.W. Storage Tank Rose Coral - 15 P 27 MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 15390 - 2 r Sump Pump, Water Pumps Safety Blue - 6-262 Controls Equipment Powder Blue - 4P-55 l . Copper Pipe Polish and lacquer r Electrical Materials Grey Vacuum Lines Reef Brown - 95-6 (Color Guild) I Gas (Natural) Safety Red - 6-261 r 1.6 IDENTIFICATION A. The Contractor shall provide and install, on each valve and cock which he installs, a Seton P-250 tag with depressed, black filled numbers and letters identifying the service by letters and the number of the valve. Attach these to the handles of the valves and cocks using meter seals, approved brass S hooks, or heavy copper clad annealed iron wire. B. Fumish and install where directed a chart or directory listing the complete identification of every valve and cock. This chart shall designate class of service, and shall itemize '-" the valve or cock identified, shall list its exact location, shall give its number, and shall t be neatly typed and mounted under a glass pane in a suitable frame. These charts shall, in addition, list the various colors identifying the piping. 1.7 IDENTIFICATION OF UNDERGROUND LINES �- A. All lines installed underground shall have a 6" wide 0.004" thick color coded, permanent plastic tape buried above the pipe, approximately 12" below grade. The tape shall identify the pipe thus protected. r r 1.8 MARKING ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS A. Lay -in Ceiling Panels: Use color coded thumb tacks neatly aligned in one comer of the panel to identify valves, fire dampers, smoke dampers, etc. The color code shall conform to the piping identification color code for valve access. The color shall be red for fire and smoke dampers. B. Stencil 1/2" high letters on concealed access doors to identify fire and smoke dampers. 1.9 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING A. The Contractor shall make it possible for the personnel operating and maintaining the equipment and systems in this project to readily identify the various pieces of equipment, valves, piping, etc., by marking them. All items of equipment such as fans, pumps, etc., shall be, clearly marked using engraved nameplates as hereinafter specified. The item of equipment shall indicate the same number as shown on the drawings. For example, pumps will be identified as P-1, P-2, P-3, etc.; exhaust fans will be EF-I, EF-2, etc.; AC Units will be AC-1, AC-2, etc. MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 15390 - 3 B. All items of mechanical and electrical equipment shall be identified by the attachment of engraved nameplates constructed from laminated phenolic plastic, at least 1/16" thick, 3-ply, with black surfaces and white core. Engraving shall be condensed gothic, at least 1/2" high, appropriately spaced. Nomenclature on the label shall include the name of the item, its mark number, area, space, or equipment served, and other pertinent information. Equipment to be labeled shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Boilers 2. Chillers 3. Pumps 4. AC Units S. Convertors 6. Air Conditioning Control Panels and Switches 7. Exhaust and Return Air Fans 8. Miscellaneous - similar and/or related items END OF SECTION MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION 15390 - 4 7 SECTION 15400 - AIR DISTRIBUTION PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of apparatus casing, ductwork, plenums, linings, air distribution devices, dampers and control devices, relief air vents, curbs and other materials and accessories as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. B. In addition, connect all air conditioning units, automatic dampers, filters and all other materials and install (and/or cooperate in the installation with other trades) those various items of equipment and materials. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 LOW PRESSURE DUCTWORK A. Except as otherwise specified herein, in other sections of the specifications, and/or noted on the drawings, low pressure ducts shall be constructed of galvanized steel sheets in accordance with the recommended construction for low pressure ducts insofar as gauges of metal to be used, bracing of joints and joint construction as established in the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. B. Duct construction details shall conform to "HVAC Duct Construction Standards", 1st Edition, (1995) published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA). Refer to the fan schedules (TSP) for system pressures. Construction shall be suitable for actual duct system pressures. C. Make square elbows where shown or required, with factory -fabricated turning vanes. Make all other changes in direction with rounded elbows having a centerline radius equal to 1-1/2 times the width of the duct in the plane of the bend. D. Make transformations in duct shape or dimension with gradual slopes on all sides. Make increases in dimensions in the direction of air flow, with a maximum slope of V in 7" on any side. Make decreases in dimensions in the direction of air flow preferably with a slope of 1" in 7" on any side, but with a maximum slope of V in 4" where conditions necessitate. E. Ducts shall be routed in conjunction with pipes, electrical conduits, ceiling hangers, etc. so as to avoid interferences insofar as possible. Where duct penetrations are unavoidable, ,., AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 1 i provide streamline shaped sleeves around such material penetrations, made airtight at duct surfaces, except that such sleeves are not required at tie rods. Where obstructions are of a size to exceed 10% of the duct area, the duct shall be transformed to maintain the same duct area. 2.2 DUCT CONSTRUCTION TEST A. A trial leak test, as specified herein, shall be made after installation of the first section of each type of ductwork to demonstrate adequacy of the construction details. All testing shall be done in the presence of the Architect. B. Each test section shall incorporate at least five transverse joints and all typical fittings. C. Drawings showing all construction details of test sections, test procedures and instrumentation, and test results shall be submitted for record purposes. No additional ductwork shall be installed until the trial test installation described above has been approved. D. Low pressure duct shall be tested at 3 "w.c. Construction of low pressure systems shall be inherently airtight and leakage shall be of a sufficiently low magnitude as to be inaudible in quiet ambient and not detectable by sense of feel. 2.3 DUCT SEALER A. All supply air ductwork from the air unit to the terminal units shall be sealed to provide airtight construction. Metal surfaces to be joined shall be clean, dry and free of dirt or grease. Apply a heavy coat of Kingco Seal -Rite 18-120 to the interior metal surface of the slip joint, then interlock into place metal duct sections. Apply a heavy coat of 18-120 to the exterior metal surface duct joint, making sure any voids are filled to secure a continuous air pressure sealant. B. Allow sealant to dry a minimum .of 48 hours before pressurizing system. 2.4 HIGH PRESSURE DUCTS A. This ductwork shall be defined as that between the discharge of the supply fan and pressure reducing terminal boxes. This work shall be provided and installed as shown and as specified hereinafter. B. This ductwork shall be round in cross-section, flat oval or rectangular as shown on the drawings. It shall be constructed according to the latest edition of the ASHRAE HANDBOOK. Duct construction details shall be in accordance with the "High Pressure _ Duct Standard, 3rd - Edition", published by the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. except as may be abridged herein. C. All job -constructed ducts shall be made with longitudinal joints butted and welded. Round _ ducts 48" in diameter and smaller and all flat oval ducts shall be factory fabricated spirally wound conduit made from zinc coated steel strips. All such ducts shall be delivered in standard lengths and shall be cut to proper length at the site by power saw to insure proper fit and square alignment. D. Fittings used on round or flat oval ducts shall be shop fabricated by welding. Changes in direction shall be made with mitered fittings of at least 3 sections; 90 degree elbows shall contain not less than five sections. Branch takeoffs shall be at 45 degree, except where indicated on the drawings they may be 90 degree conical taps. The run of a conical take -off shall be not less than the diameter of the branch which it serves. This contractor AIR DISTRIBUTION 1 15400 - 2 shall furnish for review drawings of fittings which he proposes to use and shall not proceed with fabrication until review by the Architect. E. A high degree of dimensional accuracy is required in both conduit and fittings in order that the installation may be strong, rigid, and within allowable limits of air leakage. Inside diameter of conduits when checked with ring gages shall show a variation from nominal r- diameter of not more than 0.030". Fittings shall be provided with male connections and, when checked with ring gages, shall show a variation from nominal outside diameter of not more than 0.015 inch. F. Transitions shall be all welded construction. In any required rectangular ells, provide Airsan "Acoustiturn" double thick acoustical turning vanes. G. All high pressure ducts having a dimension of 36" or greater shall be assembled using ., gasketed companion flanges. f H. All other joints between conduits and between conduits and fittings shall be made with "Hardcast" cement reinforced with self -tapping drill screws. Conduits shall be joined with couplings. Adjoining surfaces of fitting or coupling and conduit at each joint shall be thoroughly cleaned, and after receiving a uniform coat of cement shall be pressed together. p Joints so formed shall be further strengthened by the use of hex head No. 7x12 self -tapping drill screws installed with a screw gun. Screws shall be equally spaced around the 7 circumference and centered longitudinally on the joint. Use three screws per joint on conduit with diameters of 3" through 8" and space screws approximately 6" apart on conduit with diameters of 9" and over. Then seal the joint with "Hardcast" assembled P"+ using manufacturer's instructions. I. It is essential that all high velocity ductwork be practically air tight. After erection in place, and before being insulated or connected to the air distribution units, each high r ` velocity duct system shall be tested for leaks. For the test, each system shall be capped at I all openings. Pressure test according to the SMACNA procedure, admitting air thru a precision orifice and using pressure taps and a manometer. Under this test there shall be no whistling leaks and the pressure drop across the orifice shall not exceed the pressure drop corresponding to 1% air loss according to SMACNA Tables of the design air quantity in that branch. 2.5 AIR CONTROL DEVICES r,.. A. Manual dampers shall be installed as required to afford complete control of the air flow in the various duct systems. In rectangular supply ducts, a splitter damper shall be installed at each point where a branch is taken off and additional volume dampers shall be installed where shown or required to achieve the final air balance. B. Splitter dampers and volume dampers of the "butterfly" type shall be constructed of 20 gauge galvanized steel riveted or welded to square operating rods. Dampers shall have bearings of brass, bronze or approved plastic in most instances. The length of any splitter r damper blade shall be 1-1/2 times the width of the smaller split in the duct, but shall be not less than 12". Volume dampers of the butterfly type shall be used only in cases where neither dimension of the damper exceed 18". The metal used shall match that of duct system containing the damper in each case. Use special metals for damper rods and bearings as required to resist corrosion. C. In cases where either dimension of the smaller branch duct exceeds 24", volume dampers r" shall be of the opposed blade type with blades linked together and controlled from a single point. They shall be constructed of No. 16 gauge steel either galvanized or with a baked enamel finish. Dampers shall have brass, bronze or approved plastic sleeve bearings. R AIR DISTRIBUTION 13400 - 3 f Blades shall be not more than 12" in width and shall be opposed acting, and those for automatic dampers shall be fitted with felts to insure tight closure. Felts shall be both glued and riveted to the damper blades. Blades shall be mounted in suitable band or angle iron frames strongly braced to insure rigidity. D. Each splitter or volume damper, unless specified for automatic operation, shall be fitted with an adjusting device having a locking mechanism. Wherever the ducts are rendered inaccessible behind non -removable ceilings or furrings, or other construction that is not easily removable to permit access to the ducts, the devices shall be equal to Young Regulator Co. No. 896 concealed air split regulators. On exposed or easily accessible ducts the adjusting devices shall be equal to Young No. 1 or No. 900 and shall be fastened to the ducts. E. Damper rods and operators on insulated ducts shall have extended rods and stand off brackets. 2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCT A. Flexible ducts shall be used for connecting air terminal devices. Generally flex duct shall not exceed 3'0" in length or have more than 90 degree of bend. Flexible duct shall be a factory fabricated assembly consisting of an inner sleeve, insulation and an outer moisture barrier. The inner sleeve shall be constructed of a continuous vinyl -coated spring steel wire helix fused to a continuous layer of fiber glass impregnated and coated with vinyl. A 1-1/4 inch thick insulating blanket of fiber glass wool shall encase the inner sleeve and be sheathed with an outer moisture barrier of a reinforced Mylar or neoprene laminate of low permeability. The flexible duct shall be rated for a maximum working velocity of 6000 FPM and shall be listed by the Underwriters' Laboratories under their UL-181 standards as a Class 1 duct and shall comply with NFPA Standard #90A. The flexible duct shall be Thermaflex M-KC for high pressure and Thermaflex M-KE for low pressure application. 2.7 ROUND DUCT TAPS A. All round takeoffs shall be made with spin -in type fittings for sheet metal duct or fiberglass ductboard as applicable. Provide. each with a factory installed balancing damper, positive locking nut and air scoop. 2.8 FIRE DAMPERS A. Weighted fire dampers having bronze bearings and held open by fusible links shall be constructed and installed in accordance with the recommendations of the National Fire Protection Association as published in NFPA Bulletin 90A and applicable ordinances and the Building Code. All fire dampers shall have Underwriters' Laboratory labels. _ B. Specifically, fire dampers shall be provided at the points indicated on the drawings, where a duct penetrates a fire rated partition and where a duct penetrates the roof, ceiling, floor or other areas requiring a fire rated separation. They shall also be installed at any other location as required by applicable codes. Provide access panels in the duct and access doors in the ceiling or wall to service and test the damper. Access doors with vision panes shall be furnished with wire glass. C. Furnish fire dampers with fusible links rated for 160 degrees F unless indicated otherwise. Fire dampers shall be constructed of galvanized steel and rated at 1-1/2 hours for partitions AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 4 r t and floors rated up to 2 hours, and 3 hour rating for use in partitions and floors rated up to 4 hours unless noted otherwise. Blades shall be of the interlocking type, those in high C' pressure duct shall be 100% free area and out of the air stream. Fire dampers shall be suitable for either horizontal or vertical mounting as required and shall be furnished with factory fabricated sleeve minimum of two gauges heavier than connecting ductwork. D. Fire dampers in low pressure duct shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 150A. Fire f dampers in ceiling air distribution outlets shall be equal to Action Air, Inc. Model 400. 2.9 ACCESS PANEL A. Access doors of sufficient size shall be installed in ducts to permit servicing of contained equipment including fire extinguishing equipment, dampers, etc. Where those panels are in insulated ducts, they shall be double wall panels with material to match the lining and i of the same thickness. In uninsulated ducts they shall be single wall construction. All r access panels shall have No. 310 Ventlock catches and pulls, No. 260 hinges and No. 390 j gaskets. B. Where access panels are not exposed or readily accessible above removable ceilings, provide access doors in the general construction. 2.10 AIR DISTRIBUTION DEVICES A. Furnish and install all grilles, registers, and diffusers for every purpose. Refer to the tabulation on the drawings for types, sizes and accessories. B. All grilles, registers, and diffusers located in the ceiling shall be factory finished in OFF-WHITE. Door grilles shall be factory finished in baked enamel medium birch tan. C. All other grilles and registers shall be factory primed and spray painted 2 coats on the job. D. All grilles and registers shall be installed with tamperproof screws and shall be secured to the duct with a minimum of four screws. E. Where perforated supply grilles are scheduled, they shall be of the type with adjustable curved blades in the neck of the diffusers. Other types are not acceptable. F. Air distribution devices as manufactured by Barber Colman, Titus, Tuttle and Bailey, Metal -Aire or Krueger will be acceptable. 2.11 HIGH PRESSURE AIR CONTROL AND ATTENUATOR BOXES A. These boxes shall be of the double duct mixing terminal type, shall be as manufactured 7 by Titus, Krueger or Tuttle and Bailey, and shall be of the duct end pattern; the following nomenclature is that of Krueger. Boxes shall be of the basic type portrayed on the plans and their required capacity ranges and inlet size dimensions shall be as shown on the plans. Provide an external calibrated volume adjustment. B. Mixing boxes shall be equal to CVM-E comprising a complete assembly, including a casing not lighter than 20 gauge, entrance air control valves coordinated and interlinked, access panel, turbulence baffles, and a constant volume device with an external calibrated adjustment. The unit shall operate within +10 percent of rated capacity from 0.5 inch to 5.0 inches inlet pressure. C. Mixing boxes shall be' internally treated at the factory with acoustical materials and shall r be fitted with gasketed access openings as required for installation and for future adjustment and maintenance and shall be fitted with small static pressure taps for balancing purposes. The casing shall be galvanized steel. l r- AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - S D. The automatic actuator serving the boxes shall be provided, mounted and linked by the box manufacturer. Coordinate with section "Temperature Regulation". E. Sound Rating: Special care shall be exercised in the selection of these boxes to insure quiet operation. The boxes shall be selected to meet noise criteria curve NC35-RE10-12 watts with a room attenuation of 8 db when supplied with air at a static pressure of 1.5 inches WG. The selection shall be made allowing for the duct connection detailed on the plans, multiple units in a single space, turns, room size, and construction materials. These specifications shall be complied with for both airborne and surface radiation noise. F. The supplier of the boxes shall be prepared to demonstrate to the Architect that the boxes as finally installed will meet the above specification. Any unit failing to meet this specification shall be removed and replaced with a box of adequate size, or corrective action in the form of additional attenuation shall be provided until the specified requirements are satisfied. 2.12 SERIES FAN POWER HYDRONIC HEAT A. Furnish and install TITUS Model PTFQ constant volume series fan powered terminals of the sizes and capacities shown on the plans. Space limitations shall be reviewed carefully to ensure that all terminals will fit the available space. B. Terminals should be certified under the ARI Standard 880-89 Certification Program and carry the ARI Seal. Noncertified terminals may be submitted after testing at an independent testing laboratory under conditions selected by the engineer in full compliance with ARI Standard 880-89. These tests must be witnessed by the engineering consultant with all costs to be borne by the terminal manufacturer. Testing does not ensure acceptance. C. The terminal shall be designed, built, and tested as a single unit including motor and fan assembly, primary air damper assembly, water or electric heating coils, and accessories as shipped. Unit shall ship as a complete assembly requiring no field assembly (including accessories). All electrical components shall be UL listed and installed in accordance with the National Electric Code. Electrical connection shall be single point. All electrical components, including low voltage controls, shall be mounted in sheet metal control enclosures. The entire terminal shall be ETL or UL listed as a complete assembly. D. The terminal casing shall be minimum 22 gauge galvanized steel, internally lined with dual density glass fiber insulation which complies with UL 181 and NFPA 90A. Any exposed insulation edges shall be coated with NFPA 90A approved sealant to prevent entertainment of fibers in the airstream. The terminal shall have a round duct collar for the primary air connection and a rectangular discharge suitable for flanged duct connection. The casing shall be designed for hanging by sheet metal straps. E. The terminal casing shall have a bottom access panel which allows removal of fan and servicing of terminal without disturbing duct connections. F. The fan shall be constructed of steel and have a forward curved, dynamically balanced wheel with direct drive motor. The motor shall be suitable for 120 volt, 60 cycle, single phase power. The motor shall be of energy efficient design, permanent split capacitor type, with integral thermal overload protection and permanently lubricated bearings, and be specifically designed for use with an SCR for fan speed adjustment. Fan assembly shall include an anti -backward rotation design, torsion -flex tuned spring steel suspension, and isolation between motor and fan housing. G. The terminals shall utilize a manual SCR, which allows continuously adjustable fan speed from maximum to minimum as a means of setting fan airflow. Setting fan airflow with AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 6 r I an device that raises the pressure across the fan to reduce airflow is not acceptable. The speed control shall incorporate'a minimum voltage stop to preclude motor under voltage operation. ' H. The primary air damper assembly shall be heavy gauge steel with solid shaft rotating in Dchin or bronze oilite self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. Shaft shall be clearly marked on the end to indicate damper position. Stickers or other removable markings are not acceptable. The damper shall incorporate a mechanical stop to prevent overstroking, and a synthetic seal to limit close -off leakage to the maximum values shown in Table B. I. The primary air damper assembly shall be heavy gauge steel with solid shaft rotating in Dehin or bronze oilite self-lubricating bearings. Nylon bearings are not acceptable. ., Damper leakage shall not exceed 5% of the manufacturer's scheduled maximum fan capacity at 1" wg. inlet static pressure. J. Sound ratings for the terminals shall not exceed 30 NC at 0.25 inlet static pressure, and rdischarge static pressure of 0.3". Sound performance shall be ARI certified. Radiated Path'Attenuation 2 3 4 5 6 7 Environmental Effect 3 2 1 1 1 1 Ceiling Effect 9 10 12 14 15 15 Room Effect 9 10 11 12 13 14 Total dB Reduction 9 10 11 12 13 14 Discharge Path Attenuation 2 3 .4 5 6 7 Environmental Effect 3 2 1 1 1 1 End Reflection 11 6 2 0 0 0 Duct Lining 1 3 8 21 20 12 5V Flex Duct 6 10 17 19 19 12 Room Effect 9 10 11 12 13 14 Total dB Reduction 30 31 39 53 53 39 The radiated and discharge path attenuation function for the specified NC shall be based upon factors found in ARI Standard 885-90 and shown in the tables above. No additional attenuation factors shall be deducted from the sound power. K. Sound attenuators required to achieve the previously specified sound criteria are r" acceptable. The cost of field assembled or field installed sound attenuators shall be borne by the terminal manufacturer. L. Hot Water Heating Coils: Hot water heating coils shall be enclosed in a minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel casing with flanged construction for attachment to metal ductwork. Coils shall be factory installed on the terminals. Fins shall be rippled and corrugated heavy gauge aluminum, mechanically bonded to tubes. Tubes shall be copper with F .. AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 7 t minimum wall thickness of .016", with male solder header connections. Coils shall be leak tested to 300 psi, with minimum burst pressure of 2000 psi at ambient temperature. Number of coil rows and circuits shall be selected to provide performance as required per the plans. Coil performance data shall be based on tests run in accordance with ARI Standard 410. END OF SECTION AIR DISTRIBUTION 15400 - 8 _ F SECTION 15500 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. The Contractor for the work covered by each section of the specifications shall famish and install all hangers, supports and isolation required by pipe or equipment included in this work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS r ' A. Materials shall be provided for the support of all piping and equipment. The following tabulation lists materials suitable for this duty. Equal materials manufactured by Fee and Mason, Carpenter -Patterson, Grinnell or Modem will be considered. r, MATERIAL SERVICE FEE AND MASON CAT. F Hanger Hanger Hanger Hanger Hanger Hanger Hanger Hanger Hanger Wall Bracket Saddles Cone. Inserts Rollers Pipe Clamps Pipe Clamps Pipe Rest Exp Shield Beam Clamps Adjuster Copper Tubing 4" and Larger Copper Tubing 3" and smaller Steel Lines 3" and smaller Steel lines 4" and larger Outside Insulation -all lines Cast Iron Lines Plastic Pipe Refrigerant Pipe Glass Pipe All Steel Lines On Rollers New Construction Steel Piping 2" and Smaller 3" and Larger All Concrete All All 364 copper plated 361 copper plated 215 or 199 239 239 239 108 + 109 102 375 150, 151, or 155 71,1710, 1712, 172, 173 185 161,272 304 241 295 or 291 374 249, 254, 255, 282, 280 2381 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15500 - 1 2.2 HANGER RODS A. All individually suspended horizontal pipes shall be supported by steel rods sized as follows: Rod Diameter 3/8" 1/2" S/8" 3/4" 2.3 HANGER SPACING Size of Steel Pipe or Copper Tube Supported 2-1/2" and smaller 3" and 4" S"through 8" 10" and larger Size of Cast Iron Pipe Supported 3" and smaller 4" through 6" 8" through 10" 12" and larger A. All hangers shall be so located as to properly support horizontal lines without appreciable sagging of these lines. The following table gives minimum spacing for copper, and steel lines, but hangers shall be more closely spaced where necessitated by conditions or the type of pipe involved or required by code. Size of Line 3/4" and smaller 1" through 1-1/2" 2" and larger All cast iron lines PART 3 - EXECUTION Hanger Spacing in Feet S 7 10 S (Minimum two per joint) 3.1 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTS A. All pipes shall be adequately supported. All piping shall be installed with due regard to expansion and contraction, and the type of hanger, method of support, location of supports, etc. shall be governed in part by this consideration. Transmission of vibration and noise shall also be considered and any special suspension with vibration dampeners required to minimize transmissions shall be used where specified or required. B. All exposed vertical risers running near walls shall be supported from the walls. Each line shall have a minimum of 2 supports, not greater than 10'0" on centers, with the additional provision that there shall be a support near the top of the riser. All supports shall be aligned. C. All vertical pipes shall be supported with riser clamps sized to fit the lines and to adequately support their weight. At the bases of lines, where required for proper supports, furnish and install anchor base fittings or other approved supports. D. Where vertical lines run down to a point near the floor and a support is needed, they may be supported by means of a pipe leg welded to the pipe, extending down to the floor and terminating in a capped end resting on the floor. E. Where pipes other than those specified hereinbefore, are running along walls, they shall be supported using hangers as described hereinbefore, but suspended from brackets HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 13500 - 2 r I r F. G. bolted to the wall. Specially fabricated clips or U-braces may be used where commercially manufactured items are not available in the proper size. Where pipes or equipment are suspended under existing concrete construction, drill and use Grinnell Fig. 117 expansion case or Phillips concrete fasteners in sizes not exceeding 1/2" and for loads of 200 lbs or less. For larger rods or loads above 200 lbs drill through the beam above the bottom steel and bolt a Grinnell Fig. 202 bracket to the side of the beam for support. Size brackets per manufacturer's recommendations. Use pipe stands where required. Where multiple lines arc run horizontally at the same elevations and grades, they may be supported on trapezes formed for sections of Unistrut, angle iron, or channels suspended on rods or pipes. Trapeze members, including the suspension rods, shall be properly sized for the number, size and loaded weight of the lines they are to support. Trapeze spacings shall be in accordance with the preceding table for the smallest line supported on or from the trapezes. 3.2 DUCT HANGERS A. All ductwork shall be supported in accordance with standards published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. END OF SECTION r• HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15500 - 3 N 7 SECTION 15600 - INSULATION. , PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the installation of thermal insulation, coverings, jackets, supports, shields, etc. as described herein and/or as shown on the accompanying drawings, or reasonably implied therefrom. All surfaces which may vary from the ambient temperature shall be insulated unless specifically excepted. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS A. In describing the various materials, application procedures, and finishes, each item will be described singularly, even though there may be a multiplicity of identical applications. Also where the description is only general in nature, exact dimensions, arrangements and other data shall be determined by reference to plans, schedules, and details, including those provided by equipment manufacturers. B. Where materials are described under other sections of the specifications and are pertinent to this section, they shall be installed hereunder as though they were repeated herein. C. All insulation shall have composite fire and smoke hazard ratings as tested by procedure NFPA 225, not exceeding flame spread 25, smoke developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cement, tape, cloth, etc. shall have these same component ratings. D. All materials installed under this section of the specifications shall be manufactured in the United States of America. 2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS A. Factory -applied vapor -barrier jackets shall be laminated of flame resistant white kraft paper and .001 inch thick aluminum foil reinforced with glass fiber fabric between the foil and the paper. The foil and paper shall be adhered with a flame resistant latex adhesive. B. Where specified, insulate valves and fittings with one coat insulating cement equal to OC-110 built up to the thickness of the adjoining pipe covering and vapor seal with two 1/8 inch wet coats of vapor barrier mastic equal to Benjamin Foster No. 65-07 reinforced with glass fabric extending 2" onto the adjacent insulation. i* INSULATION 15600 - 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. The installation of all thermal insulation shall be performed by a recognized firm regularly engaged in the insulation business, using skilled insulation mechanics and using insulation materials which are the product of reputable manufacturer of the materials, using any special materials as required by these specifications and by those published standards. B. Any insulation which is not applied in a workmanlike manner will be rejected and replaced. All coverings shall be smooth, flush, dressed to line and tight. Mastic shall be neatly applied and tooled. The Architect reserves the right to reject any insulation whose appearance he deems unacceptable. 3.2 APPLICATION OF INSULATION A. Apply insulation and pipe covering after all work has been tested, found to be tight and accepted as such by the Architect. Thoroughly clean and dry all surfaces to be covered. B. On glass fiber pipe covering with factory -applied vapor -barrier jacket, lap the jacket on the longitudinal seams and seal with vapor barrier lap adhesive equal to Benjamin Foster 82-07 or use self sealing lap. Tightly butt the ends and cover butt joints with a 4" wide band of vapor barrier jacket secured with the same adhesive. 3.3 INSULATION ON EQUIPMENT AND PIPING SYSTEMS A. The following describes materials, thicknesses and finishes for insulation and coverings. In the following, the word "exposed" shall apply to any line, duct, or other material or surface in any room above the lowest floor in any building unit, exterior to the building and above ground, and/or in equipment rooms; the word "concealed" shall apply to any — line, duct, or other material or surface in other underfloor areas, ceiling spaces furrings and chases. B. Also included in this section is the requirement for patching and repair of existing insulation where new connections are made. 1. Chilled Water Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber pipe covering with factory applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket equal to Manville "Micro-Lok APT ._ 850". Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. 2. Heating Water Supply and Return Lines: Insulate with molded sectional glass fiber — pipe covering with factory applied all purpose vapor barrier jacket equal to Manville "Micro-Lok APT 650". Insulation shall be 1-1/2" thick. Insulate valves and fittings with fiberglass inserts and "Zeston" PVC covers. 3. Drain Lines: 3/8" thick Armaflex. Insulation may be slit flange type or threaded on r during fabrication. 4. High Pressure Ducts: a. Insulate the round cold high pressure ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats INSULATION 15600 - 2 r r of Benjamin Foster 85-20 adhesive. Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. Cover all joints, punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip. Install with not more than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. Note that double wall duct need not be insulated. 5. Ducts: a. Insulate the supply, return and fresh air ducts with 0.75 lb. density, 2" thick Manville "Microlite R Series" glass fiber flexible insulation having a factory applied FSKL vapor barrier jacket. b. This insulation shall be secured, vapor barrier side out, to sheet metal. On horizontal runs, lap top and bottom sheets over edges of side pieces. Butt joints tightly. Except on ducts handling warm air only, seal all joints, punctures, breaks and fasteners with two coats of Benjamin Foster 30-35 adhesive. ,Embed three inch wide Glassfab membrane in adhesive between coats. Install with not more than 25% compression in accordance with manufacturer's installation instructions. C. Cover all joints,.punctures and breaks with three inch wide facing strip. d. Ducts handling warm air only need not be vapor sealed. END OF SECTION INSULATION 15600 - 3 SECTION 15700 EQUIPMENT PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with the applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's daia and shop drawings on all items specified. 1.3 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications pertains to all labor, materials, equipment and service necessary for and incidental to the mechanical equipment as shown on the drawings and/or as specified herein. B. This section requires the furnishing of all equipment specified and/or shown on the drawings. Equipment referred to singularly shall mean each item, and the total number of items shown or specified shall be furnished. All equipment shall be manufactured in the USA. C. All appurtenances and auxiliary equipment necessary to the function of any specified item of equipment shall be furnished with the item of equipment, whether specifically mentioned or not. Each item of equipment shall perform the function for which it is intended, and all work necessary to provide a complete functional system shall be provided. D. This specification requires that all items of equipment be completely installed, finally connected, tested and placed in service. E. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to verify all requirements of the equipment and the contract and certify with the submittal of the shop drawings that all requirements have been met, including: 1. Space requirements 2. Electrical requirements (voltage, phase, wires - no. and size) 3. Capacities 4. Clearance for maintenance 5. Quality 6. Quantity PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 MOTORS A. Motors shall be famished for all motor driven equipment. Motors with special operating conditions such as multiple speed or in hazardous locations shall be as specified under the equipment served. General service motors driving through flexible couplings or belts shall conform to the following requirements: EQUIPMENT 15700 - 1 1. Less than 1/6 HP: Split phase, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 2. Fractional larger than 116 HP: Capacitor start, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.0 or greater. Provide with inherent thermal overload protection. 3. Integral Horsepower, Single Phase: Capacitor type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or enclosed as required by exposure, with a service factor of 1.15. 4. Three Phase: High efficiency continuous duty squirrel cage type, 40 degree C ambient, dripproof or totally enclosed fan cooled as required by exposure with a service factor of 1.15. Power factor shall be 95% or greater. Motors shall be equal to Gould E-Plus. 2.2 MOTOR STARTERS A. The Division 15 Contractor shall furnish all motor starters (controllers) and control equipment for equipment specked under Division 15. The Contractor under this section of the specifications shall be responsible for coordinating starter sizes, characteristics, heater element sizes and all other details. B. All individual starters shall be the product of a single manufacturer and submitted for review at the same time. C. Where starters are specified with items of equipment, the starters shall be factory mounted and wired. D. Magnetic Starters (Full Voltage): Starters shall be individual units, combination starter/molded case circuit breaker units, combination starter/fused disconnect switch units or combination starter/unfused disconnect switch units unless otherwise indicated. E. Units shall be of General Electric, Square D, Westinghouse, Federal or Gould manufacture with the proper enclosures. F. Provide pilot lights and either pushbutton stations or hand -off -automatic switches as required for the control of each item of equipment. Generally, pushbutton stations shall be used only where no interlock or remote functions are specified. Control devices shall be in the starter cover unless otherwise indicated. G. Provide auxiliary contacts on starters to accomplish interlocks and control as specified. Starter disconnecting means shall have auxiliary contacts to disconnect all control circuits when the starter is disconnected. H. Provide all three phase starters with three overload elements, one per phase. I. Equip each starter unit with a control power transformer, with 120 volt secondary, a secondary fuse in one leg and the other secondary leg grounded. J. Manual Starters: Where manual starters are indicated, they shall consist of a horsepower rated on -off switch, or hand -off -auto switch with a pilot light and overload element(s) in the same enclosure. Where the starter is installed in public areas, it shall be in a recessed box with a stainless steel coverplate. 2.3 OUTDOOR ROOF CURB MOUNTED AIR HANDLERS A. General: 1. Furnish and install York CurbPak or equal double wall air handling unit(s). All internal components specified in the air handling unit schedule shall be factory furnished and installed. Unit(s) shall be completely factory assembled. The units EQUIPMENT 15700 - 2 ,.., L cooling, heating, ventilating capacity and performance shall meet or exceed that shown on the schedule. 2. The air handling unit(s) shall be specifically designed for outdoor application. Units shall be designed for curb mounting. 3. All necessary tags and decals to aid in the service and/or indicating caution areas shall be provided. Electrical wiring diagrams shall be attached to the control panel access door. Installation and maintenance manuals shall be supplied with each unit. 4. Units shall ship in one (1) piece where possible. Shipping splits shall be provided as required for installation. Lifting lugs shall be supplied on each side of the split l to facilitate rigging and joining of sections. B. Unit Base: 1. The entire unit shall be provided with a full-length, continuous, base rail channel. Base rail channels shall be formed of a minimum of 12 gauge galvanized steel. All major components shall be supported from the base. Integral lifting lugs shall be r provided to facilitate rigging and installation. Lifting lugs shall be suitable for use as unit tie down points. 2. The unit base shall be designed with a recessed curb mounting location. The recessed curb -mounting surface shall provide a continuous surface for field C application of curb gasketing to create a weathertight seal between the curb and unit. C. Unit Casing: 1. The unit shall have a frame construction consisting of integral galvanized steel vertical and horizontal structural members. The frame shall be constructed to permit complete removal of the wall and roof panels without affecting the structural integrity of the unit. 2. All panels shall be double wall and be constructed of G90 mill galvanized sheet steel, formed and reinforced to provide a rigid assembly. The exterior casing shall be constructed of a minimum of 18 gauge galvanized steel. 3. Roof and sidewall seams shall be continuously caulked and covered with formed 20 gauge galvanized seam caps. All panel fasteners shall be secured through standing seams to prevent fastener penetrations that are exposed to the airstream. 4. The unit shall have a sloped roof to promote drainage of precipitation and prevent standing water. The roof shall have a minimum pitch of 1/4 inch per foot. The roof shall overhang the side panels by a minimum of 2 inches to prevent precipitation drainage from streaming down the unit side panels. S. Exterior casing screws shall be zinc chromate coated. 6. The panel insulation shall be a full 2" (non -compressed) throughout the entire unit. �., The insulation shall meet the flame and smoke generation requirements of NFPA-90A. D. Removable Panels: All wall and roof panels shall be completely removable for unit access and removal of components. All panels shall be removable without affecting the structural unit frame. Panels shall be completely gasketed, with a Copolymer rubber sealant ribbon. E. Access Doors: 1. Double wall access doors shall be provided in the fan, filter and inlet sections of the r" unit on the coil header -aide of the unit. Access doors shall also be provided on both !! sides of the unit in all sections constructed with welded panels. 2. Doors shall be double wall construction with a solid liner and a minimum thickness of 2 inches. Doors shall be attached to the unit with a continuous, full-length piano -type stainless steel hinge. Latches shall be positive -action, creating an airtight seal between the door and unit. EQUIPMENT 15700 -3 3. Panels shall be completely gasketed with a closed -cell, neoprene gasket. 4. The interior lining shall be a perforated lining of a minimum of 20 gauge galvanized steel. - F. DWDI Fan Sections (SFH): 1. The fan section shall be equipped with double width, double inlet (DWDI) centrifugal type wheels for horizontal discharge. An access door shall be provided on the coil header side of the unit for fan/motor access. 2. All units with double width, double inlet fans shall have fan and unit performance rated and certified in accordance with ARI Standard 430. 3. All airfoil fans shall bear the AMCA Seal. Airfoil fan performance shall be based on tests made in accordance with AMCA standards 210 and comply with the requirements of the AMCA certified ratings program for air and sound. In addition, ^ all airfoil wheels shall comply with AMCA standard 99-2408-69 and 99-2401-82. G. Fan Drives: Fan drives shall be selected for a 1.5 service factor and anti -static belts shall be furnished. H. Fan Motors: 1. Fan and fan motor shall be internally mounted and isolated on a full width isolator support channel using 2" springs [with seismic restraints]. The fan discharge shall be connected to the fan cabinet using a flexible connection to insure vibration -free operation. 2. Fan motors shall be NEMA design TEFC High Efficiency ball -bearing type with electrical characteristics and horsepower as specified. Motors shall be 1750 RPM, '— totally enclosed, fan cooled type. The motor shall be located within the unit on an adjustable base. I. Cooling Coil Segments (CM): -- 1. The cooling coil segments shall have a full width sloped drain pan to assure positive condensate drainage The drain pan shall extend downstream of the coil to provide sufficient amount of space to contain possible moisture carryover. _ 2. A pipe chase shall be provided to enclose field piping. The pipe chase shall have 1' insulation and have double wall. construction 3. Cooling coils shall be furnished to meet the performance requirements set forth in the schedule. All coils shall have performance certified in accordance with ARI Standard 410. 4. The primary surface shall be 5/8" O.D. copper tube, staggered in direction of airflow. Tubes shall be mandrel expanded to from fin bond and provide burnished, work -hardened interior surface. The tubes shall have a minimum tube wall thickness of .020'. _ 5. The extended surface shall consist of die -formed, continuous, aluminum fins. The fins shall have fully drawn collars to accurately space fins, and to form a protective sheath for the. primary surface. The fin thickness shall be .006". A phenolic coating shall be applied to the primary and extended surfaces of the coil. The complete coating shall show no evidence of softening, blistering, cracking, crazing, flaking, or loss of adhesion. The process shall result in a three mil dry film coating. 6. Coil casing to be constructed of 16-gauge stainless steel with aluminum die -formed -' corrugated fins. The fins shall have drawn collars, be belled and mechanically expanded to firmly bond the copper tubes to the fins. 7. Drainable Water coils shall be designed to operate at 250 psig design working —' pressure and up to 300'F and shall be tested with 325 psig compressed air under water. Circuiting shall provide free and complete draining and venting when EQUIPMENT 15700 - 4 _ F , + , installed level in the unit. All vent and drain connections shall be extended to the outside of the unit casing. 8. Coils shall be circuited for counter flow of air and water. Water velocities shall not exceed 7 feet per second and/or exceed the water pressure drops scheduled. All coils shall have same end connections regardless of the number of rows deep. 9. Headers shall be of heavy seamless copper tubing, silver -brazed to tubes. Connections shall be of red -brass, with male pipe threads, silver -brazed to the header. A 1/4' FPT, plugged, vent or drain tap shall be provided on each connection. 10. (AHU-10) Direct expansion coils shall be designed to conform to the ANSI B9.1 (Safety code for mechanical Refrigeration) when operating with a refrigerant r pressure not exceeding 250 psig and shall be tested with 325 prig compressed air under water. The completed coil shall be dehydrated, including headers, return bends and distributor and sealed for shipment. Each coil shall be furnished with a brass distributor with solder -type connections. Suction and discharge connections shall be on the same end regardless of rows deep. J. Integral Face and Bypass Coil Segment (HR3): 1. Integral Face and Bypass Coils shall be factory supplied and installed. Coils shall be as manufactured by the L.J. Wing Company. 2. Coils shall be ARI Certified for capacity in compliance with ARI Standard 410. 3. Each coil shall consist of a built-in series of finned heating elements and bypasses with interlocking dampers. [Dampers shall be controlled by electric [pneumatic] damper motor and airstream thermostat.] 4. Dampers shall be 16 gauge, roll -formed steel with air-dried enamel finish. The coil casing shall be 14 gauge galvanized steel with rigid framework, completely painted. Coils shall be factory tested at 200 psig steam and 500 psig hydrostatic pressure. K. Drain Pans: 1. The main coil drain pan shall be sloped to assure positive condensate drainage with a condensate connection opposite the coil header side of the unit. The pan shall be of double- wall construction with a stainless steel liner. The pan shall have a minimum of 2" of insulation. 2. Coils with finned height greater than 48" shall have an intermediate drain pan extending the entire finned length of the coil. The intermediate pans shall have drop tubes to guide condensate to the main drain pan. L. Flat Filter Segment (F1): The filter frames shall be constructed of galvanized steel and be built as an integral part of the unit with [front loading] [side service] with a standard access door on the coil header side of the unit. Flat filter segments shall accommodate 2- inch media. The `media shall be throwaway 30% pleated as determined by ASHRAE Standard 52-76. �+ M. High Efficiency Rigid Filter Segment (F3): The filter frames shall be constructed of galvanized steel and be built as an integral part of the unit with [front loading] [side service] and with a standard access door on the coil header side of the unit. High efficiency, rigid filter segments shall accommodate 2 inch 30% pleated prefilters and high efficiency rigid -type filters of the specified efficiency. Rigid filter media shall be 12 inches deep and shall be a minimum of 95% as determined by ASHRAE Standard 52-76. Filter media shall be listed Class 2 in accordance with U.L. Standard 900. r, j N. HEPA Filter Segment'(F6): [` EQUIPMENT 15700 - 5 1. The filter frames will be constructed of galvanized steel and be built as an integral part of the unit with front loading. Absolute-HEPA filter segments will _ accommodate Absolute-HEPA type filters. 2. HEPA filters media will be 12 inches deep. The filters will be sealed against the filter frame with spring -loaded, nut and clip assemblies to prevent air bypassing around the filter. ` a.. 30% pleated b. Absolute-HEPA media will be a minimum of 99.97% as determined by ASHRAE Standard 52-76. Filter media will be listed Class 2 [Class 1] under U.L. Standard 900. .0. Filter Gauge: A magnahelic, differential pressure gauge shall be factory installed and flush mounted .on drive side to -measure the pressure drop across the filter bank. P. Inlet Segment (R2): 1. The inlet segment shall be designed to form a plenum. The outside and return airstreams shall be directed into each other by the damper assemblies to facilitate mixing of the airstreams. The inlet segment shall consist of multi -leaf, parallel acting blades, with inter -connecting return air and outside air dampers. The dampers shall be located in the bottom and rear of the unit. — 2. The outside air damper shall be sized for 100% of unit airflow. The damper shall be covered with a factory assembled rain hood. The rain hood shall have a drip -lip the full width of the hood to channel moisture away from the air being drawn into the unit. 3. A steel safety grate shall be factory installed over the return air opening in the floor of the unit. _ Q. Ultra -Low Leak Dampers: Dampers shall be of ultra -low leak design having airfoil blades constructed of 14 gage, double skin, galvanized steel. The damper blades shall be provided with extruded vinyl edge seals and flexible metal compressible jamb seals. Leakage shall I not exceed shall not exceed 3.70 CFM/squarc foot at 1" w.g. and 9.0 CFM/square foot at " - 4" w.g. The blades shall be parallel [opposed] acting. R. Diffuser Segment (DIF): Diffuser Segment shall be constructed with a perforated diffuser plate assuring even distribution of airflow across the entire unit air tunnel. Units with — blow -through coils and final filters (downstream of the fan) shall have a diffuser segment immediately downstream of the fan. S. Access Section (ACC): Access Section shall be provided for placement anywhere in the unit to gain access to a particular area. The access section shall be available with a depth of 24". The access section shall be provided with a door as standard on the header side of the unit. T. Discharge Plenum (DPB): A discharge plenum segment shall be provided with a bottom discharge opening. U. Roof Curb: A prefabricated galvanized steel mounting curb shall be provided for field — assembly on the roof decking prior to unit placement. The roof curb shall be a perimeter type with complete perimeter support of the air handling unit. The curb shall be a minimum of 14 inches high. Gasketing shall be provided for field mounting between the _ unit base and the roof curb. The curb shall include a 2' x 4' wood nailer. The roof curb shall be insulated with 1.5 inch-3# insulation. EQUIPMENT 15700 - 6 F i VARIABLE FREQUENCY MOTOR CONTROLS - Serves New Rooftop 2.4 ARIAB Q p Air Unit A. General: Establish requirements for variable voltage variable frequency motor controls, for speed control of fans, blowers, or pumps driven with AC motors. B. Variable Frequency Motor Control: The control shall be constructed of new materials only. The control shall produce a 3 phase output capable of providing efficient operation of standard NEMA or IEC design AC induction motors. The control shall consist of a power section made up of a fixed AC to DC converter, a fused filter, storage network, and an inverter using either bipolar transistors or IGBT's in the power switching section. The logic control section shall be microprocessor based using a 16-bit processor and VLSI for minimum parts count and maximum reliability. The power section shall be isolated from the control logic between the driver output of the control printed circuit card and the power switching devices. Pulse -Coded Sine Wave reconstruction via IGBT switches. C. Input power: 3 phase, 60 Hz, either 208, 230, or 460 VAC 1. Nominal input voltage +/- 10% 2. Input frequency stability +/- 5% 2. Comply to IEEE 519-1981 without external modification on a power system with 2% maximum source impedance and a capacity of at least 1.04 times the control full load input current. 3. Comply to FCC subpart J of part 15 for class A computing device from 7 MHZ to 30 MHZ for conduction limit without external modification. D. Output power: 3 phase, 1.5 to 60 Hz with variable voltage to give proper and efficient operation of variable torque load. E. Overload capacity factory set at 125% for 1 minute, programmable from 100% to 150%. F. Minimum Requirements for Reliable Control Operation: 1. Fused input door interlocked disconnect 2. Isolated 115 VAC control transformer 3. Digital annunciated fault and limit functions for: a. Thermal overload relay trip b. Microprocessor self -check function C. Output overcurrent trip d. DC bus overvoltage trip C. Inverse time overload trip £ Heatsink overtemperaturc trip g. DC bus fuse open h. DC bus overvoltage (regen. limit) i. Output ground fault 4. Lamp annunciation for the following functions: a. Inverter ready light b. Inverter run light C. Bypass run light d. Bypass safety lockout light (red) C. Inverter safety lockout light (red) f. Input line power on light g. Control voltage enabled light G. Minimum Required Standard Features: 1. Door mounted components: a. Inverter run indication b. Bypass run indication C. Remote safety lockout indication EQUIPMENT 15700 - 7 I d. Digital speed (frequency or percent speed) and motor output amp meters C. Manual speed potentiometer f. Inverter / Off / Bypass switch g. Front push-button for fault reset and enable h. Manual / Auto reference selector switch i. Annunciation as in section 4.3 2. Digital fault diagnostic front panel stores and displays up to four faults in sequence of occurrence for fault tracing. 3. DC bus charged indicator — 4. Current limit circuit active to prevent nuisance tripping during accel or run conditions. 5. Regeneration limit circuit active to prevent nuisance OV tripping during deceleration. 6. Minimum and maximum speed set, separate and non -interactive. 7. Auto restart selectable after power failure, controller fault, or both. 8. Auto restart after power loss selectable for auto speed mode only. 9. Critical frequency lockout for up to 3 frequencies, available from 0 to 100% speed with adjustable bandwidth of at least 10%. 10. Only non -filament type indicating lights may be used. 11. Control shall survive, without component failure, and annunciate, output phase to phase and phase to ground faults. 12. Two contactor bypass circuit, electrically and mechanically interlocked, and integral to enclosure with branch circuit protection in accordance with NEC. 13. Control shall have the following isolated instrument signal follower: a 4 to 20 madc 0 to 10 vdc 3 to 15 psi (optional) setpoint or floating point (optional) b. Loss of reference protection, where the control constantly monitors the input analog speed signals for abnormal changes, i.e. where the analog reference signal changes by more than 90% in 500 msec or less. The control shall then maintain its speed at 80% of the last speed commanded, until such time as the control is commanded to stop or the analog reference returns to normal. C. Volts per hertz ratio shall be automatic, tracking motor load requirements to achieve most efficient operation within the parameters set by 5.16, potentiometer adjustments not allowed. d. Control shall have available 15 selectable volts per hertz patterns, with programmable voltage reduction during run to maximize energy savings. C. Control must be capable of starting into a spinning motor and switching from inverter to bypass back to inverter without delay and without tripping off line of the inverter. Also must be capable of stopping a motor rotating in the reverse direction and then accelerating that motor in the proper direction. f. To reduce possible acoustical noise and electrical interference the control must — have an automatically variable carrier frequency from 380 to 17000 hertz. There shall be no sudden frequency shifts which cause acoustical noise increases during shifts in the motor. NEITHER UNIT NOR MOTOR SHALL GENERATE ANY AUDIBLE NOISE ABOVE THAT GENERATED WITH ACROSS -THE -LINE CONNECTION (Cooling fan noise excluded). g. Control shall have a fused door interlocked disconnect with fuses rated for _ proper branch circuit protection. h. Isolation transformers or line reactors are not allowed. EQUIPMENT 15700 - 8 F i i. Control must comply to IEEE 519-1981 General Systems, Special Applications. j. Control must comply to FCC subpart J of part 15 for class A computing devices, conduction limit between 7 MHZ to 30 MHZ. k. All components must be supplied in an integral enclosure, separate enclosures are not allowed. 1. All controls under 150 horsepower will require ETL or equal Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory approval. H. Signal Outputs: 1. Unit shall have one Normally Closed inverter contact and one Normally Closed bypass contact. 2. Each unit shall be furnished with a 0 - 10 We signal output which shall be proportional to unit speed or amperes ( uscr selectable ). . 3. LCD display read out of : a. Reference Input Hertz Output Output Voltage Output Current Output KW. b. On -the -Fly Programming capability. C. User selectable IGBT switch signalling. d. RS-232 Interface capability. I. Cabinet Construction: 1. Mechanically and Electrically Interlocked Starters with Thermal Overload Protection for Inverter and By-pass. 2. Hinged Door access for Inverter section which allows access to all components with out disconnection of any wiring or removal of any components from unit chassis. 3. Face access to all fusing. 4. Input line fusses to protect the inverter. By-pass fuses to protect the motor. 5. Hand-held/Door-mounted programming interface module. J. Approval: The variable speed control shall be as manufactured by IDM controls or approved equal. Deviations may not be taken from this specification without prior written approval. All substitutions shall require a sample to be delivered to the approving authority for testing prior to approval. The approving authority shall not be held responsible for any damages to the drive during testing. K. Warranty, start-up, and training: 1. The drive supplier shall include a one year warranty that includes parts and labor and guarantee unit down times not to exceed 24 hours of notification. 2. The drive supplier shall include factory start-up. 3. The drive supplier shall train the owners personnel to identify, test, and replace items in the case of failure. Training shall include programming instruction and basic motor, inverter, and speed control theory. 2.5 FILTERS A. Provide all filters specified herein and/or scheduled or shown on the drawings. All filters shall be erected in holding frames, tightfitting, with no bypass path. B. All filters of every type shall be UL listed Class I or II. C. Every air handling device which supplies air to any space shall have a filter bank. No., size, and type of filters, shall be as scheduled on the drawings. D. All frames shall be fitted with new media at final acceptance. In addition provide 100% spare filters. EQUIPMENT 15700 - 9 2.6 SIDE ACCESS FILTER HOUSINGS A. Side access filter ' housings shall be factory fabricated by the filter manufacturer. Dimensions and capacities shall be as scheduled. B. Housings shall be fabricated from 16 gauge galvanized steel. Housings shall have gasketed access doors on both sides with hinges and sealed with snap acting latches. Gaskets shall be continuous, airtight and replaceable. Filter rails shall receive the filters scheduled with no bypass. Rails shall be convertible to cartridge or bag type filters. Filters shall be retained by adjustable spring tension mechanisms with positive air seal — around the frame. C. Side access filters shall have duct flanges on entering and leaving air sides. D. Support the housings on structural steel frames or on concrete pads as required. �- E. Test with soapsuds after erection to insure air tight construction. F. Manometers: Provide and install a Dwyer gage with level, probes, cocks, and copper tubing across every filter bank. Attach the gage to the filter housing or adjacent duct. ,r END OF SECTION J EQUIPMENT 15700 - 10 SECTION 15800 -TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements, and Supplemental Conditions. z 1.2 SCOPE A. This section of the specifications comprises the furnishing of all labor, materials, transportation, tools and appliances and in performing all operations in connection with the testing, balancing and adjusting of various systems and portions thereof to produce proper flows of air and water, correct setting of regulation devices, and other end results as more fully described hereinafter. B. Upon completion of the installation and start up of the mechanical equipment, check, adjust, and balance systemic components to obtain optimum conditions in each conditioned space to the building. C. Prepare and submit to the Architect complete reports on the balance and operation of the system. D. Make a total of three inspections within 90 days after occupancy of the building to insure that satisfactory conditions are being maintained throughout and to satisfy any unusual conditions. E. Make inspections in the building during the opposite season from that in which the initial adjustments were made and at those times make any necessary modifications to the initial adjustments required to produce optimum operation of the systemic components, to produce the proper conditions in each conditioned space. F. During the balancing, the temperature regulation shall be adjusted for proper relationship between controlling instruments and calibrated by the Contractor. The correctness of the final setting shall be proved by taking hourly readings for a period of 4 successive eight hour days in a typical room -on each separately controlled zone. The total variation shall not exceed two degrees from the preset median temperature during the entire temperature survey period. G. In all fan systems, the air quantities shown on the plans may be varied as required to secure a maximum temperature variation of 2 degrees within each separately controlled zone, but the total air quantity indicated for each zone must be obtained. It shall be the obligation of the Contractor to furnish or revise fan drives and/or motors if necessary, without cost to the Owner, to attain the specified air volumes. H. Before final acceptance is made, furnish the following data: 1. A tabulation of the simultaneous temperature of all spaces on each separately controlled zone, together with the outside temperature at time of measurement. 2. A listing of the measured air quantities at each outlet corresponding to the temperature tabulation specified above. 3. Air quantities at each return and exhaust air handling device. 4. Flow rate and temperature at each coil and heating device. r TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800 - 1 i' S. Static pressure readings entering and leaving each supply, and exhaust fan, and other components of the system. These readings shall be related to fan curves in terms of CFM handled. 6. Motor current readings at each fan and pump. The voltages at the time of the reading shall be listed. I. The above data shall be neatly entered on appropriate forms together with any typed supplements required to completely document all results. Written explanations of any abnormal conditions shall be included. All this shall be assembled into a suitable brochure and a total of 4 copies shall be provided. L When opposite season modifications are made, additional data sheets indicating new settings, readings, etc., shall be prepared and submitted in quadruplicate. 1.3 INSTRUCTIONS A. During the test periods instruct the building operating personnel in the operation and maintenance of all equipment. B. Deliver to the Owner 3 complete instruction manuals covering the maintenance and operation of the system components. In addition, provide schematic wiring diagrams of each piece of equipment framed under glass and mounted on the wall as directed. Provide complete data on all equipment, including for each item a parts list, and the name and address of the vendor where replacement parts can be purchased. END OF SECTION TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 15800 - 2 SECTION 15900 - TEMPERATURE REGULATION PARTI- GENERAL 1.1 NOTE A. Conform with applicable provisions of the General Conditions, Special Conditions, General Requirements and Supplemental Conditions. 1.2 SUBMITTALS A. Submit manufacturer's data on all materials and equipment. Include system schematics indicating all devices, pneumatic piping, electrical wiring and sequence of operation. Sequence of operation shall reference each component device by designation used on schematics. 1.3 SCOPE A. This Contractor shall include in his bid an amount necessary to cover a complete system of automatic temperature regulating equipment. It is intended that the system be pneumatic in its operation except for certain sensing functions, remote starting and stopping provisions, resetting arrangements, and alarm indications which can best be performed by electronic instruments. It shall include all master and submaster thermostats, valves, dampers, and operators, amplifiers, air receivers, switches, piping, air regulator, relays, multiplexers, cabinets, etc. required to make it complete in full accordance with the intent of the plans and the following description. B. The wiring for all the remote indicating, motor control, control set point and adjustment and alarm devices shall originate in a terminal board and extend to and connect to all multiplexers, relays, thermocouples, and similar devices. The wiring shall be performed by the Contractor under Division 16 in accordance with diagrams on the plans, as specified herein and as indicated on the drawings which this contractor shall provide. C. The temperature regulation equipment shall be installed and adjusted to secure the sequences described hereinafter. The materials and equipment described herein shall be sufficient to any of the remote devices of reference elsewhere herein, but shall be arranged as required to operate in conjunction with those remote devices. D. The Contractor shall furnish and install all automatic dampers, and all automatic valves. The Contractor shall furnish, install, and adjust all damper and valve operators and all other switches, relays, etc. comprising the temperature regulation system. Temperature regulation specified herein is based on Johnson Controls. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.1 -COMPRESSED AIR A. The existing air compressor will be reused to provide control air. This Contractor shall k begin at the existing air line, connect 1" to the service and extend it according to the l various requirements cited by, and inherent to, the descriptions herein. A manual valve r TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 1 i shall be provided to allow isolation of the building from the service. Verify the location of the existing air line. Provide a ball valve at connection point. 2.2 GAUGES A. Provide and install two inch dial pressure gauges at each pneumatic valve and damper r operator to indicate its performance. All such gauges shall be identified by a permanent tag or label indicating to which operator they apply. 2.3 THERMOSTATS A. All thermostats shall be of the gradual acting type, except in cases specified herein to the contrary. All shall be adjustable as to set point. B. Thermostats shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree of set point. C. Those for exposed installation in finished areas shall have plain cases and concealed adjustments unless specifically described otherwise herein. D. The interrelationship of reset schedule of all submaster instruments shall be job -adjustable and capable of broad ranges of speck value. E. The locations of all room type thermostats are indicated on the drawings. The Contractor shall examine these locations and if, in his opinion, the operation of any instrument would be improved by changing its location, he shall so notify the Architect. With the Architect's approval, he shall install the thermostat in the location of his choice. 2.4 SAFETY LOW LIMIT A. Safety low limits shall be manual reset line voltage type with bellows actuated switches. Twenty foot capillary shall be responsive to the coolest section of its length. 2.5 PRESSURE CONTROLLERS A. Differential pressure controllers shall be direct or reverse acting to provide fully — proportional control of pneumatic motors and valves. Air pressure output will be varied in relation to the difference in water pressures it senses. B. Static pressure regulators shall be direct or reverse acting with adjustable setpoint and throttling range with field calibration capability. 2.6 STATIC PRESSURE SENSORS A. All static pressure sensors shall be of the force balance feedback, linear output type. The range should be 0-7 of water adjustable in 2" of water spans. B. For certain applications, as listed in the specifications, static pressure sensing and control shall be incorporated in the same instrument. If so, this device shall be direct or reverse acting with a range of 0-8" of water and an adjustable throttling range from 0.02 to 0.5" water and should be capable of being set to control static pressure as small as 0.01" of water. C. These controllers shall have an adjustable span for setting to ideal curve for use in variable air volume systems. If controllers without adjustable span are used a square root extractor ` must be used to allow for ideal curve setting. TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 2 r, 2.7 CONTROL VALVES, WATER A. All modulating straight -through water valves shall be provided with equal -percentage contoured throttling plugs. All three-way valves shall be provided with linear throttling plugs such that the total flow through the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position. B. Valves 3" and smaller shall be screwed type, valves 4" and larger shall be flanged. Valves shall be factory -rated to withstand the pressures encountered. Valves shall have stainless -steel stems and spring -loaded teflon packing. C. Water valves shall be sized for a pressure drop equal to the coil they serve but not to exceed 5 psi. Valves shall have replaceable seats and discs. 2.9 AIR FLOW CONTROL DAMPERS A. The temperature control contractor will provide all control dampers of the types indicated on the plans. Frames shall not be less than 13 gauge galvanized steel. Blades must not be over 8 inches wide nor less than .16 gauge galvanized steel roll formed. Bearings shall be oilite, ball bearing or nylon with 1/2" shafts. Side seals shall be stainless steel of the tight -seal spring type. Dampers and seals shall be suitable for temperature ranges of 40 degrees to 200 degrees F. B. All proportional control dampers shall be opposed or parallel blade type and all two position dampers 'shall be parallel -blade types. C. Dampers shall be minimum leakage type to conserve energy and the manufacturer shall submit leakage and flow characteristic data for all control dampers with the temperature control submitted. Maximum leakage shall be 3% at static pressure of 3 inches of W.C. D. All control dampers shall be standard products of the temperature control manufacturer's factory. Local fabrication of dampers is not allowed. 2.9 PNEUMATIC ACTUATORS A. Pneumatic operators shall be sized to operate their appropriate dampers or valves with sufficient reserve power to provide smooth modulating action or two -position action as specified. B. Where sequencing of actuators is called for such sequencing shall be accomplished by spring ranges adequate for the application. C. Where critical application controllers are used, or where actuators are controlled from pressure sensors, pilot positioners shall be used. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION A. This Contractor shall design and install the temperature regulation system using components as hereinbefore described to effect the performance functions described hereinafter. Considerable latitude is permitted in the arrangement and selection of components. However, the sequences described must be achieved automatically, within the tolerance specified, without manual manipulation, and any modification to the submitted design required to achieve this result shall be done at no change in the contract price. r t TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 3 3.2 VARIABLE AIR VOLUME AIR HANDLING UNITS A. These air units are single zone variable air volume air handling units with chilled water _ cooling coils, outside air dampers, return air dampers, and inlet vane control on the supply fans. B. Morning Warm -Up Cycle: During the morning warm-up operation, the air unit fans shall be on. The outside air dampers shall remain closed and the chilled water cooling coil valves shall remain closed. The discharge static air pressure controller shall modulate the inlet vane actuator to maintain a constant discharge air static pressure. C. Normal Daytime Operation: The air handling unit fan shall be on. The outside air damper shall open to an adjustable minimum position. A flow control system shall maintain a constant static pressure in the supply duct and shall control the cooling coil discharge temperature to maximize energy efficiency of the system. A static pressure transmitter located approximately 2/3 of the way down each of the 2 trunk ducts of the air unit shall provide a signal to the flow control center which shall modulate the fan inlet vanes to maintain a constant static pressure. The static pressure transmitter shall be of the automatic reset type specified under "Critical Application Controllers." D. An automatic 3-way valve shall control the discharge temperature of the cooling coil at a constant 54 degrees as the air flow varies from 100% design flow down to 60% of designed maximum flow. As the air flow decreases from 60% to 40%, the discharge temperature shall be reset upward from 54 degrees to 58 degrees. The reset schedule shall be fully job adjustable from 25% to 100% air flow and 60 degrees to 50 degrees discharge ` air temperature. E. The outside air damper shall be interlocked with the air handling unit fan in such a manner that it will not open unless the fan is running and will remain closed during the morning warm-up cycle. A pneumatic manual position switch shall be provided at each air handling unit such that outside air may be adjusted. F. A freeze protection thermostat shall be provided at the inlet of each cooling coil and upon —' activation shall shut down the air handling unit fan and close the minimum outside air damper. G. A high limit thermostat shall be located in the return and discharge duct to stop the fan -- above 136 degrees. 3.3 REHEAT COILS A. There shall be a room thermostat corresponding to each reheat coil. On a fall in space temperature, the thermostat shall modulate the hot water valve open to the coil. _ 3.4 FAN TERMINAL UNITS (HFS) WITH ZONE HEATING COILS A. These units have an integral fan and motor and primary air damper. The unit manufacturer will furnish normally open damper operators. This contractor shall provide a modulating two way valve in the coil outlet and a load analyzer to monitor a minimum of two points _ from the thermostats on each respective zone. The air temperature shall be reset to satisfy the space calling for the most heat. B. When the air handling unit fan starts, an air static switch furnished by the unit manufacturer starts the unit blower. C. If the discharge temperature is below the required setpoint, the primary air damper shall modulate toward the closed position. As the primary air quantity decreases, a TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 4 i proportionate amount is taken from the return air plenum to allow a constant volume of air to be delivered by the unit. When the damper is fully closed and all air is being recirculated from the return plenum, the three way valve shall modulate open to the coil to offset the heat loss. D. If the discharge temperature rises above the required setpoint, the sequence is reversed. As the primary air damper opens to the design inlet CFM, the maximum inlet volume controller, furnished by the unit manufacturer, overrides the room thermostat. An E-P switch provided by the unit manufacturer shall close the primary damper when the fan is off. 3.5 FINAL TEST AND ADJUSTMENT A. Upon completion of the installation, the control manufacturer shall make all final adjustments to the system as may be required by actual operating conditions. All throttling range adjustments shall be set as narrow as possible without causing hunting. Setpoints and setup amounts shall be such as to provide satisfactory operation under all load conditions. The operating personnel shall be instructed in the preventive maintenance procedures and in the operating of the control system. The control manufacturer shall submit a letter stating that the control system has been installed under the control manufacturer's supervision and has been adjusted, tested under operating conditions and is operating satisfactorily in accordance with the desired sequence. B. Upon completion of the work and acceptance by the Owner, factory representatives under direct employ of the Temperature Control Manufacturer shall provide two six -hour periods of instruction to the Owner's operating personnel who have responsibility for the mechanical system. An additional six -hour instruction period shall be given at the beginning of the next heating or cooling season. C. Provide three sets of complete operating and maintenance instructions with drawings, typewritten instructions and operating sequences, and descriptive data sheets. Assemble each set in a hard cover binder with "Temperature Control" title placed on front cover and binding. 3.6 GUARANTEE A. All devices shall be guaranteed to control to plus or minus 1 degree F. System shall be guaranteed for one year after final acceptance. 3.7 BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM A. The existing system is a Johnson Metasys DDC control system. Expand and add points per the attached Point Chart. END OF SECTION TEMPERATURE REGULATION 15900 - 5 POINT DESCRIPTION AHU'1 Svstems Supply Fan Entering Air Temperature Discharge Air Sensor Low Limit - Manual Reset Temp. Sen. - Comp Room Cold Dock 3-Way Valve OA, RA Dmnper Duct static Pressure Duct Detector - Smoke VFD Output - 4-2OmA VFD Common Alarm DDC POINT CHART , r ■■rrrr rrrr■■■■■■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■ rrrr■■■ rrrr ov■■vvavv■■■■r■■■va■■■v■■■■■■■■■rv■v■■or■ oar■av■■■■■a■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■■v■rv■■■v■ v ■v■■vv v■v■■■■■v■ ■■■■■■■■■■■■■ rrrr■■■ rv■■ ©■v■■vvorv■■■■■■ar■■■■rr■■■rrr■rrr■■■■or■ �orv■v■■ar■■■■v■■rv■■r■■rrr■■rr■r■v■arv■r■ ®®■■or■ar■■■■■■■■v■■r■■rrv■■■v■rrr■ora■r■ �v■v■■vorr■■■■v■■■o■■■■■■■r■■■rrv■a■ororrr �■■■r■■rrrr■■■■■■rr■■■■rr■rrr■■■■■■r■■rrr■ City of Lubbock Municipal Square Energy Management System I Fuming Fuming and m9ockfes, fm consulting Engineers 2555 74th Lubbock Tx 79423 "6 745-2533 r POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 16000 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section. 1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES AND STANDARDS A. Regulatory Agencies: Installation, materials, equipment and workmanship shall conform to the applicable provisions of the following: 1. National Electrical Code (NEC) 2. National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) 3. Terms and conditions of the electrical utility and other authorities having lawful jurisdiction pertaining to the work required. B. Electrical contractor shall coordinate all control wiring and electrical connections to equipment items furnished by Mechanical Contractor, General Contractor, the Owner and other contractors under other sections of these specifications. This shall include all wiring and conduit for control of mechanical equipment. C. The work covered by Division 16 of the Specifications includes the furnishing of all materials, labor, transportation, tools, permits, and fees for the complete installation of all electrical work required in the Contract Drawings. D. In the event that additional or special construction is required, the Contractor is responsible for providing all material and equipment which are usually furnished with such construction in order to complete the installation, whether indicated or not. E. The contractor shall familiarize himself with the existing conditions of the site and advise the Architect of any discrepancy or conflict prior to bidding. F. The contractor shall be responsible for all permits, fees, and licenses required for the project. All cost of such permits or fees shall be included in the bid. G. All equipment and material shall be installed in accordance with the applicable manufacturer's recommendations and standards. H. Install sleeves, sealant pans, and roof penetrations as required for the installation of the electrical work. All such work is subject to the approval of the Architect. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS j A. The electrical requirements for equipment specified or indicated on the drawings are based on [ information available at the time of design. If equipment furnished for installation has electrical requirements other than indicated on the electrical drawings, the Contractor shall make any required changes to wire and conduit size, controls, overcurrent protection and installation as required to accommodate the equipment supplied, without additional charge to the Owner. The complete responsibility and costs for such adjustments shall be assigned to the respective section of this specification under which the equipment is furnished. 03879198 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS 16000 - 1 04/99 k I POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 2.2 MATERIALS 9616 A. All similar materials and equipment shall be the product of the same manufacturer unless specified -- otherwise. B. Where no specific material, apparatus or appliance is mentioned, any first-class product made by a reputable manufacturer may be used, providing it conforms to the contract requirements and meets the approval of the Engineer. C. Materials and equipment shall be the standard products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such material and shall be the manufacturer's current and standard design. D. Altitude: Equipment affected by altitude shall perform satisfactorily for the function intended at the altitude of the project site. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 GENERAL A. Fabrication, erection and installation of the complete electrical system shall be done in accordance with accepted good practice by qualified personnel experienced in such work and shall proceed in an orderly manner so as not to impede the progress of the project. The Electrical Contractor shall check all areas and surfaces where electrical equipment material is to be installed, removed or relocated and report any unsatisfactory conditions before starting work. Commencement of work signifies this Contractor's acceptance of existing conditions. In the acceptance or rejection of the finished installation, no allowance will be made for lack of skill on the part of workmen. Surfaces requiring coatings will be completed prior to installation of any electrical work on these surfaces. B. The electrical drawings are diagrammatic. The installation requirements shall be carefully coordinated with structural, architectural and mechanical conditions and shall be adjusted to avoid conflict C. All work shall be concealed in walls, ceilings, chases unless specifically noted to be exposed or -- otherwise approved. D. The locations of electrical equipment is approximate and are not intended to convey the exact details and mounting of location of outlets, equipment and other items. Exact locations are to be field determined by actual measurements. E. Consult the Architectural Drawings to determine wall finishes and locations of wall mounted equipment, counter top splashes and similar items to avoid conflict with electrical equipment. F. Provide for all conduit and wiring provisions as required for the control and operation of all mechanical equipment unless specifically noted otherwise. 3.2 PERFORMANCE TESTS A. Thoroughly test all control circuits, fixtures, services and all circuits for proper operating condition and freedom from grounds and short circuits before acceptance is requested. All equipment, appliances and devices shall be operated under load conditions. B. After the interior wiring system installation is complete, conduct operating tests for approval. When requested, test all the wire, cable, devices and equipment after installation, to assure that all material continues to possess all the original characteristics as required by governing codes and standards listed in these specifications. C. After motor operation has been verified make voltage readings at all panelboards and starters. Based on these readings, make final adjustments of primary taps on all transformers in the building as directed, or coordinate with the utility proper building voltage. D. Perform such other tests as required by other sections of these specifications or as requested to prove acceptability. 03879198 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS 16000 - 2 04/99 A. POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION E. Furnish all instruments and labor for testing. F. All material installed shall be listed, inspected, and approved by a nationally accepted testing laboratory such as UL and/or ETL. All material shall bear the UL or ETL label where available. 3.3 SUBMITTAL AND. APPROVAL OF MATERIALS A. All requirements for submittals shall comply with the applicable provisions included in the individual specification sections. B. Unless identified as a sole source item, the listing of product manufacturers, catalog numbers, etc., on the drawings is intended to establish a standard of quality of the product. It is the responsibility of the contractor to review all items he intends to submit. if equipment other than that indicated on drawings is proposed by the contractor, the information will be reviewed at the time of the submission of the submittal. 3.4 WARRANTY A. Deliver originals of all guarantees and warranties to the Architect. Warrant all equipment, materials and workmanship for one year after facility has received substantial completion in accordance with the terms of this contract. END OF SECTION 16000 03879198 BASIC ELECTRICAL METHODS 16000 - 3 04/99 i � I t POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION M i4 SECTION 16111 r CONDUIT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal conduit. B. Flexible metal conduit. C. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. D. Electrical metallic tubing. r E. Fittings and conduit bodies. - ' 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16130 - Boxes. B. Section 16170 - Grounding and Bonding. C. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. f D. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. f 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc Coated. B. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc Coated. C. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. ;.. D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. E. NECA "Standard of Installation." i F. NEMA TC 3 - PVC Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing. 1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS i A. Conduit Size: ANSI/NFPA 70. 1.5 SUBMITTALS y A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal r conduit, nonmetallic conduit, fittings and conduit bodies. 1.6 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01700. B. Accurately record actual routing of conduits. r r 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. t 03879198 CONDUIT 16111 - 1 I w 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver, store, protect, and handle Products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight. 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough -in. C. Conduit routing is shown on the Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route .._ as required to complete wiring system. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Minimum Size: 3/4" inch. B. Wet and Damp Locations above grade: Use rigid steel or liquid tight flexible conduit. C. Dry Locations: Use electrical metallic tubing for concealed and exposed locations. 2.2 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied 2. Wheatland 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC): Rigid steel. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; all steel fittings. 2.3 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Greenfield 2. Electri-Flex 3. Allied Tube 4. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: Interlocked steel construction. Aluminum is not permitted. C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1 with fittings approved for steel flex. D. Applications: Use for final connections to motorized equipment, connections to recessed lighting fixtures located in accessible ceilings. Utilization of 3/8" in lieu of the minimum %" is acceptable under the limitations of the National Electrical Code. Pre -manufacturer flexible conduit with conductors are prohibited (BX). 03879198 CONDUIT 16111 -2 04/99 P-' POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 2.4 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Ultatite 2. Electri-flex 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. C. Fittings: ANSI/NEMA FB 1. D. Applications: Use for final connections to motorized equipment in exterior locations. 2.5 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) 9616 A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied 2. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; all steel, compression or set screw type. D. Applications: Do not use below grade or in exterior locations. Use only in interior locations. 2.6 PVC COATED METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Levy 2. Robroy Industries 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. B. Description: NEMA RN-1, rigid steel conduit with external PVC coating, 20 mil thick. C. General: Protective layer may be factory applied or galvanized rigid steel conduit may be applied with two layers of corrosion resistant tape. D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: ANSI/NEMA FB 1; steel fittings with external PVC coatings to match conduit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install conduit in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install nonmetallic conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. D. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay -in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. E. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel. F. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 16190. G. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports H. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. I. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. J. Route exposed conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. K. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. M. Maintain 12 inch (300 mm) clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F (40 degrees Q. N. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de -burr cut ends. 03879198 CONDUIT 16111 -3 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 0. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. P. Use conduit hubs or sealing locknuts to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations and to cast boxes. Q. Install no more than equivalent of three 90-degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use factory elbows for bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch (50 mm) size. R. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. S. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses, control and expansion joints. T. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. U. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. V. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 16170. W. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 16195. X. Ducts shall be cleaned with an flexible mandrel assembly. Y. All conduits passing vertically through slabs on grade shall be rigid steel or IMC. Rigid steel and IMC conduits shall be applied with protective coatings as indicated herein. Z. At all recessed panelboards, stub up a minimum of (2) - 3/4" empty conduits to a location above an accessible ceiling. Label conduit as a "spare" at both ends. 3.2 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods under the provisions of Section 07270. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork or through suitable roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate location with roofing installation. END OF SECTION 16111 03879198 CONDUIT 16111 - 4 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION i` PART 1 GENERAL SECTION 16123 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 9616 y 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Building wire and cable. B. Wiring connectors and connections. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification. 1.3 REFERENCES: e A. NECA Standard of Installation (National Electrical Contractors Association). B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW: ' A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for each cable assembly type. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION: A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and values obtained. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use l stipulated by product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. 1.6 SUBMITTALS AT PROJECT CLOSEOUT: A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and circuits. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS: i A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform to NFPA 70. i B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. i. 03879198 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings. B. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. C. Conductor sizes are based on copper. D. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. r 1.10 COORDINATION: A. Coordinate Work under provisions of Section 01039. B. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 BUILDING WIRE: A. Manufacturers: 1. Southwire. 2. American Cable. 3. Houston Wire and Cable. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor: Copper. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. _ E. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THW, THHN/THWN and XHHW. 2.2 WIRING CONNECTORS: A. Split Bolt Connectors: 1. Ilsco. 2. Buchanan. 3. Burndy. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. B. Solderless Pressure Connectors: 1. llsco. ` 2. Buchanan. 3. Burndy. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. C. Spring Wire Connectors: 1. Ideal. 2. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. D. Compression Connectors: 1. Ilsco. 2. Buchanan. 3. Burndy. 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. 03879198 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 2 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions before starting work. B. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. C. Verify that mechanical work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. D. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. 3.2 PREPARATION: A. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway before installing wire 3.3 WIRING METHODS: A. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. B. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. C. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. D. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW or THHN/THWN insulation, in raceway. E. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire, Type THW, THHN/THWN or XHHW insulation, in raceway. F. Use wiring methods indicated. 3.4 INSTALLATION: A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Manufacturer's instructions. B. Route wire and cable as required to meet Project Conditions. C. Install cable in accordance with the NECA "Standard of Installation." D. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. E. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. F. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. Light fixture whips not exceeding six feet in length may utilize #14 AWG conductors within the limitations of the National Electrical Code. G. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. H. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. I. Install all conductors in conduit unless otherwise noted. J. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. K. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. L. Protect exposed cable from damage. M. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or plastic cable ties to support cables from structure. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. N. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. O. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. P. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. Q. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. 03879198 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 3 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION R. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. z S. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. T. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. U. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 16195. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated. V. The number of conductors in each conduit run shall be limited to the requirements as indicated on the drawings and stated in Note 8 of article 310-16 of the National Electrical Code. W. Install all conductors in conduit unless specifically noted otherwise in other specification sections. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NcETA ATS, Section 7.3.1. END OF SECTION 16123 03879198 BUILDING WIRE AND CABLE 16123 - 4 04/99 lr" POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION r 6 i. r7 SECTION 16130 BOXES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. B. Pull and junction boxes. C. Floor boxes. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS: A. Section 07270 - Firestopping. B. Section 16140 - Wiring Devices: Wall plates in finished areas. 1.3 REFERENCES: 9616 A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings and Supports for Conduit and Cable Assemblies. C. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet -steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum). E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT: A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Submittals for Project closeout. B. Record actual locations and mounting heights of outlet, pull, and junction boxes on project record documents. 1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS: A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS: 2.1 OUTLET BOXES: A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS'1, galvanized steel. B. Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include half -inch (13 mm) male fixture studs where required. C. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1 , Type FD, cast feralloy. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. D. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 16140. 2.2 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES: A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Hinged Enclosures: As specified in Section 16160. 03879198 BOXES 16130-1 04/99 f POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 C. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat -flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. 2.3 FLOOR BOXES: A. Boxes shall be for use in raised floor applications. B. Provide floor boxes with hinged covers and trim ring for use in tile. C. Floor boxes shall have three separate compartments to accommodate power and communication devices. D. Boxes shall be Walker AFI with gray colored flange or approved equal. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION: A. Verify locations of outlets in all locations areas prior to rough -in. 3.2 INSTALLATION: A. Install boxes in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." B. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections and compliance with regulatory requirements. C. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights specified in section for outlet device. D. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Adjust box location up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. E. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 16140. F. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. G. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. H. Inaccessible Ceiling Areas: Install outlet and junction boxes no more than 6 inches (150 mm) from ceiling access panel or from removable recessed luminaire. I. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07270. J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters, benches, and backsplashes. K. Locate outlet boxes to allow luminaires positioned as shown on reflected ceiling plan. L. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. All such devices shall be mounted at the same elevation. M. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. N. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. O. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. P. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. Q. Use stamped steel bridges to fasten flush mounting outlet box between studs. In lieu of bridges, provide boxes with brackets that limited box travel by contacting the adjacent wall. R. Install flush mounting box without damaging wall insulation or reducing its effectiveness. S. Use adjustable steel channel fasteners for hung ceiling outlet box. T. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. 03879198 BOXES 16130 - 2 04/99 r- r r POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION U. Support boxes independently of conduit. V. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. W. Use gang box with plaster ring for single device outlets. X. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. Non-metallic boxes shall not be used. Y. Large Pull Boxes: Use hinged enclosure in interior dry locations, surface -mounted cast metal box in other locations. Z. Adjust floor boxes and trim rings for proper alignment. 3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS: A. Coordinate Installation of outlet box for equipment connected under Section 16180. 3.4 ADJUSTING: A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Adjusting installed work. B. Adjust flush -mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. C. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.5 CLEANING: A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean interior of boxes to remove dust, debris, and other material. C. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish. 03879198 04/99 END OF SECTION 16130 BOXES 16130 - 3 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION G SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Device plates and covers. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 16130 - Boxes. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA - Standard of Installation. B. NEMA WD 1 - General Requirements for Wiring Devices. C. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Requirements. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide Products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 1221-1. 2. Leviton 1221-I. 3. General Electric 5951-2G 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, 20 amp, Heavy -Duty, AC only general -use snap switch. t 03879198 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 1 04/99 i POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 9616 C. Body and Handle: nylon ivory handle. D. Utilize equivalent series of manufacturer's numbers above for three-way, four-way and two -pole applications. 2.2 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell 5362 2. Leviton 5362 3. General Electric 5362 4. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600. B. Description: NEMA WD 1, Heavy-duty, duplex receptacle. C. Device Body: Ivory plastic. D. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. E. Convenience Receptacle: Type 5-20. F. GFCI Receptacle: Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. Hubbell 5362-1 or equivalent. 2.3 WALL PLATES A. Decorative Cover Plate: Stainless steel. B. Weatherproof Cover Plate: Gasketed cast metal with gasketed device cover on exterior devices. C. Surface Mounted Plates: Galvanized steel plates PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed at proper height. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean debris from outlet boxes. 3.3 INSTALLATION A. B. C. D. E. F. G. H. I. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation." Install devices plumb and level. Install switches with OFF position down. Do not share neutral conductor on load side of dimmers. Install receptacles with grounding pole on top. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. Use jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls. 03879198 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 2 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION J. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted outlets. 3.4 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 16130 to obtain mounting heights specified and indicated on drawings. B. Install all wall switches, thermostats, intercom call -in switches at 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor. D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above backsplash of counter. E. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor. F. Install telephone jack for side -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 52 inches above finished floor. G. Install telephone jack for forward -reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 42 above finished floor. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each wiring device for defects. B. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. C. Verify that each receptacle device is energized. D. Test each receptacle device for proper polarity. E. Test each GFCI receptacle device for proper operation. F. Verify that each telephone jack is properly connected and circuit is operational. 3.6 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Adjusting installed work. B. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.7 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean exposed surfaces to remove splatters and restore finish. END OF SECTION 16140 03879198 WIRING DEVICES 16140 - 3 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 16170 GROUNDING AND BONDING 9616 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding electrodes and conductors. B. Equipment grounding conductors. C. Bonding. 1.2 REFERENCES A. Section 01400 - Quality Control: Requirements for references and standards. B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems (International Electrical Testing Association). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 GROUNDING SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Metal underground water pipe. B. Metal frame of the building. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 10 ohms minimum. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide for grounding electrodes and connections. 1.6 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Procedures for submittals. B. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and grounding electrodes. C. Certificate of Compliance: Indicate approval of installation by authority having jurisdiction. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and with service facilities within 100 miles of Project. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 03879198 GROUNDING & BONDING 16170 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION PART PRODUCTS 2.1 MECHANICAL CONNECTORS A. Material: Bronze. 2.2 EXOTHERMIC CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: Cadweld. 2.3 WIRE A. Material: Stranded copper. B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Size to meet NFPA 70 requirements. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Provide bonding to meet Regulatory Requirements. B. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. B. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13. END OF SECTION 16170 03879198 GROUNDING & BONDING 16170 - 2 04/99 CPOLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and II Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Conduit and equipment supports. B. Anchors and fasteners. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NECA - National Electrical Contractors Association. B. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of ANSI/NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS A. Materials and Finishes: Provide adequate corrosion resistance. B. Provide materials, sizes, and types of anchors, fasteners and supports to carry the loads of equipment and conduit. Consider weight of wire in conduit when selecting products. C. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Concrete Structural Elements: Use expansion anchors, powder actuated anchors and preset inserts. 2. Steel Structural Elements: Use beam clamps, spring steel clips and steel ramset fasteners. 3. Concrete Surfaces: Use self -drilling anchors and expansion anchors. 4. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 5. Wood Elements: Use wood screws. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. t" B. Provide anchors, fasteners, and supports in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". I C. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, and conduit. D. Obtain permission from Engineer before drilling or cutting structural members. r l 03879198 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION E. Fabricate supports from structural steel as indicated on drawings. Rigidly weld members or use hexagon head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use lock washers under all nuts. F. Install surface -mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. G. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards one inch off wall. _ H. Install conduit supports a maximum spacing specified in the NEC. END OF SECTION 16190 03879198 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16190 - 2 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 9616 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements apply to work in this section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates and labels. B. Wire and cable markers. 1.3 REFERENCES A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Nameplates and Labels: Engraved three -layer laminated plastic, white letters on black background. B. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Field disconnects, start stop stations, control panels. C. Letter Size: 1. Use 1 /4 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. 2. Use 1 /4 inch letters for identifying grouped equipment and loads. 2.2 MARKERS A. All junction boxes in accessible locations shall have the box cover labeled to indicate which circuit and panel they are served from. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.2 APPLICATION A. Install nameplate and label parallel to equipment lines. B. Secure nameplate to equipment front using screws or rivets. 03879198 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION C. Identify underground conduits using underground warning tape. Install one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade. Identify all conduit at exposed locations into all boxes, cabinets, etc. D. Identify all conductors at every termination indicating endpoints of termination and tag identification as required. E. Color coding for phase identification: 120/240 volts Phase Black A Red B White Neutral Green Ground F. Conductor phase and voltage identification shall be made by color -coded insulation for all conductors smaller than No. 6 AWG. For conductors No. 6 AWG and larger, identification shall be made by color -coded insulation, or conductors with black insulation may be furnished and identified by colored electrical tape. Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. END OF SECTION 16195 03879198 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16195 - 2 04/99 r r" POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 16441 ENCLOSED SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fusible switches. B. Nonfusible switches. C. Fuses. 1.2 REFERENCES A. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. C. UL 198C - High -Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type. D. UL 198E - Class R Fuses. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01340. B. Product Data: Provide switch ratings and enclosure dimensions. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and shown. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Square D B. General Electric C. Westinghouse 2.2 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. Fusible or Non -fusible as indicated. B. Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position. 03879198 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16441 -1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION C. Fuse Clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, class R fuses. D. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. 1 . Interior Dry Locations: Type 1 . 2. Exterior Locations: Type 3R or 4. E. Current rating of switch to be equal to or greater than that of the circuit it is interrupting. 2.3 FUSES A. Manufauturers: 1. Bussman 2. Littlefuse 3. Gould Shawmut B. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated. — C. Voltage: Provide fuses with suitable voltage ratings for phase to phase voltages. D. Service Entrance: Class L, Bussman Low -peak or equivalent. E. General Purpose Loads: Class RK1 , Bussman Low -peak or equivalent. F. Motor Loads: Class RK5, Bussman Fusetron or equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with NECA "Standard of Installation". B. Install fuses in all fusible disconnects. C. Apply adhesive tag on the inside door of all disconnects indicating the NEMA class fuse and size installed. D. Provide a disconnect switch for all equipment where indicated or required by the National Electrical Code. Coordinate with other disciplines to determine where disconnects are furnished with equipment. -- END OF SECTION 16441 03879198 ENCLOSED SWITCHES 16441 -2 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9616 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B. Related Sections 1. Section 16190 - Supporting Devices. 2. Section 16195 - Electrical Identification: Engraved nameplates. 1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes 1. Distribution and Branch circuit panelboards. B. References 1. NECA (National Electrical Contractors Association) "Standard of Installation." 2. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers. 3. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. 4. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 5. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards. 6. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less. 7. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes. B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Record actual locations of Products; indicate actual branch circuit arrangement. a 1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit under provisions of General Conditions. Maintenance Data: Include spare parts data listing; and recommended maintenance procedures and intervals. r, q q. 03879198 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 1 04/99 � i POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS _ A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience. 1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. Furnish products listed and classified by UL as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify that field measurements are as indicated. 1.10 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide maintenance materials under provisions of General Conditions. Provide two of _ each panelboard key if required. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PANELBOARDS A. Manufacturers: 1. General Electric 2. Square-D 3. Westinghouse B. Description: NEMA PB-1, circuit breaker type. C. Panelboard Bus: Copper with ratings as indicated. Provide a copper ground bus in each _ panelboard. D. Minimum integrated short circuit rating: Fully rated devices with minimum levels as indicated. _ E. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: NEMA AB 1, bolt -on, circuit breakers with integral thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as type HACR for air-conditioning equipment loads and type SWD for switching applications. F. Enclosure: NEMA PB-1, Type 1. G. Cabinet Front: Surface or recessed type as indicated on the drawings, fastened with concealed trim clamps, hinged door with flush lock, metal directory frame, and finished in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 03879198 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 2 04/99 F POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1. Install panelboards plumb. Provide supports in accordance with drawings and Section 16190. Height: 6 ft maximum to top of panelboard. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards. Provide typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Revise directory to reflect circuiting changes required to balance phase loads. Spare slots shall be labeled as such in erasable pencil on directory. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. B. Provide three empty 1 inch conduits from each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above and label as "spare". C. Ground each panelboard in accordance with section 16170. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and test for grounds on each circuit after installation is completed. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder; rearrange circuits in the panelboard to balance the phase loads to within 15 percent of each other. Maintain proper phasing for multi -wire branch circuits. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment, anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses. 03879198 04/99 END OF SECTION 16470 PANELBOARDS 16470 - 3 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 16481 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS PART1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings, General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements to Work of this Section. 1.2 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manual motor starters. B. Magnetic motor starters. C. Combination magnetic motor starters. 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70- National Electrical Code. B. UL 1 98C - High -Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Type. C. UL 1 98E - Class R Fuses. D. NECA "Standard of Installation," published by National Electrical Contractors Association. E. NEMA ICS 2 - Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies. F. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems. G. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of other Section. B. Product Data: Provide catalog sheets showing voltage, controller size, ratings and size of switching and overcurrent protective devices, short circuit ratings, dimensions, and enclosure details. C. Test Reports: Indicate field test and inspection procedures and test results. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by Product testing agency specified under Regulatory Requirements. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of Product. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform Work in accordance with NECA Standard of Installation. B. Maintain one copy of each document on site. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03879198 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 -1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. — B. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUAL CONTROLLERS A. Manual Motor Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller with overload element, NO auxiliary contact, and toggle operator. _ B. Fractional Horsepower Manual Controller: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A manually operated, full -voltage controller for fractional horsepower induction motors, with thermal Overload unit, and toggle operator. C. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6; Type 1. 2.2 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS A. Magnetic Motor Controllers: NEMA ICS 2, AC general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors rated in horsepower. B. Coil operating voltage: 120V or as required to coordinate with control equipment. C. Overload Relay: Solid state type. D. Enclosure: NEMA ICS 6, Type 1. 2.3 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND FEATURES A. Auxiliary Contacts: NEMA ICS 2, 2 each field convertible contacts in addition to seal -in ` contact. B. Cover Mounted Pilot Devices: NEMA ICS 2, heavy duty type. C. Pushbuttons: Recessed type, D. Indicating Lights: LED type. E. Selector Switches: Rotary type. F. Relays: NEMA ICS 2. G. Control Power Transformers: 120 volt secondary. Provide fused primary and secondary, and bond unfused leg of secondary to enclosure. 2.4 DISCONNECTS A. Combination Controllers: Combine motor controllers with fusible switch disconnect in common enclosure. B. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate Class R fuses. 2.5 FUSES A. Description: Dual element, current limiting, time delay, one-time fuse, 250V volt, UL 198E, Class RK 5. B. Interrupting Rating: 200,000 rms amperes. 03879198 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 -2 04/99 r- POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed controllers where indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Provide a motor controller for all equipment not furnished as integral with equipment. Coordinate actual motor loads with overload protection. B. Install enclosed controllers plumb. Provide supports in accordance with Section 16190. C. Height: 5 ft to operating handle. D. Install fuses in fusible switches. E. Select and install overload heater elements in motor controllers to match installed motor characteristics. F. Provide engraved plastic nameplates under the provisions of Section 16195. G. Provide neatly typed label inside each motor controller door identifying motor served, nameplate horsepower, full load amperes, code letter, service factor, and voltage/phase rating. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of other Sections. B. Inspect and test each enclosed controller to NEMA ICS 2. 03879198 04/99 END OF SECTION 16481 ENCLOSED MOTOR CONTROLLERS 16481 - 3 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 16510 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 9616 PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Interior luminaires and accessories. B. Exit signs. C. Ballasts. D. Fluorescent lamp emergency power supply. E. Lamps. F. Luminaire accessories. 1.2 REFERENCES A. ANSI C82.1 - Ballasts for Fluorescent Lamps - Specifications. B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices -Dimensional Requirements. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. D. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. 1.3 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions and components for each luminaire that is not a standard product of the manufacturer. C. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data. 1.4 SUBSTITUTIONS: A. Refer to Section 16000 for requirements. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR CLOSEOUT A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Submittals for project closeout. B. Submit manufacturer's operation and maintenance instructions for each product. 1.6 QUALIFICATIONS A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101. C. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 03879198 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616, SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 1.8 EXTRA PRODUCTS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. — PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 LUMINAIRES A. Furnish Products as scheduled. Refer to Section 01600 for substitutions and product — options. 2.2 EXIT SIGNS A. Furnish products as scheduled. 2.3 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS - A. Manufacturers: 1. Advance. 2. Motorola. 3. Magnatek. 4. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Substitutions: Permitted. _ B. Description: ANSI C82.1, high power factor type electronic ballast, suitable for lamps specified. C. Voltage: Match luminaire voltage. D. Source Quality Control:: Certify fluorescent ballast design and construction by Certified Ballast Manufacturers, Inc. E. All ballasts shall be UL listed, Class P, with a sound rating of Class A and shall contain no PCBs. F. Ballasts shall comply with 47 CFR 18 for electromagnetic interference and shall not interfere with the operation of other electrical equipment. G. Unless otherwise indicated (i.e. dual switches) the minimum number of ballasts per fixture shall be used. H. Light output regulation shall be +/- 10%. I. Power factor shall not be less than 0.95. J. A 60 Hz filter shall be provided. 2.4 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Lamp Manufacturers: 1. Sylvania. 2. General Electric. 3. Philips. 4. Section 01600 - Materials and Equipment: Substitutions: Permitted. B. Lamp Types: As specified for luminaire. Provide 3500 degrees Kelvin lamps for all fluorescent fixtures. 03879198 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510 2 04/99 — POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION t PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install suspended luminaires using pendants supported from swivel hangers. Provide pendant length required to suspend luminaire at indicated height. B. Locate recessed ceiling luminaires as indicated on reflected ceiling plan. C. Install surface mounted luminaires and exit signs plumb and adjust to align with building lines and with each other. Secure to prevent movement. Four foot fixtures shall be securely fastened to the T-bar of dropped ceilings to prevent movement. D. Exposed Grid Ceilings: Support surface mounted luminaires on grid ceiling directly from building structure. E. Install recessed luminaires to permit removal from below. F. Install recessed luminaires using accessories and firestopping materials to meet regulatory requirements for fire rating. G. Install clips to secure recessed grid -supported luminaires in place. H. Install wall mounted luminaires, emergency lighting units and exit signs at height as indicated on Drawings or as scheduled. I. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire. J. Make wiring connections to branch circuit using building wire with insulation suitable for temperature conditions within luminaire. K. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. L. Install specified lamps in each emergency lighting unit, exit sign, and luminaire. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection. Inspect for proper connection and operation. 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Adjusting installed work. B. Aim and adjust luminaires as directed. C. Position exit sign directional arrows as indicated. 3.4 CLEANING A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Cleaning installed work. B. Clean electrical parts to remove conductive and deleterious materials. C. Remove dirt and debris from enclosures. D. Clean photometric control surfaces as recommended by manufacturer. E. Clean finishes and touch up damage. 3.5 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Demonstrating installed work. F 03879198 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510 - 3 04199 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 3.6 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Protecting installed work. B. Relamp luminaires that have failed lamps at Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16510 9616 03879198 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES 16510 - 4 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 9616 PART1 GENERAL 1.1 SECTION INCLUDES A. Manual fire alarm stations. B. Automatic detectors. C. Fire alarm signaling appliances. D. Auxiliary fire alarm equipment. 1.2 RELATED SECTIONS A. 01400 — Quality Control B. 16111 — Conduit C. 16123 - Building Wire and Cable 1.3 REFERENCES A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code. B. NFPA 72 — National Fire Alarm Code. C. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code. D. State of Texas Accessibility Standards E. Federal American's with Disability's Act. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Fire Alarm System: System is comprised of a new manual and automatic local fire alarm system with connections for off site reporting. 1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW A. Section 01300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals. B. Product Data: Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Shop Drawings: Provide a system layout and wiring diagram showing each device and the wiring connections that are required. D. Test Reports: Provide testing reports for certification that the system has been tested and inspected. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate the application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by the Product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting of products. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101. B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 03879198 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 1 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in installing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience, and certified by State of Texas as fire alarm installer. D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. testing firm acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. 1.7 MAINTENANCE SERVICE A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout. B. Provide service and maintenance of fire alarm equipment for one year from Date of Substantial Completion. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Notifier. B. Firelite. C. Pyrotronics. D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01600 - Material and Equipment. Substitutions permitted. 2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL A. Control Panel: The control panel shall be a Notifier AFP-200 or approved equal. The system shall be microprocessor controlled and shall communicate with intelligent detectors, addressable modules, annunciators and other system controlled devices. B. The system shall include alarm and trouble relays. C. The control panel shall feature a full operator interface control and annunciation panel that includes a backlit Liquid Crystal Display, individual, color coded system status LEDs, and a alphanumeric keypad for the field programming and control of the fire alarm system. All programming shall be achieved without special equipment and without interrupting the alarm monitoring functions of the Control panel. D. The following minimum features shall be included in the Control Panel: 1. Drift compensation to extend detector accuracy over life. 2. Sensitivity Test compliant with NFPA 72. 3. System status reports for display. 4. Non -Alarm points for general (nonfire) control. 5. Periodic detector tests conducted automatically by system software. 6. March time and temporal coding options. 7. Walk test option. E. The system display shall provide all system control and indication of the system parameters. The display shall provide for custom alphanumeric labels for all intelligent detectors, modules and zones. The display shall include operator functions for SIGNAL SILENCE, RESET, DRILL, AND ACKNOWLEDGE. F. The Signal Line Circuit (SLC) shall provide power to and communicate with up to 99 intelligent detectors and 99 intelligent modules (monitor and control) for a total system capacity of 198 devices. This shall be accomplished over a single SLC loop and shall be provided with NFPA 72 Style 4 wiring. The detector software shall allow manual or automatic sensitivity adjustment. 03879198 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 -2 04/99 �i POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION a G. The control panel shall be housed in a UL listed cabinet suitable for flush mounting. The door shall be key locked and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators. H. A Universal Digital Alarm Communicator Transmitter (UDACT) shall be provided for communicating digital information between the fire alarm control panel and a UL —Listed central station. The UDACT shall include connections for dual telephone lines per NFPA I requirements. Extend a 4 pair, #22 AWG telephone cable in '/z" conduit from the control panel to the building's telephone terminal location. r. I. The system power supply and battery charger shall operate on 120 volts, 60 Hz. and shall provide for all of the power needs of the system. J. Any proposed control panel substitutions shall also comply with all other system features that are included with the system specified by manufacturer name and number indicated as a part of this specification. 2.3 INITIATING DEVICES A. Manual Station: Semi -Flush mounted, addressable type, double action manual station with key operated test -reset lock, and shall be so designed so they cannot be restored to normal position except by the use of a key. Station shall have the work "FIRE" on the front of the unit in raised letters. Stations shall be red in color. Provide manufacturer's standard backbox. Pulling force required for operation shall comply with ADA requirements. B. Intelligent Photoelectric Duct Mounted Detectors: The detectors shall comply with the requirements of the photoelectric detectors above and shall notify the fire alarm control panel and initiate shutdown of the associated mechanical equipment. Provide detector housings, sampling tubes and interface relaying as required to shut down units on general alarm. Provide remote ceiling mounted annunciators for each duct mounted detector. C. Modules: Monitor and control modules shall be provided for the system as required for the operations as indicated. Control modules for Notification Appliance Circuits shall supervise the circuits and shall be wired as Style Y in accordance with NFPA. 2.4 SIGNALING APPLIANCES A. Audible/Visual Devices: The devices shall be combination horn/light units. The audible portion of the device shall have a sound output level of at least 90 dBA measured at 10 feet from the device. This visual portion of the devices shall meet the requirements of the American's with Disability's Act and the Texas Accessibility Standards. Minimum candela level for the strobe light intensity shall be 75 and the flash rate shall be a minimum of 1 Hz and a maximum of 3 Hz. The maximum flash duration shall be two - tenths of one second. B. Exterior signaling appliances: Devices shall be rated for exterior use. 2.5 AUXILIARY DEVICES A. Provide 120V power, control transformers and control wiring as required for connection to any smoke dampers. B. Provide for all control wiring and connections for interface with extinguishing equipment and all mechanical equipment. F 03879198 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 3 r.. 04/99 POLICE SQUARE SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 2.6 FIRE ALARM WIRE AND CABLE 9616 A. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wire as specified in Section 16123. B. Fire alarm circuit conductors have insulation color or coded as follows: C. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: Black, red, white. D. Initiating Device Circuit: Black, red. E. Signal Device Circuit: Blue (positive), white (negative). F. Door Release: Gray, gray. G. All fire alarm wiring shall be installed in conduit. All wiring methods and conduit runs shall comply with section 16111, Conduit. H. All fire alarm wiring shall be UL listed for use as a fire protective signaling system. 1. All wiring shall be comply with the recommendations by the fire alarm equipment manufacturer. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Provide for the service of a competent, factory -trained engineer or technician authorized by the manufacturer of the fire alarm equipment to technically supervise and participate during all of the adjustments and tests for the system. All testing shall comply with _ NFPA. B. Before energizing the wiring, check for correct connections and tests for shorts and grounds. C. Install manual station with operating handle 48 inches above floor. Install audible and visual signal devices 80 inches above floor or 12 inches below the ceiling, whichever is lower. D. Mount outlet box for electric door holder to withstand 80 pounds pulling force. E. Connect conduit and wire to door release devices. F. Automatic Detector Installation: Conform to NFPA G. At a minimum provide the following systems tests: 1. Open and short signal line circuits and verify that a trouble signal actuates. 2. Open and short notification appliance circuits and verify that trouble signal actuates. 3. Ground all circuits and verify response of trouble signals. — 4. Check presence and audibility of tone at all notification devices. 5. Check the installation, supervision and operation of all initiating devices. 6. Check proper operation of mechanical unit shutdown. 7. All alarm inputs and optional features shall be verified. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Test in accordance with NFPA 72 and local fire department requirements. 3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES A. Section 01650 - Starting of Systems: Prepare and start systems. B. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final connections, and system testing. 03879198 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 4 04/99 POLICE SQUARE 9616 SECOND FLOOR RENOVATION 3.4 DEMONSTRATION AND INSTRUCTIONS A. Section 01700 - Contract Closeout: Demonstrating installed work. B. Demonstrate normal and abnormal modes of operation, and required responses to each. 03879198 04/99 END OF SECTION 16721 FIRE ALARM SYSTEMS 16721 - 5